r ^: ^. J^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ^- CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommag^e I I Covers restored and/or laminated/ I? Couverture restaur6e et/ou pellicul6e Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque rXy Coloured maps/ \Jj\^ Cartes gdographiques en couleur I I Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bieue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur D D D ^ Bound with other material/ Relid avec d'autref documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serrde paut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge int6rieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ 11 se peut que certain > i pages blanches aJout6es lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont pas 6t6 film6es. Additional comments:/ Commentaires suppi^mentaires A of 3 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il iui a 6td possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la m6thode normale de filmage sont indiquds ci-dessous. I I Coloured pages/ D D This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film6 au taux de reduction indiquA ci-dessous. Pages de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagtos Pages restored and/oi Pages restaur6es et/ou peliiculdes Pages discoloured, stained or foxei Pages ddcoiordes, tachet6es ou piqu6es Pages detached/ Pages d6tach6es Showthrough/ Transparence I — I Pages damaged/ I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ I — I Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ I I Pages detached/ J I Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ Quality indgale de I'impression Includes supplementary material/ Comprend du materiel suppl^mentaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont M fllm6es d nouveau de fapon d obtenir la meilleure image possible. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X Z 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 3. i^.jM^w^i>«awt.ajft>iB'va6iai The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: Library of Congress Photoduplication Service The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol — ^ (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: 1 2 3 L'exempiaire film6 fut reproduit grdce d la g6n6rosit6 de: Library of Congress Photoduplication Service Les images suivantes ont dt6 reproduites avec ie plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nettetd de l'exempiaire film6, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimde sont fiimds en commenpant par Ie premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration. soit par Ie second plat, selon Ie cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont film6s en commenpant par la premidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon Ie cas: Ie symbole — ► signifie "A SUIVRE ", Ie symbole V signifie "FIN". Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre film^s d des taux de reduction diff6rents. Lorsque Ie document est trop grand pour dtre reproduit en un seul clich6, il est film6 d partir de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant Ie nombre d'images n6cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la m6thode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 mm»mm \ mi in '«'''^**B6ife»,(,-...;, No. 108. III 1/^ C^ HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE. < > SAILING DIRECTIONS TOB THE GREAT LAKES AND CON^NECTING WATERS. WASHINGTON: GOVERNMENT PRINTING OPEICB, 1896. ' i ^^'p m ♦ -.^i, . 1 '***»tej:*; *' ♦• •&-s}^i£^''~^ -.S»3^ 4 — , CONTENTS. Preface Page. Note .*""... ^ Index chart *■•"•---•■-•—•.-........ vii Index '.".... ^"^ List of Hydrographic Office publications '...''.'.'." ^ List of HydrograpMc Office airents * 239 CHAPTER I. Currents 1 CHAPTER II. Lake Superior .... ... " 6 CHAPTER III, St. Marys river and Detour passage CHAPTER IV. Strait of Mackinac. .. ■■' 48 CHAPTER V. Lake Micliigan ........ 59 CHAPTER VI. Green bay 106 CHAPTER VII. Lake Huron ; 117 CHAPTER VIII. St. Clair and Detroit rivers and lake St. Clair ................. ,,,,,______^ jjjjj CHAPTER IX. Lake Erie 145 CHAPTER X. Lake Ontario • 180 III ■"*«■•■•«*. >■ k .^ii*..«to»„,„ , if: .* ♦--^ PREFACE. n 5 M ? ^'^""l' comprising four volumes, was prepared by Lieut. m > ' A. !"' Z""'^ ^^^^' ^^^y' ^'''^ ^y Mr. James H Reid, Uuited States Navy, aud Mr. R. O. Ray, United States Navy. The present edition has been revised and corrected to date, for the latest mformation, by Mr. R. O. Ray, United States Navy. In this edition It has been thought best to present in one volume complete saihng directions for the Great Lakes, leaving out the several a^Ss It! T nT "'^^"l ? "^^"°""«- ^« *»»i« ^o^J^ « necessarily incom- plete the Office must depend upon the cooperation of those who dwell near the lakes, as well as those who navigate them, for prompt info mation con^ming any errors or omissions, or the discovery of new dangers, and such cooperation is earnestly requested The charts were prepared by Mr. G. W. Littlehales, in charge of the Jlriron. * ^«-*-««- of this Office, and p'rintedTdL S^ liZnl^^^r^'^^J'^. *^** "^^""^ "^*°S«« ^^^^ P^^ i^ the buoys, lights, and other parts described in this volume; consequently the volume has to be corrected for the Notices to Mariners foHhe Great Lakes, which are published monthly by the Hydrographic Office and which contain the latest information obtainable from alnurces' ^ ^ 0. D. SjtO' BEE, TT.„ o ComwojMfer, United States Navy, Sydroaratther United States Htdeogeaphio Office, ^y^'-oarapner. WaHhington^ D. 0., August 1, 1896. " "*"»■- i«Mi)ia NOTE, distances are given in ZrLl^^ '"'""'«' "'"' «»"«» "« *■•«.• '■''Ste.JSw iVv....i^sti*v:9 i.,;-,rf#i-ij,^,j,j, J,;, ; ^.J*^-' J%e ekartt rtferr«d to in black are imued ttp Ou Hifdrogrt^ie QgUe, Ifavp Drpartmenf. J%oie vhoae UmiU are indicated bm dotted Unet are in eouree of oonttrmefion. Thr charts referred to in blue are imind by thr 11/ of the Chief nf Bnginerrt, War Dt-parimml aj' HI" BO' 13' 7«- IT If IV IV IS* H' ir 70* 8»' -| — r—T — r-| — I — 1—7 — I — I — I — r ■ y i — r -i — f T — TT -j-y, — r- J r- 1 I { - f r- < Y I ;r r' ] T-r—i — j—t — f t | — i — r—T' M il "11 < H l *ll|IWI H l»*«WIW*M H III llllfcl \ ¥ ruronta-I lby-li^ l^^-j.- f ~0 ^ 'Jt T A. S jr id TF T ' O 31 > .^ p t; w y s Y X v jt jr j a -wv -«' --W THi: GREAT X.:A.8J>:$ IKDEX TO COAST, SPECIAL HARBOB CHARTS M M -W — 'tit -w -.»2" _J k—J L_J J L'. 1 . - ,L_1.-L.-J. J _) L -.i_ l—L.. ' t—L X^J- i. 82* »i' 80* -ft' i«" ,:•:• J I,... I, t .1., J. -I L ..L.j__i...i--L w j_j l_^j 1 I ■ t ■ t I r _i«0' ■:i' 70° «;>• if erred to in blue are intiutd by tlu- offtrt- ief of Engineert, War Di^irfmmt The tkartt nferrtd to i» red an imuieA by the BKNi* il are nninodal, stationary vibrations of lake water. They appear in the form of waves, which alternately raise and depress the water of the lake on each side of the nodal line of the oscil- lation. • * • "As the area of the Great Lakes is so large, the nninodal seiche would naturally be of infrequent occurrence, as a powerful blow must be struck on a comparatively large area to produce it. "But this nninodal vibration does exist on the Great Lakes. Gen. 0. B. Comstock states in the United States Chief of Engineer's Report for 1872, page 1040, that there is a wave constantly passing between Milwaukee and Grand Haven on lake Michigan. The tide gauges show that there are eleven great waves per day at each of these places, and the waves have a period of a trifle over two hours. • • • • . # « * "A tracing of the tide gauge at Grand Haven, Mich., for the month of April, 1893, shows a two-hour-andtwelve-minute period with great exactness. Every day in the month this period can be distinguished, although on some days it is almost obliterated by minute seiches, or 'embroidery,' while a crest is often marked by another superposed seiche in stormy weather; but the succeeding crest appears after the two-hour period. • • • *'In his report for 1872, General Comstock cites some remarkable seiches observed by Major Wilson at Oswego. The first one occurred on June 13, 1872. Its period was from twenty to thirty minutes, and during its continuance a white squall passed to the north, over the lake, accompanied by a small waterspout. An employee of the survey, who happened to be out on the lake, reported that he heard strange noises, bubbles came to the top of the water, and the fish rose to the surface as if stunned. • • • "On Friday morning, April 7, 1893, the port of Chicago was visited by a tidal wave, bore, a phenomenon called seiches, or, in plain terms, a sudden vertical motion of the water in the southern portion of lake Michigan, for it appears the wave swept over the beach at St. Joseph, Mich., 700 feet back from the high-wat>er mark, the vertical rise at that point being given as 4 feet, a report which is duly authenticated from Chicago. At the latter port a recurring wave, which also characterized the St. Joseph phenomenon, caused great damage to the shipping and called forth the assistance of tugs and port officials to secure the dis- abled vessels broken adrift through the force of the tidal wave. * • » "The following extract from a letter of H. C. Frankenfield, local fore- cast official at Chicago, will, perhaps, give a good idea of the weather conditions there on April 7, the date of the above-mentioned seiche: "'High winds commenced about 2.30 p. m., April 6, blowing steadily from the SE. until 1.30 a. m., April 7, when they shifted to ]N^KE., blow- ■Extracts from an article on "The Seiche in America," by E. A. Perkins. liBhed in the American Meteorological Journal, October, 1893. Fub- lake water. md depress ' the oscil- )dal seicbe blow must ikes. Gen. ler's Report ig between ide gauges lese places, the month with great liinguisbed, seiches, or superposed -s after the 'emarkable e occurred inutes, and I, over the ;he survey, rd strange sh rose to ras visited lain terms, ion of lake it. Joseph, ise at that cated from irac'terized ipping and [re the dis- ive. * • • , local fore- le weather I seiche : ig steadily NE., blow- kins. Fab> «*■-. tr «• 1 I r u e d a CURRENTS. d ing from tbat quarter niitil I a. m., when tliey again went to SE, Tlie velocity varied from 30 miles per hour at 2.30 p. m., April 6, to 43 miles per hour at 1.50 a. ni., April 7. '"The wave occurred between 1.30 and 1.46 a. m., April 7, and its hei'-jht was from 4 to G feet. The damage done was princii)ally to ves- sels anchored in the river. Several were torn from their moorings and carried toward the laive, cansing numerous collisions with other ves- sels. Some were carried out into the lake. I do not think the wave was preceded by smaller ones, but, judging from the barometric oscil- lations after the principal wave, there must have been several smaller ones during the next two hours. These waves occur from time to time, and I have observed that they always occur at the time of a sudden and decided rise or fall in the barometer.' * * • "I have received accounts of several nnnor seiches on the (Ireat Lakes, but nothing that will bear comparison with the great seiche of April 7, 1893. This seems to be one of the largest oscillations ever observed on the lakes. It is to be regretted that synchronous observa- tions of this phenomenon were not taken by tide gauges at different points on the shore. "As to the forecasting of seiches, this can not be done with accuracy until we obtain further knowledge of the bore, and ascertain by numer- ous barographs the advance of sudden changes in the pressure of the atmosphere." From the precedtng remarks it will be seen that the steadiness and persistence of the lake currents have not yet been determined accu- rately. Their velocities have been found to vary in speed from 4 to 12 miles a day. The prevalence of westerly and southwesterly winds favors the strength and persistence of these currents, and it must be remembered that when the motion of the surface water has been communicated to the strata below, a brief change of wind, while affecting the surface, is not so soon communicated to the underlying water. OUEEENTS IN LAKE SUPERIOR. As has been stated, the main current of lake Superior is to the eastward, along the south shore. From the Apostleislands to the east- wcird of Keweenaw point this current has great width, and toward the eastern end of the lake spreads out in the shape of a fan, while a branch ftassing to the northward and westward reaches the extreme northern coast of the lake. Another branch turns to the southward, around Keweenaw point, reaches the south coast, moves to the eastward, and again joins the main current east of Marquette, Mich. In Whiteflsh bay there are evidences of a whirl, and to the westward of the Apostle islands a distinct westerly set exists. Along the NW. coast the current moves to the westward, turning, apparently, to the eastward near Two Harbors, Minn. 1 * CUKRENT8. All interesting conannation of the main current is found in the drift from wrecks. Prom the "Currents of tlie Great Lakes, as deduced from the movements of Bottle Papers durinj,' the seasons of 1892 and 1893," published by the Weather Bureau, it is learned that a consider- able portion of oil jettisoned from the steamer Northerner, stranded on Keweenaw point in November, 1892, was recovered at Deer l»ark between Grand Marais, Mich., and Whiteflsh point, on the south shore of the lake, distant over 200 miles. Many barrels of oil were chopped out of the ice by the life-saving crew and fishermen at Deer Park. Isle Royale furnishes indications of a current from the NE. in the Blind spits extending to the SW. This is very distinctly shown along several small islands on the south shore. CURKENTS IN LAKE MICHIGAN. A fresh wind of several days' duration is well known to be of impor- tance to the generally shallow harbors of the lake. Such a wind has a well-recognized eftect on the depth of water in the Chicago river. As a result of experiments, it has been found that a main current exists in lake Michigan, setting down the west coast about 10 miles off- shore, sweeping around the south end, and stretching to the northward close to the east coast. Hugging the east shore, the current sweeps through the narrow passage east of the Manitou islands, and thence by the Strait of Mackinac into lake Hnron, forming a whirl around the Beaver island group on its way to this outlet. This current is more clearly and strongly marked on the east shore than elsewhere, and it is to this that the freedom from extensive shoals and barb off the east coast is due, while brojad shallows line the west coast. Between the margin of the current and the west shore there are varying currents, sometimes to the northward and sometimes to the southward. There is a whirl around Beaver island in a direction contrary to the hands of a watch. The average speed of the current was found to be 4 to 4^ miles per day. Through Manitou passage the velocity was from 6^ to 10 miles per day. Private observations, taken with great care, showed a current of from 36 to 96 miles per day (IJ to 4 miles per hour) to the northward off Manistee, Mich. Some confirmation of these conclusions can be obtained from the disposition of sand spits, shoals, bars, etc., the piling up of sand against the breakwaters, and the directions of the rivers after entering the lake, the eastern ones trending to the northward and western ones to the southward. In Green and Traverse bays the currents run up the different arms, but very little is known about them. in the drift as deduced uf 1892 and a consider- ^tninded on Deer I'ark, south shore sre chopped r Park. NE. in the [lown along )e of impor- wind has a river, ain current miles off- northward ent sweeps i thence by around the east shore isive shoals le the west there are imes to the rary to the \ miles per to 10 miles current of thward oflf 1 from the md against itering the m ones to rent arms, THE PREVAILING CURRENTS Of LAKE HURON ,-V!'.>^.¥.v«^«;«-i^!;ii^^'>VLi«¥i„^_.-,*a*iiiii5»MWiH i* ut iA lO* 8 8 LAKE SUPERIOR. Traverse island. — Shoal water extends from the SW. end of this island for over i mile southwesterly. Portage entry is almost illled up by a flat. Fequaming point. — A spit extends SW. from this point. Abbaye point. — A dangerous shoal lies 1 (1^) mile east of this point. Buoyed. Huron River point — A large shoal extends 1^ (If) miles NE. from this point. Big Bay point. — A dangerous spit with only 8 feet of water extends one mile to the northward from this ])oint. Buoyed. Little Iron river. — I'^rom the point east of this river a spit extends ^ mile to the northward. Qranite point. — On a line between this point and the northern point of I'resque He are several rocks running parallel to the coast, and Middle island is in this line. Marquette lighthouse. — East of this lighthouse, distant 1 (1^) mile, are rocks and shoal water. Shot point and Laughing Fish point — A spit extends ^ mile north- erly from Shot point. A spit also extends J mile northerly from Laughing Fish point. Train island has shoal water extending from it about a mile to the northward and also to the westward. Between this point and the main- land are several shoals. Train point — Shoals also extend a mile from Train i>oint to the NW. and for nearly If (2) miles northeasterly toward Wood island. Wood island. — Shoal water extends ^ mile from the north point of this island, along its western side, and toward Williams island. Williams island. — There are numerous rocks and sand spits between the south point of this island and the main i?hore to the south on which there are but 8 and 10 feet of water, m.aking it dangerous for vessels drawing over 8 feet to attempt the passage between the island and the shore. Sandy point — From this point, opposite the beacon on Grand island, a spit extends North and NW. for J mile, with but 5 feet of water over it. Point au Sable. — A small spit extends out about ^ mile. 'Isle Royale and vicinity. — There are many detached rocky shoals lying SW. and N W. of the Rock of Ages, distant IJ (IJ) miles. Wash ington island is surrounded on the South, SW., and NB. by rocky shoals which must be carefully looked out for in making Washington and Grace harbors. Siskiwit bay has a double set of islets stretching for 7 miles in the general direction of the south shore, connected ^i ^..^ken reefs and having also reefs outside of the islets. Vessels shouiu not attempt any of the channels between these islands. The north shore of Isle Royale can be approached with safety to f mile. On the NW. coast from McCargoe cove to Blake point the shore should not be approached too close. Off the SW. end of Amygdaloid island there are rocks i mile DANGERS — NORTH SHORE. 9 end of this f ihi8 point. es NE. from iter extends spit extends rthern point ) coast, and 1 1 (li) mile, J mile north- rtherly from ). mile to the tnd the main- point to the )d island, orth point of )land. ipits between ath on which for vessels and and the on Grand but 5 feet of rocky shoals liles. Wash rocky shoals on and Grace g for 7 miles ^..iken reefs not attempt shore of Isle e NW. coast approached. rocks i mile distant, and from the NE. end is a chain of small islands and interlying shoals and rocks terminatem the St. Louis river through the canal, but an ebb and flow of water, which seems to be due to oscillations of the lake surface, as they change direction too fre- quently to be caused by tidal action. When heavy winds prevail from the NE. the water is forced to this end of the lake, raising the wat^r in Superior and Duluth bays, and causing a very strong outward set through the Duluth canal. This current meeting the incoming waves, renders navigation at such times very dangerous. It LAKE SUPERIOR. PUoU.— The captains of all tugs are pilots, and pilotage is incladed in the towing. Kates vary from $5 to $100, according to tonnage and diHtance. Lights.— On the outer end of the south pier of the canal is a light- house, from whicli is shown a fixed red light visible at a distance of 11^ (1.3) miloa. This liglit, in connection with a flashing red light every six seconds, on the inner end of the same pier, and 1,165 feet SW. J W. (8. 48° W.) from it, furnishes a range to guide vessels through the canal. This light is visible 13^ (15^) miles. Cantion.— Give the end of the south pier a berth of at least 20 feet, to avoid the stone riprapping. Life-saving station on Minnesota point, ^ mile south of the canal. Ohio Central coal dock light.— A fixed red light, shown from an upright on a cluster of piles, and 13 feet above the lake level. It is in 12 feet of water, southerly of the easterly corner of the Ohio Central Coal Dock, and marks the turning point into the chauue?' marked by the liico Point range. Rice Point range.— The front liglit is white, and is ehown from an upright on a cluster of piles, and 13 feet above the lake level. It stands in 7 feet of water, southeasterly from Bice point. The rear light is red, shown from an upright on a cluster of piles and 18 feet above the lake level, 510 feet S8E. § E. (8. 27° E.) from the fh)nt light. These two lights in line guide through the dredged channel, east of Bice point, from the Ohio Central Coal Docl Voacon to the turn round Bice i)oint to the southwestward. N. B. — The rear light of this range is also the rear light of Connors Point range. Connors Point range. — The front light is white, in 7 feet of water, southeasterly from Bice point, and shown from an upright on a cluster of piles, and 13 feet above the lake level. The rear light is 510 feet NE. by E. (N. 56° E.) from the front light. The two lights in line guide through the dredged channel past Bice and Connors points to the Northern Pacific Bailroad bridge at West Sui>erior, crossing the South channel. Note. — Wishing to make the North channel from the above range, a course of NW. | W. (N. 64° W.) must be headdd just before the Suiierior Bay channel upper light and the front light of the St. Louis Bay North channel east range come in line. This course will carry to the Northern Pacific Bailroad bridge, crossing the North channel. North Channel east range (St. Louis bay). — ^The front light is white, in 7 feet of water, at the easterly end of the North channel and westerly of Bice point. It is shown from an upright on a cluster of piles 13 feet above the lake level. The rear light is also white, 600 feet NE. ^ E. (N. 46° E.) from the front light. It is in 7 feet of water, and shown from an upright on a cluster of piles 18 feet above the lake level. DULUTH — ROUTES. 18 is incladed innage and is a light- listanee of f red light 1,165 feet ide vessels iast 20 feet, [' the canal, i ivn from an b1. It is in hio Oentral marked by ■xn from an e level. It of piles and a.) from the inel, east of I turn round of Connors et of water, on a cluster firont light. )l past Bice ge at West [)ve range, a before the le St. Louis ill carry to lannel. tnt light is channel and a cluster of 3.) from the Ipright on a North Channel weat range (8t Louis bay.)— The rront li^lit is Mrhite, 13 feet above the liilte level, and Hh<»wii from an upright on u cluster of piles standing in about 7 feet of water. The rear light is white, 18 feet above the lake level, SCO feet SW. j^ W. (8. 46° W.) from the front light. It i» shown trom an upright on a cluster of piles standing in 7 feet of water. These lights in range ahead, and the East Range lights in line astern, guide through the North channel from ott' Hice point nearly up to Grassy point. N. B. — The rear light of this range is also tlie roar light of the South Ohannel range. South Channel range (St Louis bay).— The front light in wliite, Kt feet above the lake level, shown from an upright on a cluster of piles standing in feet of water. The rear light is 960 feet W8W. J W. {8.70° W.) fi-om the front light. These lights in line guide through the dredged channel on the south side of St. liOnis bay trom just above the railroad bridge oft' West Superior to the westward. The clusters of piles referred to above are all square, black, pyram- idal, surmounted by a wooden platform and box with an upright of natural color. Fog signal — In connection with the outer pier lighthouse is a 10- inch steam fog whistle, which, in thick or foggy weather, gives a blast every five second, with a silent interval of thirty seconds. BOUTEB. I>nluth to St Marys river. — From Duluth lighthouse steer ENE. i E. (S. 70° E.) for 60 (69) miles, when Devil island should bear South, thence steer ENE. f E. (N. 76° E.) for 109i (125if^) miles; this should bring a vessel in sight of Eagle Harbor lighthouse by day, or light at night. When the lighthouse bears South distant 5 (5|) miles, change course to East and continue in this direction for 23^ (27^) miles, until the lighthouse on eastern end of Manitou island bears South, when shape course ESE. (8. 68° E.) for 118 (135f ) miles; this should bring a vessel 2 (2^) miles north of Whiteflsh point. The point can be rounded at this distance, and when Whiteflsh Foint light bears West, a SE. $ 8. (8. 37° E.) course tor 20 (23) miles should carry a vessel midway between Iroquois point and Gros Cap; then follow directions for St. Marys river. Dtiluth to Ontonagon, passing through Apostle islands.— From Duluth lighthouse steer ENE. J E. (N. 73° E.) for 52 (60) miles, when the passage between York and Baspberry islands will open out; thence steer to the southeastward, keeping about in mid-channel and passing Baspberry Island light at a distance of ^ mile. When the 8W. point of Oak island bears North, change course to eastward, passing north of mtmmmtmumi) 14 LAKE SUPERIOR. HermitH iHlaiul and midway between Magdulouc uii tlio south and Stockton and Michigan islands on the north, remembering' Mio Hhoals oft' NE. ])oiiit of Magdalene and south shore of Michigan ishuulH. When Michigan Island lighthouse hears North, distant not less tlian 1^ (IJj) miles, change course to E. J N. (N. 87° E.) and continue on this course for 40 (5(1^^^) miles, which should bring a vessel oft' Ontonagon. Dnluth to Ontonagon, passing north of Apostle islands. — I'rom Duluth lighthouse steer ENE. ^ E. (N. 70° E.) for 00 (69) miles, until Devil island bears South, distant about one mile, when steer East for 13J^ (l^i) miles, until the NE. poiutof Outer island bears South, distant about 3 (3i) miles; thence ESE. ^ E. (S. 73° E.) for 40 (53) miles should bring a vessel oft Ontonagon. Duluth to port Arthur and Silver Islet landing.— From Duluth lighthouse steer NE. by E. (N. 56° E.) for 149 (171A) miles, until the highest peak on the west end of Pie island bears NW. ij N. (N. 37° W.), distant OJ (7i) miles, when steer NE. J N. (N. 37° E.) for 10 (11^) miles, till Thunder cape bears North, thence shape course for Port Arthur or Silver Islet landing. WISCONSIN. Superior City is 5 (6f) miles SE. of Duluth. The natural chan- nel connecting Superior bay with lake Superior is at the southern extremity of the bay. It was obstructed by a bar, but has been improved by dredging and building piers, and now a depth of 15 feet is maintained. Superior bay is quite shallow except where the waters of the St. Louis river form through it a narrow channel. Harbor room for large modern vessels has to be provided by dredging. The channel between the piers makes an abrupt bend at the point where it enters Superior bay, consequently a vessel entering during a severe storm has great difticnlty in following this channel. Tliis can not be remedied because the Nemadji river enters the bay so near the entrance that the bar which the river maintains will not permit a change in location of the channel. The Nemadji river is navigable for tugs and vessels of light draft for 4 (4§) miles from its mouth. The channel in Superior bay has neither the directness nor width to permit vessels to reach Oonners point in safety without the assistance of 1^ tag or pilot; and in rounding from the entrance into Quebec channel in a high wind a tug is very necessary. Buoys. — Bed even-numbered and black odd-numbered buoys mark the channels. A tug makes daily inspection to keep the buoys in position. Light. — There is a fixed white light 50 feet from end of the outer end of the south pier, which is visible 12^ (14^) miles. Konth and the hIiouIh 111 iBlnudH. OBB than 1^ lue on tUiH [)ntoiiagoii. ids.— I'roin iiiilcH, until jer I?iii8t tor utli, distant uiloH should :om Duluth }.Sj until the { N. (N. 37° 5 B.) for 10 irse for Port atural chan- ,he southern lit has been th of 15 feet rs of the St. lom for large at the point ing during a This can BO near the ot permit a f light draft nor -width to le assistance into Quebec buoys mark ihe buoys in ;he outer end 8UPEEI0R BAy — LiaOTS. IS Fog signal — AOinuli steam wiiistlti in on the outor end of the Houth pier, aiHl souiids a bhiHt of tlirut) seconds followed by a silent interval of twelve seconds during thick weather. Superior Bay entrance range. — The front light is white, 18 fe^t above tli< lake level and shown from a white wooden upright, just inside the southeasterly entrance to Superior bay and on Wiscjnsin I>oint. The rear light is white, 24 feet above the lake level and shown from a white wooden upright, 320 feet SW. by W. ^ W. (S. 58° W.) from the front li|i..t. This range in line guides through the natural channel from lake Superior into the southeasterly end of Superior bay. Superior Bay range — The front light is white, IG feet above the lake level on a white wooden upright on Wisconsin ]>oiut, close to the west end of the south pier. The rear light is white, 21 feet above the lake level, on a wooden upright, 290 feet SE. ^ Vj. (S. 5:}° E.) from the front light. This range in line guides up Superior bay from inside the entrance, past the old dock on Minnesota point, to the entrance to the dredged channel to Quebec dock. Quebec Channel light. — A Axed red light, 13 feet above the level of the lake, is shown from an upright on a cluster of piles standing in 7 feet of water in the west angle formed by the intersection of the main channel with the dredged Quebec channel. It marks the entrance to Quebec channel. Superior Bay Channel lower light— A fixed white light, 13 feet above the Jake level, is shown from an upright on a cluster of piles standing in 13 feet of water on the NE. side of the main channel, and 3,500 feet NW. from Quebec Channel light. Superior Bay Channel lower middle light — A fixed white light, 13 feet above the lake level, is shown from an upright ou a cluster of piles standing in 15 feet of water on the NE. side of the main channel, and 3,800 feet NW. f W. (N. 63° W.) from the lower light. Superior Bay Channel upper middle light — A fixed white light, 13 feet above the lake level, is shown from an upright on a cluster of piles standing in li feet of water on the NE. side 9f the main channel and 4,700 feet NW. f W. (N. 55° W.) from the lower middle light and about midway of the middle ground. Superior Bay Channel upper light— A fixed white light, 13 feet above the lake level, is shown from an upright on a cluster of piles standing in 12 feet of water on the NE. end of the middle ground and NE. side of the main channel. It is 2,000 feet NW. from the upper middle light. All the above lights, excepting the pier headlight, are tubular lan- terns, and the clusters of piles are square, black, pyramidal, surmounted by a wooden platform and box with an upright of natural color. IG LAKE SUPERIOR. St Louis bay.— Xortlmest from a line joining Rice point and Oon- 110T8 point lies St. Louis bay, a continuation of Superior bay and the outlet of the St. Louis river, which enters it at Grassy point West Duluth occupies the north shore and West Superior is now stretching up in the southern side. Eight miles in a direct line from Grassy point is Fond du La«, but by the river it is 15 miles. There is very little fall to the river except for the upper mile. * This portion of the river is now being improved. Pilots.— The same as mentioned under Duluth. Dry dock.-There is a dry dock at West Superior, 500 feet over all with a depth over sill of 20 feet. ' Routes.— The routes from Superior to the entrance of St. Marys river, as also to the different ports on the lakes, are practically the same as from Duluth. ' r j « «»uic SOUTH SHORE OF LAKE SUPERIOR. Coast— The coast from Superior to the NE. is low, although bold and there are no refuges from the winds from the North and NE Bark point with Bark bay 36 (41^) miles from Superior, offers protection from all westerly winds. The bay is 2J (2^) miles deep northeasterly and southwesterly. On the east side of Bark bay a small, though hieh point separates it from Siskiwit bay. Both of these bays affbrd protec- tion from southerly winds. Prom this point vessels of all but very light draft must run outside ot Band island on account of the bar connecting Sand island with the mainland, which has but 6 or 6 feet of water on it at extreme low water Passing from Siskiwit bay outside of Sand island give Eagle and Steam- boat islands a good berth en account of the shoal spots which surround and connect them. Sand island is the most western of the Apostle group, which group comprises 19 islands, extending 29 miles ENE. and WSW. This island can be approached close-to on the nortli and west coast, but great care should be exercised when on the South and SE. oidc2. On its extreme north point is a lighthouse. Light— A fixed white light, visible 13 (16) miles in clear weather is on top of an octagonal, red sandstone tower, which rises from a sand- stone building. Vessels taking the outside route continue their course to the NNE passing north of Devils island. ' '' Devils island.— This island is the extreme northern one of the group, and on its northern point is a lighthouse. u-ft^JT^ ^^^^ ""^^ "*^^*' ^'^^*''® ^^1 (13) """^s in clear weather, is exhibited from a square, white, pyramidal, open-framework tower, the upper part of which is inclosed. point and Con- or bay aud the point, uperior is now du Lac, but by iver except for K) feet over all, i of St. Marys ically the same although bold, ,ndNE. Bark )rotection from theasterly and , though high, 3 aiibrd protec- ist run outside stand with the Bme low water. ?le and Steam- 'hich surround >, which group ^ This island but great care >n its extreme lar weather, is from a sand- to the NNE., n one of the ar weather, is )i'k tower, the SOUTH SHORE — WASHBURN. n Fog BignaL— Five hundred feet NW. of the lighthouse is a 10-inch steam whistle, which sounds a blast of five seconds' duration, followed by a silent interval of ten seconds, then a blast of five seconds' dura- tion, followed by a silent interval of forty seconds. This occurs every minute during thick weather. Continuing the outside course, vessels would here change their course to about East and pass to the north of Outer island. Outer island is the northeastern of the group. A shoal lies one mile north of this island. About the middle of its uorthei'u shore is a lighthouse. Light — ^A Hashing white light every ninety seconds, visible 17^ (20) miles in clear weather, is exhibited from the top of a conical, white, brick tower, which is connected by a covered way with a brick dwelling. Fog signaL — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds a blast of eight seo ends, followed by a silent interval of fifty-two seconds. From Outer island vessels can shape their course to any ports to the eastward. Sand Island light marks the turning point for vessels bound to Bay- field or Ashland, as also for those taking the route through the Aj^ostle group and bound for ports farther to the eastwiu*d. It is not advisable to pass to the west of York island, as slioal water extends ofi" its SW. and South shores. Vessels therefore pass to the NE. of the island and keep close to Baspberry island. Raa^/^tenry island. — Pass to the southward of this island, on the extreni'- SW. point of which is a lighthouse. Light. — A fixed white light, varied by a white flash every minute, is visible 14j^ (16^) miles in clear weather. It is exhibited from the top of a square tower on a white frame building. All through these islands the shores can generally be approached close-to, but by keeping an approximate mid-channel course vessels will be sure of good water. The south shore of Stockton island affords good anchorage from northerly winds, and all the larger islands from westerly winds. Passing between Oak island and Bed Cliff, both uf which are com- paratively high, vessels bound through the West channel keep a mid- channel course until off Bayfield. Bayfield is an open roadstead, with deep water up to the docks. "While protected from westerly gales, during NE, gales vessels have to run under La Pointe, Magdalene island, for anchorage. Bunning south from Bayfield the coast is bold and can be approached close-to. Bounding Houghton point the town of W^ashburn is seen. Washburn. — Here are two docks extending into deep water and connected by a bulkhead. Lights. — Two private lights are here exhibited, both red; one on the end of a warehouse on one dock, and on the otlier dock one from a window in the elevator. 1944~No. 108 2 18 LAKE SUPERIOR. Chequamegon bay.— The eastern point of the bay, Chequamegon point, is a low, narrow spit 6 (7) miles in length and forms a partial natural breakwater to the bay, much as Minnesota point offers to Superior bay. At its NW. end is a lighthouse. Light— A fixed red light, visible in clear weather 11 J (13) miles, is exhibited from a square tower on a white frame dwelling. Fog signal — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds a blast of five seconds, followed by a silent interval of twenty-five seconds. This lighthouse is known as La Pointe, and serves as a guide for South channel, as also for the turning point for Chequamegon bay. This bay has deep water along its Avestern shore for about 2 (2^) miles south of Washburn, when shoaling water commences. On the east side of the bay shoaling water commences on a line joining the lighthouse and the mouth of Fish creek. Vessels should be careful of soundings when to the east of this line. Give La Pointe lighthouse a good berth. Ashland.- The southern end or head of Chequamegon bay forms the harbor of Ashland, and as the length of the bay is considerable it was necessary to protect the wharves from the waves to enable vessels to use tliem at all times. When the proposed breakwater is finished it will be 8,000 feet long. It is as yet of insufficient length to give protection to all the wharves of the city, but its influence in diminish- ing the turbulence of the waters of the harbor is distinctly apparent. January, 1896, there was an available depth of 17 feet up to the ore docks. Sunken cribs.— There are two cribs filled with stone about 500 feet from shore and 200 feet east from the central ore dock. There is only 4 feet of water over them. Wreck.— There is a wreck about J mile ea it of the fog-signal build- ing on Chequamegon. point. There is only 9 feet over it, with 18 to 20 feet close outside. Michigan Island light— A fixed white light, visible 17J (20) miles, is shown from a conical, white, stone tower attached to a stone dwelling. MIOHIOAN. Coast — From Chequamegon point eastward the coast is low, com- mencing to rise about Clinton point and continuing until Porcupine mountains, 1,421 feet 'ligh, are reached. Beyond Union bay the coast again becomes low. Into Oronto bay, 18 (20f ) miles from Chequamegon point, empties the Montreal river, which forms part of the boundary line between Wisconsin and Michigan. At 61J (70f ) miles E. by N. fi-om South channel is the mouth of the Ontonagon river. AH this coast is generally steep-to. Lone rock, 9 (lOJ) miles west of Union bay, lies a short distance offshore. Ontonagoa — The Ontonagon river, forming the h; rbor, has fairly deep water in it, but its mouth is obstructed by a bar with varying depths. In order to maintain a sufficient depth of water two parallel -s ONTO? AGON — ^PORTAGE LAKE. 19^ Chequamegon )rins a partial )oiut offers to [ (13) miles, is >• if Ave seconds, as a guide for legon bay. r about 2 (2^) nces. On the ae joining tbe i be careful of 9 lighthouse a ;on bay forms sousiderable it enable vessels ber is finished ength to give ;e in diminish- ctly apparent, up to the ore ibout 500 feet There is only ^signal build- with 18 to 20 .7^ (20) miles, tone dwelling. b is low, com- til Porcupine bay the coast Uhequamegon the boundary mouth of the Lone rock, 9 lire. •or, has fairly with varying two parallel piers have been built. During fi-eshets large quantities of sand arc earned by the river, and the bar at the entrance forms as fast as the piers are extended. The channel over the bar is shifting and uncer- tain. There is an available depth of 12 feet through. • ^*?m*?:T) ^""^ "^^'^ "^^'' ^'«**'^® 12^ (14) miles in clear weather, 18 exhibited from a square, yellow, brick tower rising from a dwellinjr at the mouth of the Ontonagon river. A fixed red light (lantern) is shown from a square, brown, pyramidal oi.en-fmmework tower, upper part inclosed, on the west pier. 45 feet liom the outer end. Tliere is an elevated walk along the pier to the Fourteen-mile point is 12 (14) miles east from Ontonagon. Oft this point a spit makes out with 2^ fathoms on its outer edge. Vessels should approach it with caution. Beyond Fourteen-mile point the laud rises as Keweenaw voiixt is ai)proached. * Pourteen-mile Point light-A fixed white light, varied by a red flash every twenty seconds, is shown from a square red tower, rising in the center of the front of a red dwelling with a red roof. The watchroom and lantern are black. It is 60 feet above the lake level and IS visible in clear weather 13J (15|) miles. ' Fog signaL-A lO^inch steam whistle sounds blasts of five seconds, followed by silent intervals of twenty-five seconds. Keweenaw point is a rocky promontory projecting into the lake in a northeasterly direction. It is 65 (63*) miles long and 25 (28f ) miles wide at Its base, with a coast line of 120 (138) miles. The shores of this promontory are bold, with outlying reefs dangerous to navigation and with no good haibors to afford refiige in storms. Portage lake.-About 35J (41) miles from its extremity the promon- tory is cut in a northerly and southerly direction for 14 (16) miles bv a natural navigable channel known as Portage lake, which occupies a narrow and deep chasm. It receives also fh>m the NE. the waters of Torch lake. Its outlet is Portage river, which empties into Keweenaw Portage Lake canal connects tbe north end of the lake with lake Superior. The canal is 2 (2*) miles long, has a bottom width of 70 feet and ,8 to have a 16.foot depth. It has a breakwater at its entrance on lake Superior. Portage river, formerly shallow, with a tortwoua channel obstnicted by bars, has been improved by having a tolerably straight channel cut Improvement8.-January, 1896: The deep channel is narrow at places. Lily pond has been widened to 300 feet, to allow vessels to pass each other or to tie up. It should be noted that during each winter a bar forms at the lake Superior entrance to the canals, leaving only about UJ feet of water on it, which will be removed by dredging a« prompt y as possible on the opening of navigation. The project caUs for a 16-foot channel of 70 feet bottom vnm from bay to lake 20 LAKE SUPERIOB. LIGHTS. Portage Lake Ship CanaL— A fixed white light, visible 13 (16) miles, is shown at the west side of the cut from a squaie, red brick tower on the canal front of dwelling. Portage Lake Ship Canal Pierhead.— A fixed red light on the end of the west pier, visible 7i (8^) miles, is exhibited from a square, white, pyramidal, open-framework tower, the upper part of which is inclosed. It serves as a guide into the canal. There is an elevated walk from the ligi "chouse along the pier to the end. Pog signal — A 10-inch steam whistle iiouuds blasts of three seconds, with silent intervals of seventeen seconds. Portage Lake Ship Canal range (front).— On the south end of the pier of Portage Lake Ship canal, at the entrance from Portage lake, is shown a fixed white light from a small, square lamphouse. Real-.- About 600 feet N. f E. (N. 9° E.) of the front light is a fixed red light, shown from a wooden upright with white triangular day mark. These lights form a range for approaching south end of ship canal. Portage River range (north).— In the lake, from the window of a white lamphouse with pyramidal white day mark, is shown a fixed white light. South. — In Portage river, near its head, and 1,650 feet 8. by E. § E. (S. 18° B.) from the north light, is shown a fixed white light from a small, square, white lamphouse on crib. These lights form an open range for leaving or entering the river. The lights should be left to the westward. Portage range (front).— A fixed white light, visible 10 (11) miles, is exhibited from a white tower. This light is on the west side of the Portage river near its mouth. Rear. — A fixed white light, visible 10^ (12) miles is shown from a square tower on white frame dwelling. It is 730 feet N. f W. (N. 9° W.) from the front light. These lights serve as a range on which vessels can run on leaving or entering the cut between Portage river and Keweenaw bay, the range for entering from the b«y being N. 9<^ W. A fixed white light, varied by a red flash every minute and visible 13 (15) miles, is shown a little to the eastward of the entrance to Port- age river, from a cylindrical, white stone tower, connected with a red brick dwelling by a covered way. Life-saving station, 3 mile from the north end of the canal, on the east bank. Directions. — The light at the outer end of the west pier, with the lighthor.se at the inner end, serves as a guide to and into the west entrance of the canal. From this the canal runs in a SSE. (S. 23° E.) direction until a short distance beyond the United States life-saving station, when it changes direction to the south, passing through Lilly le 13 (15) red brick on the end a square, if which is ■ to the end. ee seconds, end of the ' age lake, is it is a fixed ngular day hip canal, window of a )wn a fixed i. by E. f B. Light from a g the river. (11) miles, side of the )wn from a \ W. (N. 9° leaving or f, the range laud visible ice to Port- with a red mal, on the ar, with the to the west (S. 23° E.) life-saving rough Lilly TORCH LAKE — EAOLE RIVER HARBOR. 21 pond and entering Portage lake at Monders. Here project two bulk- heads, and at the extremity of the eastern one is the south light of an open range for leaving or entering. Vessels drawing 14 feet of water can now pass through tlie Portage river and upper ship canal. Keeping to the southward a general course of SSW. g W. (S. 29° W.) is made until Oscar is passed, thence S. by E. § E. (S. 18° E.) as a gen- eral course. Having rounded the bend just below Swedctown creek, Hancock and Hought ju are passed. These towns lie, Hancock on tlie north and Houghton on the south side of Portage lake, 8^ (10) miles from the west entrance, and are the principal sliippiug ports of this lake. A short distance east of Houghton a course ESE. ,^ E. (S. 09<^ E.) will carry clear of danger until about midway between the entfance of Pilgram river and Dollar bay. Prom here a course of 8. by E. ^ E. (8. 15° E.) will carry through the wide part of the lake and to the north entrance of Portage river. Enter the river on the range 8. by B. § B. (8. 18° E.) and keep a mid-channel route, passing through cuts Nos. 4, 3, and 2 and through and out of No. 1 cut on the Portage rivi^r range S. SE.(S.doB.). In this system there ai'e no locks. The improved parts of the channel will be kept well buoyed. Torch lake. — Fourteen feet of water may be carried through the cut from Torch bay to Torch lake. The cut is marked by three lights on cribs on the west side, and by a row of stakes on both sides. Vessels bound from Torch bay to lake Linden follow the center of the bay, taking care to leave red stakes to port and black stakes to star- board. When the nearest two cribs are in range steer for them until the stakes can be seen, then follow them through the cut. In coming from Torch lake to Torch bay a red barn on the south side of Torch bay is a good mark for running through the out. Coast. — Proceeding to the northeastward from Portage Lake canal a shoal makes out for about a mile to the northward of the harbor, another a little to the southward of Gratiot river, and from there on to Eagle river the shore should be given a good berth. Eagle River harbor is practically abandoned as a commercial port There is a pier which is falling to pieces and the channels are filling gradually. There are shoals, | of a mile off shore, flW. and NNB. of the month of the river, with from 6 to 10 feet of water on them and a channel between them and the beach. This channel is about 20 feet in depth. The shoals extend 2 (2^) miles in a NE. and SW. direction. Direotions.— Approaching from the west, head ESE. ^ E. (8. 73° E.) for the north end of the pier and run in on that heading until close to the dock, when head up to the northward. Approaching from the NE. and through the passage between the shoals head 8. 4 W. (8. 3° W.) for the end of the pier, and run down on this heading. inmibiimwMni«>irriiiii«io W.) from as follows: >nds, silent h show the rame towerj front light, It is shown and should ) harbor, is .1 spots. It till in exist- e SSE. ^ E. tor are seen ge in North r, is a good it, when on 3 mainland, kge, being 2 >r is on the Light— A fixed white light, visible 13§ (15f ) miles in (jlear weather, is on the etist point of the entrance to the harbor, and is shown from a square, yellow brick tower, which rises from a dwelling. Range lights.— On Fort Wilkins military reservation, on the sonth shore, a fixed white is the front light of a range for the channel in the bar. It is exhibited from a white frame tower, and is 22 feet above the lake level. At 470 feet S. by W. ^ W. (S. 13° W.) from the front light is a second light of the same character, exhibited from a square tower on a white dwelling and 39 feet above the lake level. Directions.- Head in on this range S. by W. ^ W. (S. 13° W.) until well past the rocks which show on the west side of the range, when head for the town, anchoring nearer to the north shore for the better protection. Copper harbor is the last port on this part of the promontory. When rounding the promontory to the southward Manitou island and Gull rock are sighted. OuU rock is about i mile from the west end of the island and is surmounted by a lighthouse. Light— A fixed red light, visible llj (13) miles, is shown from a square, yellow brick tower rising from a dwelling. Bnoy.— A 16-foot spar buoy, painted red, marks a gravelly shoal J mile 8. i E. (S. 3° E.) from Gull Kock lighthouse. This shoal has but 12 feet of water on it. Manitou island is 2J (3) miles long and one mile wide, and should be given a good berth, having shoal water near it, especially on its western side. Light.— On the east point of the island a fixed white light, varied by a white flash every minute, is shown from a brown, skeleton tower, which has a cylindrical staircase and is connected with a white frame dweUing by a covered way. It is visible 14^ (17) miles in clear weather. Pog signal- A little way east of the lighthouse a lOinch steam whistle sounds a blast of three seconds, followed by a silent interval of twenty-six seconds, then a blast of five seconds followed by a silent interval of twenty-six seconds. This occurs every minute during thick weather. Bete Gkrise bay.— Prom Keweenaw point (small) the coast trends away westwardly, and Bete Grise bay is the first anchorage on the eastern side of tne promontory. This bay oficers good protection to all winds from the SW. to NE. by way of west and north. At its head, 10 (11 J) miles from the point, is a ship canal, which gave outlet to Lac la Belle; the town of Mendota is here, but the canal is not kept up. On the south shore there are shoals and rocks extending out over a mile from Isabelle point, the southern point of Bete Grise bay. To the southward, past Traverse point, to the mouth of the Portage river, care should be exercised in approaching the coast. Mendota light — At the entrance to Lac la Belle is a square red tower rising from front of dwelling, from which is shown at 44 feet ^t]^'?: m^ m H v !i LAKE SUPERIOR. above the lake level a white light, fixed and varied by a flash every forty-five secondH. It illuminates 345° of the horizon and is visible from all points of approach. Traverse island lies S. by W. J W. of Traverse point, distant 4 (4^) miles. There is shoal water around this island, and a spit extends SW. about one mile from it. Portage river is on Keweenaw bay. It is described on pages 19 and 20, which see for the direction and lights. The harbor is exposed to the north and east, and there is no good anchorage within 9 (19,^) miles. Keweenaw bay.— The west shore of this bay trends to the south from Portage river. Sand point— There is no break in the shore line until Sand point is reached, 12 (14) miles away, to the west of which is an excellent harbor. When J mile east of Sand point, run SW. by S. (8. 34° W.) not quite a mile, when head up for Baraga on a course of WNW. ^ W. (N. 73° W.), having due regard for a spit which makes to the southwestward about 300 or 400 yards. Light— A fixed red light, visible 8J (9f ) miles, is shown from Sand Point lighthouse. The lighthouse is a square, red-brick tower rising from a dwelling. Two miles from Sand point and at the head of Keweenaw bay lies the little town of L'Anse. Pequaming point— From L'Anse the shore line keeps oflf to the N. and NB. to Peqnaming point. Around this point is the most secure anchorage near Portage River entrance, the south side giving protec- tion from gales from the north and east, the north side from southerly gales. The only danger around the point is a spit extending a mile SSW. from the SW. point. By running in until 4 fathoms is found will give good anchorage. From this point the coast trends NE., and 6 (7) miles from the point a spit having 18 feet on it runs out a mile. The NE. extremity is known as Abbaye point, and is surrounded by dangerous spots. Give it a wide berth. This point forms the west shore of Huron bay. Bno3rs.— Two black can buoys mark the shoal oflf Abbaye point. Huron bay, lOJ (12) miles long by a mile wide, aifords good anchor- age, and a vessel can ride out nearly all winds in it, especially if in the bay to the southward of Sand point. There is a lighthouse on Sand point; no light is shown. With Huron light dead astern a WSW. f W. (S. 72° W.) coarse will cany in; a course of SW. | W. (S. 62° W.) from the first low sandy point on the east shore will carry to Sandy i>oint, which can be approached close-to. Off Valley creek a sand bar with but 2 feet of water on it makes half- way across the bay, with a breadth of i mile. From the most NE. point of Huron bay the coast trends eastward to the Huron river, NNE. of which and distant 3J (4) miles lies the west- ernmost of the Huron islands. Tfi'- ■a'V.iATiSt^- HURON ISLANDS — STANNARD ROCK. 25 flash every 1 is visible tant 4 (^) pit extends ages 19 and exposed to (1%) miles. [) the south and point is lent harbor. ) not quite a (N.730W.), bward about t from Band lower rising bay lies the »ff to the N. most secure eing protec- m southerly ding a mile s found will m the point ty is known Ive it a wide e point, ood anchor- bUy if in the Vith Huron carry in; a oint on the led close-to. makes half« eastward to )B the west- Huron islands. — This group consists of two ialandH; the Rhoros are bold except for two small patches of rock oft' the east end of EnHt Huron. There is a channel over 2 (2^) miles wide between the inlands and the mainland, as al8(» ';hannel between the two islands. Light. — On the north side of the West IJiirou island, at 197 feet above the lake level, is shown a fixed white light visible 20^ (23^) miles. The lighttower is square and rises from a dwelling. Fog signal — C)n the NW. corner of the same island a lOinch steam whistle gives a blast of eight seconds, followed by a silent interval of flfty-two seconds. Coast — The Huron mountains, one peak of which is 1,<)30 feet high, are here seen rising back from the lake. Off Huron lliver point is a shoal spot extending NE. 1-,^ (1^) miles; this should be carefully avoided. From here to the eastward there are no outlying dangers until Big Bay point is reached, off which a shoal, having but 7 feet on it, extends over one (IJ) mile N. by W. This shoal is marked by a black spar bnoy. From Big Bay point the coast takes a general SSE. direction. A short distance from Big Bay point shoal another small shoal makes out from the land, and midway between Sanks head and Garlic point, a short distance ott'shore, is Garlic island. Granite point is the next point SE. of Garlic point. Between Granite point and Presqne He the shore recedes, forming a shallow bight, clear of danger on the NW. side, but with rocks and shoals in the remaining portion, and with Middle island as a prominent mark. To the east of Presque He is a large rock, 20 feet in height, the most northerly of three, showing well above water. Between these rocks and the mainland is a narrow channel. Vessels bound to the southward should keep outside of these rocks and not head down until the red light on the breakwater at Marquette is well open to the east- ward of the main light. Onmite island lies 4^ (5^) miles ENE. of Garlic point. Granite island light — A fixed white li^ht, varied by a red flash every ninety seconds, visible 16^ (17f ) miles, is shown from a square tower attached to a dwelling at 93 feet above the lake level. Fog signal — A bell struck by machinery every twelve seconds dur- ing thick weather. Sf?*Tnard rock, lying 29 (33tV) miles N. by E. i E. (N. 17° E.) of Granite island, is a dangerous shoal spot extending H. by W. and S. by E. 2,910 feet, with a width of 1^500 feet and having deep water close- to. Light — On a circular pier near the northern end of Stannard rock, a flashing white light, every thirty seconds, is shown 102 feet above lake level from a conical, gray stone tower. It is visible in clear weather 16 (18^) miles. Fog signid. — ^From a house on the deck of this pier 10-inoh steam whistle sounds a blast of three seconds, followed by a silent interval of ten seconds, a blast of five seconds, followed by a silent interval of fody-two seconds. This every minute during thick weather. ae LAKE SUPERIOR. Beacon.— A granite beacon, 8 feet high and « feet in diameter at its base, with a wrought-iron shaft surmounting it, Uom been built 120 feet from tlie extreme south end, and 2,190 feet H. by K. J E. (8. 20° E.) from the lighthouse. Marquette.— This harbor is of the greatest importance, its commerce being extensive and (constantly increasing, and it is also valuable as a harbor of refuge. Tlie breakwater runs out due south from a point just north of the city, and on the (lovernment reservation. It now extends into over a 30- foot depth. Lights.— On the north point of the harbor a fixed white light, visible 14i (16J) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 77 feet above lake level from a square, yellow brick tower, vising from a dwelling; and a fixed red light is shown on the breakwater from its south end. This light is visible 7^ (8^) miles, and is shown from a square, brown skeleton, iron tower, with a cylindrical watchroom. Pog eignaL— Olose to the lighthouse on the point a lOinch steam whistle gives a blast of five seconds, followed by a silent interval of twenty-flve seconds. Cantioii.— Vessels should give the point a berth of at least i mile to keep clear of dangers. Life-saving station. — There is a life-saving station near the main light, at the north end of the break ^vater. Coast — From Marquette to Shot point the trend is eastwardly, and off Shot point a shoal makes out i mile with 10 feet on it. From here on past Laughing Fish point to Train island there are no outlying dangers, but vessels should keep at least J mile off shore. Train island lies in the N£. part of Shelter bay. There is shoa! water to the north and west of this island extending out IJ (2) miles, and also shoal water between it and the mainland. From the west point of Train bay a shoal extends to the northeastward about the same distance. In Train bay vessels can find anchorage from all winds except those from the northward. Skirting the shore near Train point is dangerous, and although there is a channel between Wood island and Williams island, it is well to keep to the northward of Wood island, and between it and Grand island if bound for Grand Island harbor or Sontb bay. When near Williams island do not go to the westward of the range. Lights.- Grand Island Harbor range consists of 2 lights. The front light, on the mainland at the west entrance, is fixed white shown from a white tower and 23 feet above the lake level. About 376 feet S. by E. ^ E. (S. 16° E.) from this front light is another of the same charac- ter shown from a square white tower on a dwelling and 41 feet above the lake level. Directions for entering from the westward. — Bring the lights or towers in range on a course 8. by E. J E. (S. 10° E.), continue this ^course until Powells point opens well clear of the red spar buoy neaf I meter at its >uilt 120 ieet 1. (8. 20° E.) ts comiueroe tilnable as a t-oin a point on. It now liglit, visible e lalie level and a fixed This light is keleton, iron )-inch steam b interval of last ^ mile to lar the main '.wardly, and From here no ontlying kere is shoal 1} (2) miles, am the west d about the Dm all winds ' Train point d island and rood island, id harbor or vfjcstward of The front shown from 75 feet S. by ame charao- 1 feet above the lights or ontinne this IT buoy near . GRAND ISLAND. 91 WillianiM landing, then head K. J| N. (N. 85" E.) until the harbor opens, when proceetl to au(;hornge. One-fourth of a mile oft' shore gives plenty of water, except on the east side, where a Hpit makeH out with from 8 to 11 feet on it. If bound for South l>ay, continue course E. ^ N. (N. 85° E.), ronnding Towells point not nearer than ^ mile. Soutli bay is entirely fi'ee from dangers ^ mile oft' shore until in the region of Sand point, when vessels hIiouUI keep nearer to Grand island. Directions for entering from the eastward. — When 4 mile off Castle point, head HW. (S. 46° W.); this will bring Grand Island liar- bor light a little on the starboard bow, and will lead clear of the shoals off Sand point. If there is any set to the southward, haul up and head for the red spar buoy until Sand i)oiiit is abeam, when a course can be shaped into Houth bay. If bound for the harbor, (continue the SW. (S. 45° W.) course until the village above Williams landing is well open of the land forming the east side of the harbor. Bnoys. — A red spar buoy, 16 feet long, is on the south point of the 12- foot curve of Williams Landing shoal. Vessels should no^ i>a8B between it and Grand island. A red spar buoy, 10 feet long, marks the extreme end of a shoal off Grand Island Harbor light. Vessels can run close to this buoy with safety, but should Tiot pass between it and the lighthouse. L'%ht. — Grand Island Harbor light is fixed white, visible 12J (14) mile^j, and is on Sand point. It is shown from a square white tower at 40 feet above lake level. A shoal extends about 900 feet eastward from the lighthouse. Grand island. — To the northward from this light, Grand island trends north, and when well clear of the entrance, vessels should not shut in the light on the island until well up with Trout point, as a shoal of 12 feet makes out a good ^ mile from shore. Trout point Hhould not be approached on the northward nearer than J mile by vessels drawing over 12 feet. To the west of Trout point lies Trout bay, which is sep- arated from Grand Island harbor by a low strip of laud f mile wide. From here the coast stretches away to the northwanl and on its extreme north point is Grand Island lighthouse. Grand island is surrounded by shoal water ^ to f mile off shore. It should be approached close-to with caution. Light — A fixed white light, varied by a white flash every ninety seconds, visible 17|; (19f ) miles, is shown from a square yellow tower rising from a dwelling at 205 feet above the lake level. Coast — From Sand i)oint east, past Grand Portal to Point an Sable, the coast is free from dangers. Sail rock, one mile SW., and Chappel rock, one mile ease from Grand Portal being close to shore. The deter- mination of the coast lines by the wearing action of the waters upon the rocks of diffei'ent degrees of hardness is remarkably exemplified everywhere along the shore of lake Superior, but nowhere more so than on this stretch of the coast. Here are precipitous cliffs of red sand- 28 LAKE SUPERIOR. Ht«no wlii<'li liavo boflii so <'iirv«Ml by the wavos m to bnvo rwelveJ th© luuno of " PictiiroU Uocks." Tlioy Htiuid opixtsite tlie ^rentoHt width ol'tho bike nnd are t'xpoHed to tlio trenieiidoiiH force of the lieavy atorniH from th«^ iiortli. The effe<;t of the waves in seen, not only in tlieir irreg- nbir shaiKis, bnt the sand formed by the disintegration of the rocks is swept by the wind down the coast, and raised by tlie samo force into long lines of sandy cliff'k KK) feet high. Off Point au Sable a shoal makes cat ^ mile to the northward. Light. — On the i>oint, a fixed white light, visible U\\ (18^) miles, is shown 107 feet above the lake level from a conical white tower, con- nected with a red-bri(^k dwelling by a covered way. Q-rand Marais harbor— Harbor of refuge.— This harbor is 7 (8) miles east of Point an Sable. Once within tliis harbor, there is ample depth, to float large vessels, and as a harbor of refuge it is of the great- est importancte to the ship])ing navigating the lake. The entrance to the harbor is to bo .'J0() feet in width, protected on either side by crib piers. A channel of 175 feet in width, with a depth of 14 feet in the shoalest part, now exists. With any swell on it will not be safe for a vessel drajving over 1'2 feet of water to attempt the entrance. Sonnd- ings taken in Detiember, 18!>5, shfiwed a bar working in from the west across the front of entrance, on which was but 12^ feet of water. The edge of the bar having reached the axis of the channel, a pile dike for closing the nal:iir»l opening to the harbor was partially constrm^ted. Light. — < )n the outer end of the west pier is a flxed white light 40 feet abov(^ the lake level and visible 11 J (13) miles. A black lantern surmounts the s<]uare, white, pyramidal skeleton tower, and an eleva- tion walk extends shoreward 810 feet. Fog signal — A bell struck by machinery, a single blow every thirty seconds. Coast — From Grand Marais to Whitefish point the coast is clear, excepting a reported shoal oif Vermillion point. Shoal. — This shoal is reported as having 24 feet water over it, and lying NNW. (N. 23° W.) from the life-saving station on Vermillion point. It extends east and west ^ mile and is 200 feet wide. The following life-saving stations are on this stretch of (toast: ' Mnskallonge station is near the mouth of the Sucker river. Two Heart River station is near the mouth of the river of the same name. Crisps station, 15^ (18) miles west of Whiteflsh point. Vermillion Point station, 8^ (9$) miles west of Whiteflsh point. 'Whiteflsh point is the western jwint of Whiteflsh bay and is the turning point for vessels bound into the St. Marys river. On the point is a light and fog signal. There is a good and secure anchorage, in northwesterly gales, under Whiteflsh point. Light. — A flxed white light, with a white flash every flve seconds, - visible 14^ (16^) miles, is shown 76 feet above the lake level from a WHITEPI8H BAY. 29 re received the [jreatost width B lieavy storms ■ ill tlieir irreg- )f the rocks is laiiio force into rthward. (18!^) miles, is ite tower, cou- rtrbor is 7 (8) tliere is ample is of the great- le entrance to r si«le by crib 14 feet in the i be safe for a ance. Sound- from the west f water. The a pile dike for onstructed. vhite light 40 black lantern md an eleva- w every thirty coast is clear, r over it, and »n Vermillion . ide. coast: • river, jr of the same tflsh point, ly and is the On the point Einchorage, in five seconds, level from a It is connected with a white white skeleton tower with a stair cylinder, dwelling by a covered way. Fog signal. —A KJ-inch steam whistle sounds a blast of five seconds, followed by a silent interval of thirteen seconds; then ii blast of two seconds, followed Ity a silent interval of forty stM-onds. This cvoiy minute during thic k weather. Whiteflsh bay.— From Whitertsh pohit the coast makes u sudden change of direction to the southward as fur as the mouth of the Taqnamenon river. A bay of very shallow water makes in here, and Taquainenon island is a (2^) miles outside of a line joining the NW. and UK. pc.ints of this bay. All inshore of the island is shallow, with rocky bottom. Off Menekaunee, at the SE. jwint of this shallow bay, and as tar as Salt point, are numerous rocks. All of this coast, from Whitetish point to Salt point, should be approached with caution. From Salt point to Iroquois point the shore is more bold, but 2 (2^) miles west, a little north from the latter point, a shoal makes out, and near its NW. end is Iroquois island. Iroquois point is the south side of the entrance to St. Marys river. Light— A flashing white light every thirty seconds is shown from this jioint. It is exhibited from a conical white tower, connected with a dwelling by a covered way. Visible 14 (16J) miles. Pog aignaL—A 10-inch steam whistle sounds a blast of flvo seconds, followed by a silent interval of twenty-five seconds. ONTARIO. The eastern shore of the bay belongs to Canada. Gros Cap is the north entrance point to St. Marys river, and is steep-to. Gouluis point, north of Gros Cap, is also 8tee;).to. Within this point are Goulais bay and river. Pariaian island (Canadian) is almost in the center of Whiteflsh bay and 6 (7) miles west of Goulais point. It is 4^ (5^) miles north and south, about one mile wide, and surrounded with rocks which are close-to. Shoal.-— A rochy shoal, least water 8 feet, lies 2 (2^) miles north of Parisian island, it extends over a mile east and west, and is marked by a buoy on its N > V. end. Remarks.— The northwestern, northern, and eastern shore of lake Superior from Duluth east will now be described. NORTHWESTERN SHORE OK LAKE SUPERIOR. MINNESOTA. Coast— From Duluth north the shore is rocky and bold, with no dangerous reefs. At 16 (18^) miles fi-om Duluth is the Knife river, and at its mouth, extending to the northeastward from Granite point, is isle aux Eoches, known as Knife island in this part of the country. 80 LAKE SUPERIOR. Isle aux Roches is joined to the mainland by a rocky reef; vessels bound for Knife river mast round it to the northeastward. From here on to Agate bay the shore can be approached close-to. Agate bay is a small indentation on the NW. shore of lake Superior, 23^ (27) miles from Duluth, and, although it has ample depth of water, it is neither j^rotected naturally from the SW. nor from the reverse swell of the more dangerous storms of the NE. To protect shipping at the wharves, which would otherwise be greatly exposed, it is the intention to construct two breakwater piers on a line toward each other from the eastern and western points of the bay, leaving an open- ing of 1,340 feet between their extremities. There is not yet perfect security from the SW. storms for vessels lying at the docks, but it is no longer necessary to put to sea and seek security elsewhere. Two Harbors light — On the point separating Agate and Burling- ton bays a fixed red light is shown 78 feet above the lake level and visible 11^ (13) miles. The lighttower is square, red brick, and rises flrom the SW. corner of ». two-story dwelling. Fog signal. — A 10-inch steam whistle, giving blasts of five seconds duicition, with alternate intervals of silence of seventeen and thirty- three seconds, is sounded from a building 100 feet SW. from the lighthouse. Two Harbors breakwater light. — On outer end of breakwater at east side of entrance is shown a fixed white light. It is suspended from a brown post 30 feet above the lake level. Coast — To the northward of this light lies Burlington bay, and from here on the coast is bold and can be approached to ^ mile. About 2f (3^o) miles above this bay a rock lies close to shore, and 2^ (3) miles from this rook lies Encampment island. When within 4 mile of Goose- berry river, a good lookout must be kept for an offlying reef. This dangerous reef lies ^ mile from shore, is of small area, and has but 12^ feet of water over it at the shoalest place. There is deep water all around it. It is a dangerous obstruction to vessels coasting the north shore of the lake. Between Beaver bay, 10 (11}) miles beyond, and Palisades, are a few shoal spots close to shore. To the northward from these reefs the coast is clear until Two Islands river is reached, off the mouth of which are 2 islands ; from these on, the only outljring danger is Bock island, f mile off shore, and 1^ (1^) miles E. by N. (N. 79° E.) from Terrace point. G-rand Marais is 3^ (3f ) miles from Bock island, and offers the only harbor of refuge during storms betweon Agate bay aad Pigeon river, the international boundary line, a distance of 110 (126^) miles. It is the intention to build one pier from the east point, and dredge an anchorage to a depth of at least 16 feet. The anchorage basin now is 25 acres in extent, with 16 feet at low water (January, 1890). This will make an excellent harbor of refuge. The anchorage is compact in shape and fairly well protected. ty reef; vessels rd. From here f lake Superior, depth of water, om the reverse rotect shipping )osed, it is the le toward each laving an open- not yet perfect docks, but it is where. ;e and Burling- lake level and trick, and rises of five seconds len and thirty- SW. from the of breakwater b is suspended gton bay, and i mile. About *nd 2J (3) miles mile of Goose- ng reef. This Dd has but 12^ deep water all ting the north ades, are a few ;il Two Islands from these on, re, and IJ (1^) offers the only Pigeon river, r) miles. It is nd dredge an > basin now is 96). This will is compact in NORTHERN SHORE. 31 m . oi m t Avmiti&i::- Light— On the outer end of the breakwater a fixed white light, visible llj (ISJ) miles in clear weather, is shown from a square, white, pyramidwer with a ids, followed f water sur- from 1,000 to .and 13 (15) ■ should be eastward, NW. i W. hta for Fort lel a good ^ ort William int McKay, louth of the this river the Little of these are 16 northern the slight ind, and on completely excei>tiou feet for a distance of 3} (4) miles. The bed is of stiff clay, and is subject to no shifting sand bars. Lights. — On the north shore of the river, just to the eastward of the Ganadiau Pacific Railway docks and elevators, is exhibited a fixed white lig1>t, visible 11 (12§) miles, and 879 feet ENE. (N. 68° E.) from this one is a second fixed white light, visible 10 (11^) miles. These lights in range lead through the dredged channel at the mouth of the river. Signals. — There is a signal mast near the range, the signals here made being the same as those shown at Port Arthur, from which place they are ordered. Port Arthur. — The harbor is an open one, the docks being protected by two breakwaters. Thirty-one feet from the southwestern end of the northern breakwater, and serving as a guide to the passage between the two, is a light tower. There is a consular agent of the United States stationed at this port. Light. — A fixed white light, 43 feet above the lake level and visible 11 (12§) miles, is exhibited from a white, square tower on crib work. Signal mast. — ^The signal mast is on the Canadian Pacific Railway dock, its position being 48° 26' 05" N. and 89° 12' 55" W. Elevation above the sea level 650 feet. A^^aox master. — ^A harbor master is stationed here who has charge c'^'T .i: vessels calling at the port, and who must be obeyed accord- ir ... failure to comply with his orders subjects the person to penal- tioji imposed by the Revised Statutes of Canada. Silver islet— A little over 5 (5|) miles ENE. from Thunder cape lies Silver islet, a patch of rock of small extent, but from which large quantities of silver have been taken. Continuing to the eastward, the entrance of Black bay is passed, in the middle of which lies a group of islets and rocks 2^ (3) miles NE. by N. and SW. by S. The east side of the entrance is shown by a light fower on Porphyry point. Light. — ^A fixed white light, 56 feet above the lake level, is here shown from ft white square tower. It is visible 13 (15) miles. Blaok bay is 30 (34|) miles in depth from the light tower to the mouth of the Black river. The channel between the islets and Edward island is apparently clear of dangers. Off the NW. face of Edward island are several islands with shoals between. They should be given a good berth. The point north of Pearl river has a reef extendi'ig some dis- tance to the SE., and Granite island is connected to the shore by a reef which extends also SSW. in the direction of the above point. There are also some rock eastward of Granite island. The point abreast the Paps has a reef extending to the SW. A mid-channel course should generally be kept, but this bay, as well as all the others on this coast, has been very imperfectly surveyed, and should be navigated with great care. 1944^jfo. 108 3 34 LAKE SUPERIOR. The rWers emptying into these bays teem with trout, and there is a plentiful supply of feathered game. Nipigon bay. — The entrances to this bay are the west channel and Nipigon strait, St. Tgnace channel, and the east channel. There is also an entrance along the north shore. The bay from the mouth of the Nipigon river to Salter island is 27 (31) miles long, and is studded with islands. St. Ignaco and Simpson islands form the south shore. Lamb island is on the west side of the entrance to the west chan- nel, and on its SE. end is a lighthouse. Light. — From a white square tower, dwelling attached, is shown, 90 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light visible 16 (17f ) miles. Rock. — About J mile north of the lighthouse is a dangerous rock. Channels. — The west channel is 12 (13 j^^,) miles from the lighttower to its outlet into the bay. It separates St. Ignace from the mainland. Nipigon strait leads into this channel between Fluor and St. Ignace islands. Both channels have many rocks and reefs in them. In the channel between St. Ignace and Simpson islands several rocks and shoals are shown. Moffat harbor is at the north end of this channel. The eastern entrance, east of Simpson island, is 4^ (5^^) miles long from Battle Island light to the north end of Salter island. This chan- nel is wide, bold, ac.d free from dangers, except at its entrance north of Salter island. Unless locally acquainted it should be used in enter- ing Nipigon bay. There is a. shorter and narrower channel between Salter and Wilson islands, which also is apparently free from dangers. Caution. — Vessels using the eastern channel are warned that east of a line tangent to the west point of Salter island and the west shore of the high bluff on the north shore are two shoal spots, one of 7 feet, t mile NW. by N. (N. 34° W.), the other of 6 feet, IJ (If) miles N. by W. I W. (N. 20° W.) from the NW. point of Salter island. Battle island is at the east entrance to the eastern channel and the west entrance to the channel next east of it. On the center of the island is a lighthouse. Light. — From a white square lighthouse, 105 feet above the lake level, is shown an alternating red and white light every half minute. It is visible 16 (18^) miles in clear weather. Rossport is on the main shore of Nipigon bay, abreast the channel between Salter and Wilson islands. Directions. — If bound to Bossport, use this channel. A mid-channel course N. by W. f W. (N. 20° W.) will carry through the channel and into the harbor, which has shoal water at its head. Coast. — Proceeding eastward, the north shore of the main coast has many indentations, among which are Terrace bay, Jack Fish bay, McKellars harbor. Bed Sucker cove, and Peninsula harbor. This latter harbor is well protected and has deep water. Off Jack Fish bay 5 (5J) miles are the Slate islands, a large group. North of Slate islands 1^ ■K.. id there is a channel and There is also nonth of the jtudded with ihore. le west chan- is shown, 90 f ) miles, erous rock, le lighttower le mainland, nd St. Iguace )m. several rocks end of this »^) miles long . This chan- itrance north used in enter- mnel between from dangers, [led that east he west shore one of 7 feet, liles N. by W. ),nnel and the center of the >ove the lake half minute. ; the channol . mid-channel channel and laiu coast has ok Fish bay, This latter ish bay 5 (5|) ito islands 1^ PENINSULA HARBOR — OAROANTUA HARBOR. 35 (1-^) miles is a 10-foot shoal. Pic island, SB. of MoKcUars harbor, is about ^ mile off shore. East of Pic island are many outlying rocks and reefs. Feninsnla harbor. — Directions. — If from the westward pass south of Pic island, and do not head to the northward of east until the light at the entrance to the harbor bears NE., when head in on this bearing and run into the harbor through the sonth entrance, leaving the light ^ mile to port. The north entrance is foul. The peninsula, a rocky bluff, protects the harbor from the south. Manitoba shoal of 8 feet lies in the northern entrance to Peninsula harbor, and is about midway between the island at the entrance and the main shore. Its position has not been well established. Peninsula Harbor light — At the south end of the island is a light revolving white every thirty seconds. It is 105 feet above the lake level and visible 16 (18^) miles. The lighthouse is white and square, with dwelling attached. Coast — To the south firom Peninsula harbor the coast trends to the southward for 40 (46) miles to Otter head, and from here it curves gradually to the east to the head of Michipicoten harbor, about 55 (63^) miles. Bound to the southward, a course of S. by E. J E. (S. 14° E.) ftom Peninsula light will carry 4 (ifg) miles off Otter head. North of Otter head 12^ (14^^) miles and 6 (6^^) miles is a hill 1,530 feet high, which should be a prominent landmark all along this coast. Michipicoten harbor. — At Michipicoten, a river of the same name empties into the bay. It is navigable up to the falls, a distance of 15 miles. The water is deep and the harbor affords protection from all north- erly and easterly winds. Bruise bay. — Brul6e point is the sonth point of Michipieoten harbor and between this point and Grindstone point is Bruise bay, ^'. ith Great Lake river at its head. Grindstone point is the north point of cape Choyye. Cape Gargantua is the next point south, with Indian harbor small and full of rocks, just north of it. To the southward of the cape is a small bay also filled with rocks, and then is Gargantua harbor. Gargantua Harbor light — ^The tower stands on the summit of a small Island in the mouth of the harbor, and Is a white, hexagonal building, 43 feet high, wiLh the lantern surmounting it painted red. The dwelling is on the mainland on the north side of the harbor in a sheltered position. The light is fixed white, elevated 97 feet above the level of the lake, and should be visible from all points seaward 16 (17^) miles. Coast — South of Gargantua and between cape Gargantua and Cop- permine point is a wide indentation, in which are several islands and shoals, and vessels navigating in this vicinity should not go insid6 of a line joining these points. 36 LAKE SUPEBIOR. Gull island, Lea«h island, the Lizard islands, and Montreal island are all surrounded by reefs and shoals, and there are also shoals between these islands. Montreal shoal, with 5 feet over it, lies on a line joining the west side of Montreal island and Point aax Mines, and is west of the mouth of the Montreal river. Mica bay is between Point aux Mines and Mamainse point. Mica shoal, with 11 feet over it, lies off Mica bay, and on a line join- ing cape Gargantua and Ooppf rmine point. Coppermine point is the NW. end of a broad point, the SW. extreme being Pancake point. North of Coppermine point is Sand bay, small, and with the Hibbards rocks in its ajiproach. Just south of Coppermine point is an offlying rock close to the shore. Pancake point is surrounded by shoals, and east of the point is a small bay, into which Devil river empties. Pancake shoal lies 3^ (3f ) miles SW. of Pancake point. It is a dangerous shoal, and has from 4 to 6 feet water over it. Buoy. — A bell buoy marks this shoal. Outer Pancake shoal has 11 feet over it, and lies 2 (2^) miles SW. of Pancake shoal. Corboy point is the north entrance point to Batchewana bay, and on the point is a lighthouse. Light — From a white octagonal tower, dwelling attached, is shown 77 feet above the lake level a fixed white light, visible 16 (18^) miles. Batchewana bay is between Corboy point and Budder Heiul point. The bay is nearly landlocked, and a large island lies in the mif'dle of it. It is sepi^ rated from the north shore of the main by a narrow channel and on the south by a passage of shoal water (8 feet) 2 (2^) miles wide. Goulais point is 9 (10^) miles south of Rudder Head point. Mid- way between the points and a mile offshore is Maple island, surrounded and connected to the shore by a shoal. Sandy islands, north and south, are south of Corboy point and west of Kudder Head point. There is apparently clear water between the points and the shoals surrounding the islands. The islands, with the surrounding shoals and reefs, extend north and south nearly 5 {5'^) miles, by 1^ (IJ) miles wide. Parisian island is almost in the center of Whiteflsh bay. It is sur- rounded by rocks, which are close-to. See page 29. ShoaL — A rocky shoal, least water 8 feet, lies 2 (2^) miles north of Parisian island. It extends over a mile east and west, and is marked by a buoy on its NW. end. Goulais bay is within Goulais point. The Goulais river empties into the bay. The bay is deep, and affords protection from all northerly and easterly winds. Oii itreal island oals between ing the west of the mouth oint. n a line join- iit, the 8W. oint is Sand Just south e. Pancake a small bay, int. It is a \) miles SW. ma bay, and ed, is shown 18^) miles. Heiid point. I the mic'dle by a narrow 8 feet) 2 (2^) point. Mid- , surrounded lint and west between the id north and y. It is snr- iles north of td is marked empties into ortherly and UNITED STATES ISLANDS. THE ISLANDS OF LAKE SUPERIOR. 37 IJnder this heading will be considered those islands in the lake which lie clear of the coast lines and which can not be regarded as forming bounds to any bays or harbors. Of these, there are: The Apostle group, nineteen in number; Isle Eoyale, Passage and Gull islands, Maiiitou island, Huron islands, and Granite island in the waters of the United States. Slate and Pic islands, Michipicoten and Caribou, Leach, Lizard, Montreal, Sandy, and Parisian islands on the Canadian side. UNITED STATES. The Apostle group is composed of nineteen islands, stretching E. by N. 23J (27) miles from the NW. point of Sund island to the NE. point of Outer island, and 25 (28|) miles SW. i S. from this latter point to the SW. point of Magdalene island. Sand island is the western, Devils island the northern, Outer island the northeastern, and Mag- dalene island the southern. There are no important ports. There are several lighthouses, which are described on pages 16 and 17. The passages through the group are generally clear of dangers, the shores bold, and the water deep. The outlying spits are described, where necessary, under Dangers. ShoaL— The steamer Omaha, drawing 14 feet, struck a shoal with Devils Island light bearing W. by N. (S. 79° W.), distant about 1^(19) miles. Mariners are cautioned to look out for this shoal, as it is not marked on the charts, although the charts indicate a shoaling of the water between Devils island and iforth Twin island. Anchorages.— Between Sand island and Detour station, in 4 or 5 fathoms, protected from north winds and a partial breakwater afforded by the shoal connecting Sand island with the mainland. The east side of Sand island in 4 or 5 fathoms. Between Rocky and South Twin islands in 10 fathoms. The SE. coast of Stockton island. A peninsula here projects IJ (1|) miles into the lake, having bays on both sides with from 4 to 10 fathoms. Fnder the NE. point of Cat island in 4 fathoms. Outer island affords anchorage on all sides, except near the SW. point. Magdalene island; many good anchorages along the eastern coast, and at La Pointe, protection from NE. gales. Isle Royale is 40 (46) miles longNE. and SW. by 7J (8J) miles wide, the widest part No important ports. Dangers described in first part of this work. There are many harbors along the coast of the island, Grace and Washington harbors and Rainbow cove on the SW. end, Todd harbor and McCargoe cove on the west shore, Duncan bay, Tobin and Rock harbors on the NE. end, and Chippewa harbor and Siskiwit bay on the SE. shore. Good anchorage can also be found between Wright island and the main island on the north side of Siskiwit bay. 38 LAKE SUPERIOR. There is but one light, that is on Menagerie island, NB. point of this same bay. Light— A fixed white light, visible 14^ (16J) miles, is shown from an octagonal white tower, connected by a covered way, with a dark brown, stone dwelling. Canoe rocks are nearly 2 (2J) miles NW. of Lock point. There is a 4-foot spot a mile NE. of the larger rock and a 3 foot spot 3 (3^) miles 8W. of the same rock. Passage island, 1^ (If) miles long, is 3 (3^) miles NE. from Blake point, the northeastern point of Isle Boynle. The shores are bold close-to. A small bay on the east side with 3 J fathoms aflfords shelter firom the NW. Light.— On the SW. point of this island is a fixed red light, visible 114 (13) miles in clear weather. It is exhibited from an octagonal tower rising from a dwelling, both built of gray stone. Pog signal- In fi"ont of the lighthouse is a 10-inch steam whistle. During thick weather a blast of five seconds is souuded, each blast followed by a silent interval of twenty-five seconds. Shoala- East of Blake i>oint f mile is a 4-foot spot with an 18-foot spot a little NB. of it. A shoal dangerous to deep-draft vessels has been reported as lying midway between Blake point and Passage island. Its exact position is not known. OuU islands, officially Isle Ohapeau, lie 3 (3J) miles NE. from Pas- sage island. They are a group of low-lying rocks. ShoaL— NW. of the Gull islands 2 (2J) miles is a 9-foot shoal with flrom 11 to 31 fathoms around. South of Gull island J mile is a reef. Battean rock is 6^ (7^) miles east of the Gull islands. A little east of the rock is a 3-foot shoal. Manitou island, 2^ (3) miles long by a mile wide, Ues off Keweenaw point. See page — . Hnron islands. See page 25. Granite island. See page 25. CANADA. On this side of the lake there are very few outlying islands. Slate islands are about the middle of the north coast line, the north point being 6 (6f ) miles from Victoria cape ou the main. There are eight islands of any noticeable size, the largest being 3 J (4) miles north and south by 4J (4,'^) miles east and west. There are numbers of out- lying rocks, and a 10-foot shoal lies IJ (1 A) miles north of the group. Pic island, 760 feet high, 8 (9^) miles west of the peninsula, is of an irregular shape, bold with deep water, and has small islands off the NE. and south coasts. Miohipieoten island is the largest of the Canadian islands, being 15J (17 ^0) miles long by 6 (7) miles wide. The shores should be ap- proached cautiously on account of outlying dangers. point of this hown from an a dark brown, t. There is a •t 3 (3^) miles D. from Blake wes are bold ffords shelter light, visible an octagonal team whistle, id, each blast ith an 18-foot ft vessels has and Passage E. from Pas- )t shoal with le is a reef. A little east flf Keweenaw nds. ine, the north I. There are I) miles north abers of out- the group, mla, is of an ands off the CANADIAN ISLANDS. 39 Qnebec harbor Is abont the middle of the south coast. On a hesid- laud, the east point of entrance to this harbor, is a liKhthouse. Light. — A fixed white light, visible 15 (17:^) miles, is exhibited from a white, square tower, at 50 feet above the lake level. Fog signaL — A bell rung by machinery. Agate island is a snmll island in Quebec harbor, and on it is a light- house. Light — A fixed white light is shown, 32 feet above the lake level, from a white, square tower. Shoals. — In entering Quebec harbor the first shoal encountered is south of Agate island and west of the main light. It is a solid edge with 8 feet over it. The second shoal, of bowlders with 8 feet over them, lies in the cen- ter of the channel, oppo8it.e the SE. end of Agate island. Buoys.— Both shoals are marked by black and white buoys. There is 18 feet on either side of the buoys. Caribou island, 19 (21 j<^) miles south of Quebec harbor, is 3 (3J) miles north and south. The whole west side of the island is lined with dangerous reefs, which extend to the SW. for 3 (3J) miles. There are also offlying reefs on the east side of the island. Vessels should give the island a wide berth. Caribou Island light. — A revolving white light, attaining its great- est brilliancy every ten seconds, 70 feet above the lake level, is vis- ible 15 (17J) miles. It is not on the island proper, but on a \ery small island a little SW. from it. The tower, white, octagonal in shape, has a dwelling attached. The lantern is painted red. Fog signal. — A steam horn sounds a blast of five seconds, followed by a silent interval of twenty-five seconds during thick weather. The islands south of cape Gargautua and in Whitefish bay have been described o i page 29. slands, being hoidd be ap- iTgrmiita' . CHAPTER III. 8T. MARYS RIVER ASTD DETOUR PASSAGE. ST. MARYS RIVER. Tliis river forms the connecting link between lakes Snporior and Huron. At Sault Ste. Marie navigation in the early days was inter- rupted by the rapids, the river here descending 22 feet in a distance of f mile Through this river runs the boundary line between the United States and Canada. All the larger islands in the river belong to the United States, excepting St. Joseph and Squirrel islands, which belong to Gauada. From abreast of Iroquois point on the lake Superior end to Detour point on lake Huron is 71 J (82 j) miles. The only places of any impor- tance are the towns of Sault Ste. Marie, situated on either side of the river at the rapids. To facilitate navigation at this point, a canal was dug on the United States side. St Marys Falls canaL— This canal is 7,000 feet in length, with a* least width of 108 feet at movable dam in upper end. Greatest width is 256 feet just above the lock. The depth of canal is 26 feet. The canal is lighted by arc lights. The dimensions of the new lock are: Ler^th 800 feet between gates, width 100 feet throughout, with 21 feet of water on sills, with a single lift of 18 feet. Canadian canal — The canal is cut through red sandstone rock on the nort?' or Canadian side of Sault Ste. Marie, about 4,000 feet north of the existing United States canal. The cut is straight and is 6,900 feet long between the extremities of the crib-work approaches. The canal prism is 166 feet in width at the surface, 143 feet at the bottom, and the water is 22 feet 3 inches d ?ep. There is one lock, which is 900 feet long by 60 feet wide, with a depth on the miter sill of 20 feet 3 inches. The lift is about 18 feet, varying somewhat as the waters above or below the canal are affected by drought, rain, wind, etc. Outside the canal, at each end, a channel 18 feet deep by 250 feet wide has been dredged, connecting with the American channels. 40 nU0Y8 — LTOHTS. 41 GE. 3»ipprior and ys was inter- a distance of tlie United )elong to the which belong nd to Detour )f any impor- er Hide of the , a canal was ngth, with a* reatest width J6 feet. The ^tween gates, with a single tone rock on 1)0 feet north and is 5,900 oachos. The the bottom, which is 900 of 20 feet 3 waters above )tc. Ontside tide has been Bnoys. — Tho appronchPH are niurked by spnr bnoys. Above tlieranal there is lui octagonal timber crib siiriiiouiitod by a diiy bencon built on the starboard Hide of the cliaiiiiel od' Davignoii point, to mark the only torn above the canal. Tliere are two red buoys between the end of the canal embankment and this beacon. Tliere is a black buoy on the south side of tlie same Htretch and two black buoys to mark the turn op])o- sito the beacon. Off Vidal shoal there »re four red buoys. The outer- most of tliese bnoys is n scinare platform buoy, -on which stands a pyramidal slat work surmonnted by nn inverted eon<». On the port side of the (;hanne1 are fonr black spar buoys. The platform buoy indicates a point where vessels bound down require to take the Cana- dian dredged channel and \iiiere vessels upward bound can leave the dredged channel and make a course for Algoma Park light. The dredged channel east of the canal is indicated by eight red and four black si)ar buoys. The lowest red spar buoy, near Plummers dock, is surmounted by a slat- work cone, and the lowest black spar buoy, oppo- site the International dock, is surmounted by a slat- work drum. 13elow this easternmost black bii(»y there is at least 15 of feet water across to the wharves on the American side of the river, and vessels desiring to cross the river need not keep close to the red bnoys any farther east. Lights. — The canal itself is marked by eltictric arc lights established at regular intervals along both sides of the canal banks and crib-work approaches. The most westerly light of each row is red; the others ai'e white. Sanlt Ste. Marie upper range (front).— A group of white incan- descent electric lights is shown in a wooden lantern on top of the crib- work beacon at the turn in the west approach to the canal. The light is elevated 39 feet above the level of the river, and should be visible up the river to Pointc aux Piu3 as well as into the canal. Sanlt Ste. Marie nppet range (rear). — A bright fixed white incan- descent electric light is shown from a wooden lantern, surmounting a square open-framed wooden tower, the whole painted white. The tower is erected on the ear^tern extremity of Davigon point, 2,100 feet NE. (N. 45° E.) from the front light. The light is elevated 61 feet above the level of the river, and visible to the south shore in the line of range. These two lights in one, NB. (N. 45° E.), will guide from the Ameri- can channel past Vidal shoal through the middle of the dredged channel to the tarn at the beacon. Sanlt Ste. Marie lower range (front). — A red electric arc light is shown from a pole standing near the outer end of the Lake Superior Power Company's jetty, the pole being rendered more conspicuous by a target. The light is elevated 37 feet above the level of the river, and visible 3 (3^) miles from all points of approach by water. Sanlt Ste. Marie lower rang'3 (rear). — A red electric arc light stands 1,300 feet NW. | N. (N. 38° W.) from the front light. These two lights in range will lead from the American channel up the middle of the dredged approach to the east end of the canaL -i!,rj;' 42 BT. MARTS BIYER. Directions.— VesflelR bnnixl down, nfter pnRshig tlio rod pyrainidnl buoy off the woHt extremity of Vidal Hboiil Hhoiild koo]) the range NK. (N. 450 K.) on ahead (this ranpre lea«ls from the American cJiannel) until the beacon is reached; paHg IL'5 feet Houth of the beacon, and steer E. j} N. (N. 82° E.) for the entrance to the canal. Vessels bound upward should keep the usual course in making t,r the American canal until they bring the (Canadian range lights below the canal in one bearing, NVV. | N. (N. 38° VV.). Tiiey should then follow the alignment of these lights, between the red and black buoys, until they reach the axis of the cannl, due west. They moor to the crib-work at the north side of the entrance while waiting to go through the lock. Hay Lake channel is the channel cut south of Sugar island through Sugar Island rapids, passing through Hay lake, then by way of Middle Neebish, and rejoins the river at the foot of Sugar island, saving a distance of 9i (11) miles and giving a channel easily navigated. DISTANCES BV THE HAY LAKE CHANNEL. Milea. Detour light to Anthonys dock 2i\j (2J) Anthonys dock to Lime Island dock 7,", (9 ) } ' Lime Island do( k to can buoy, Mud lake 8|} (10) Can buoy to Job json point, Uains island .'U (4 ) Johnson i)oint to intersection Hay Lake channel 3% (4^) Intersection of channel to Kains dock, Sugar island 1^ (1^) Kains dock to head of cut, lake George g" (7 ) jr Head of cut (or flats) to Churchs point 5J^ (6 ) Ghurchs point to intersection of Hay Lake channel 9^ (11) Intersection of channel to lower-lock gates ] ;} (2 ) Lower-lock gates to abreast point Iroquois 13 (15) Total 03 (7^ Lights.— The cuts through Hay Lake channel are regularly lighted— red lights on the east sides of the cuts and white lights on the west sides. Bnoys.— The cuts are also regularly buoyed— red even-numbered buoys on the east sides and black odd-numbered buoys on the west sides. Directions.— A course ESE. f E. (S. 72° E.) will cany from the east end of the canal (United States) to the entrance of Hay Lake channel. In making the turn into this channel vessels should pass close to the black 25-foot spar buoy at the west side of entrance to avoid being swept by the strong current on the dangerous shoal at the east side of new channel; thence through the channel between the lights and bnoys and on the Six-mile Point range S. by E. | E. (S. 21° E.) until the Frechette Point range comes on NW. f N. (N. 37° W.), when head S. 37° E., with the range on astern, into Hay lake. When in Hay lake, with the c«l pyramidnl lie range NK. k;aii chnnnel) i;uii,ntul steer n making for J lights below Hliould tlien i black buoys, r moor to tlie to go tlirough iland tlirough vay of Middle tnd, saving a gated. Miles. .... 2^h (2i) • ■ - ■ 7A (9 ) .... 8| (10) .... .'U (4 ) . . . . 3A- m) .... 1^ (1^) .... « (7) . ... 54 (6 ) .... U (11) n (2 ) .... 13 (15) .... 03 (72J) rly lighted — i on the west en.numbered on the west from the east lake channel. 1 close to the ; being swept side of new id buoys and he Frechette . 370 E., with ke, with the DIRKOTIONS. 4t Mi«Ulle H»y Lake range on N. by W. I W. (N. 21^ W.), steor S. 21° K. until Nine miio Point light bears K8K. Jf K. (H. 7flo ,,].), when change coum. to SSK. g E. (8. 3()o k.), which leads into the cut at the fiwt of Hay lake and is the range for this Lower May Lake cut. When Middle Neebisli Cut range comes on WNW. ^ \V. (N. iVA'^ W.) steer 8. «9oE. through Middle Xeebish cut, between the lights and buoys. This course will carry clear until the Oarwood range, at south end of Sugar island, conies on N. i W. (N. 50 W.), ^i.e,, change course to 8. 50 E.and down the 8t. Marys river, as directed on page 45. Caution.— There is a very strong current abreast of the first red stake Just below the dike at Middle Neebish cut which sets toward Sugar island; and about 1,00() feet farther down the channel the cur- rent sets in the opposite direction. This part of the channel is considered the most dangerous in the whole river for vessels meeting. In leaving Hay Lake channel vessels should avoi I getti .g too close to the red buoys, as this current tends to carry t.em on f' shoal. For a description of range lights, buoys, etc., used in the St. M, vs river. List of Lights and Fog Signals and List of Beacons, Buo , , uid Daymarks published by the United States Lighthouse Board. ' Directions, west to east.— Standing in from lake m: orior bring Point Iroquois light abeam, distant !{ (1^) miles, head a course SE. J 8. (8. .39° E.) until St. Marys River upper range comes on, then head a conrse, on the range, SE. by E. ^ E. (S. 02^ E.) until St. Marys River lower range is made, then head a course, on the range, ENE. J E. (N. 73^ B.) until Pointe aux Pins light bears N. by E. ^ E. (N. 17° E.), then head a course NE. % N. (N. 37° E.) until Pointe aux Pins bears abeam, then head a course NE. by E. (N. 50° E.) until Big point bears east, when a course ENE. f E. (N. 72° y.) will lead in for the South Pier light at er.tr,i- -e to the United States canal. If it is desired to use the Canadian canal, see directions on page 42. After clearing the canal vessels shorld make use of Hay Lake chan- nel, directions for which are given on page 42. Directions for the river will now be given from the east eutrarde of the canal. The channel beyond is marked by many buoys, visible the one from the other excepting the bend at Garden River reach around the NE. point of Sugar island. Here it is best to keep the Canadian shore close-to. Clearing the east entrance of the canal head a course ESE. g E. (S. 72° E.) iffl'- -?'^K.^t^-S''1^ftr^h'*Vl?«-i»«»«»fri*>«i'»»*,i«jW»eo&-E*^ .Bi^a 4il ST. MARTS RIVER. on Bayfield Kock range until the Sault range is made, when bring it in line astern and head a course on the range E. by N. (N. 79° E.), When near the spar buoy oflf Jenkins rock head a course E. J N. (N. 85° E.) on the Topsail Island range until the Farmers Eidge Eange lights come in line, when a course on the range, NE. by E (N. 56=- E.) must be made until Partridge Point Eange lights can be brought in line astern, when head a course, on the range, N. by E. f E. (N. 18° E.). (There is a dangerous current just below the cut below Topsail island. Mariners are cautioned to make due allowance for the current when passing.) Continue this course until point Lewis is abeam, then make a course NNE. f E. (N. 31° E.), keeping in mid-channel past Patridge point. On nearihg Bells point take a mid-channel course past it auu Palmers point, passing Palmers Point light near- to on a course ESE, f E. (8. 76° E.) until close to buoys, when head on the Catholic Mission range a course 8E. J E. (S. 51o E.) until Payment range can be made astern, when head a course, on the range, ENE. J E. (N. 73° E.) until close to Payment docks, thence a channel course must be carried nearer the Canadian shore, rounding the point and passing between the red spar buoy and Manhattan light. Form this light a mid-channel course between Squirrel island and Sugar island, until abeam of Church point, when a course S. by E. ^ E. (S. 17° E.) will carry clear of Church Point bght. Pass the black buoy, which marks the turning point to the south, on the starboard hand, then head a course SSW. | W. (S. 2^° W.) to Upper Lake George Crib light, keeping it to port, shape a course S. bj E. J E. (8. 14° E.) through the cut, passing between the buoys, of which there are 11 pairs, as far as Middle Lake George light, then between the buoys in mid chan- nel to the lower light. From the lower light, the Duck Island range, a cf-m-se 8. J E. (S. 5° E.) will carry abeam of the red spar buoy off Duck island. Keeping this buoy to port, head a course 8SE. (8. 23° E.) until between Indian point and Ned point. Here the East liTeebisli range should be taken on a course, on the range, 8. i W. (8. 1° W.), the United States lights ahead, the Canadian lights astern. M* ' WWWMMHM l-^ DIRECTIONS. 45 hen bring it in ige lights come be brought in 8° E.). ropsail island, current when make a Dg Bells point ssing Palmers range a B.) ist be carried g between the ■el island and buoy, which ftnd, then e are 11 pairs, 9 in midchan- Island range, Bast Keebish W.), rn. Carry this course until on Indian Point range, when a course, on the range, S8E. f E. (S. 31" E.) for a distance of IJ (2) miles, passing west of the buoy on Merida shoal, will bring close to the buoys off Harwood point. Bound the black buoys, when shape a course SW. J W. (S. 51° W.) on the Hen and Chickens range. Ruv. f mile on this course, then change to a course S. f E. (S. 4° E.) with the Harwood liange lights astern and Dark Hole Eange lights ahead. Keep between the black and red spar buoys until the Point of Woods range comes on, when change to a course SE. J E. (S. 49° E.). When Encampment Crib light is well open steer for it, keeping between the buoys until abeam of the light. Keeping this light to star- board, thence on the Pilot Island range a course S. by W. J W. (S. 16° W.) carries to Mud Lake can buoy, 3 (3f ) miles. From here a course SE. | E. (S. 49° E.), with Winter Point Eange lights in line, astern, until Point aux Frenes bears SW. by W. ^ W. (8. 62o W.), or at night until the change from the red sector to the white light of Round island is made, then a course south, will carry past Kound island. Continue this south course for 2 (2^) miles from Bound island abeam, when a coufse SE. by E. i E. (S. 62° E.) must be held until Sweets Point light bears abeam, when keep in mid- channel between Pipe Island light and Gaffney point on a course SW. (S. 46° W.). Keep this (leaving the spar buoy on reef to starboard and Hoyt Shoal buoy to port) until Point Detour light opens east of Frying Pan Island light, when a course S. J W. (S. 6° W.) wiU can-y into lake Huron, to a point J mile distant from the black buoy, and with it in range with Point Detour lighthouse, NW. bv W i W. (N. 58° W.). ' J • DETOUR PASSAGE. This passage is between Sweets and Dix points on the north and Detour point and the shoals off Barbed point on the south. In the middle of the northern entrance is Pipe island, with shoals extending ^ mile to the northward, and i mile in breadth, with islets and rocks at the northern and western extremes. The shoal also extends to the eastward from the island, and curves to the southward and eastward for J mile, with 2f fathoms at its extremity. 46 DETOUB PASSAGE. WEST SHOBE. Scoots point, the NW. entrauce point, Las islets, reefs, and shoals extending northward for nearly f mile, with a breadth of ^ mile. There are 6 fathoms close to tbe edge of the shoal, which is marked by a spar buoy. The shoal follows the shore from Sweets point to and around Gaffney point. Sweets Point buoy marks a shoal spot, with 14 feet of water over it, to the uorthward and wes }ward of Sweets Point light. It is moored in 14 feet of water, and is a 26-foot spar buoy, painted black. Sweets Point light— A fixed white light, visible 6 (7) miles, is shown from a white upright rising from a small white house with a red roof, built on a crib. The crib is in 7 feet of water, oflf Sweets point, 2 (2i) miles NW. I W (N. 650 W.) of Pipe Island light. * ' It marks the turning point in the channel. Pipe Island light.— About 2 (2-,\) miles from Sweets point is a fixed red light, visible 8^ (9f) miles, on the SW. side of Pipe island. It is exhibited from an octagonal, white tower, surmounted by a black lan- tern. A detached frame dwelling, one and a half stories high, stands 60 feet from the tower. The tower is 37^ feet above the lake level, and marks the east side of the channel between Pipe island and the mainland. Gaffney point— On the west side, and nearly opposite Pipe island, is Gaffney point, a short distance 8E. of which is a rocky shoal marked by a spar buoy. Five-foot Shoal buoy is moored in 14 feet of water on the east side of the 5-foot shoal, SB. of Gaffney point. It is an 18-foot spar buoy, painted black. Vessels should pass 100 yards to the eastward of the buoy. The shore is then steep-to to Detour P. O.', where there is a pier called Newells Wood wharf. SB. of this pier is Frying Pan island and light. Hoyt shoal, with from 13 to 18 feet over it, lies about f mile SB. of Pipe Island light. This is probably an extension of the shoal extend- ing SB. of Pipe island. Buoy.— A red spar buoy is moored in 13 J feet of water. Prying Pan Island light— A fixed red light, visible 7J (8^) miles, n Frying Pan 'sland. It is 18J feet above the lake level, and is shown from a conical, white tower. It marks the west side of Detour passage, and is If (2) miles from Detour light. This light, with Pipe Island light, forms a range N. | W. (N. 40 w.) for entering or leaving Detour passage. From this to Detour point, the shore is bordered by rocks, reefs, and shoals, but it can be approached to ^ mile. rNHiaiiii EAST 8HOEE. 47 >fs, and shoals ! mile. There ked by a spar o and around of water over It is moored ick. (7) miles, is ise with a red lea NW. J W. )int is a fixed island. It is T a black Ian- high, stands le lake level, land and the Pipe island, ihoal marked the east side it si^ar buoy, bward of the 3re is a pier ', Pan island \ mile SE. of hoal extend- i m) miles, md is shown Detour Ught— A fixed white light, visible 14^ (16 J) miles, is shown from a white skeleton tower with a stair cylinder. The tower is con- nected with a white frame dwelling by a covered way. It marks the west side of the entrance to the St. Marys river. Fog signal.— There is a fog signal building 50 feet east of the light. A 10-inch steam whistle gives a blast of eight seconds duration, fol- lowed by a silent interval of fifty-two seconds. Detour Shoal buoy marks a shoal NE. by E. of Detour point, dis- tant f mile. It is moored in 16 feet of water, and is a 25-foot spar buoy, painted black. Leave this buoy J mile to the westward in passing. Detour Reef buoy.-SE. by E. J E. (S. 58° E.), distant A mile from Detour point, is a 3-fathom shoal marked on its eastern side by a black can buoy, moored in 18 feet of water, on the easterly side of the. reef. 2AST snoBE. Dnuninond island, from Dix point to point Lookout and Barbed point, forms the eastern shore of this passage. Diac point is surrounded by reefs extending to the NW. for ^ mile. The whole eastern shore of the passage is bordered by shoal water and offlying rocks, but can be approached to if mile. South of Barbed point, T^ mile d::;tant, is an offlying reef, with a narrow channel between it and the rocky reef extending from the point. Port Collier is to the eastward of Barbed point. There are many offlying reefs, rocks, and shoals, and several large islands off the entrance also between Barbed point and Fair island. There are deep, narrow channels among these islands and reefs. The water in the li arbor is deep, but navigable only tor small craft, and by those well acquainted with this coast. Barbed point is locally known as Crab island, the neck of land join- ing the point to Drummond island being covered at high water. Reported shoal.— A dangerous shoal, J mile wide and J mile long, with from 3 to 4 feet over parts of it, is reported as lying from f to 1 mile SW. from Barbed point. As the position of the shoal, if in exist- ence, is not established, vessels bound in or out Detour passage should give the locality a wide berth. The detached shoal charted as lying directly south of Barbed point is reported lying about 1,000 feet farther to the eastward. \) miles from ^ (N. 40 W.) s, reefs, and iTII»|ll|i>l|ftij^ll|jfcll|JW^S^^S^StL- - CHAPTER IV. STRAIT OF MACKINAC. The Strait of Mackiuac on the 46° 50' parallel, between Detour point and the NE. point of the lower peninsula of Michigan on the east, and Waugoshance light and point aux Oht-nes on the west, is 41^ (48) miles long. At the eastern and western entrances between the points mentioned the Strait is, respectively, 22^ (26J) and 11 (12J) miles wide, but contracted in the Strait proper to 4 (4J) miles in width between St. Ignace point on the north and Mackinac lighthouse on the south. It is here further narrowed by Graham shoals on the north shore. These shoals are marked by buoys, and are not in the direct route of vessels using the south channel. Vessels using the north channel must pass south of the red bell buoy on the south shoal. The north shore of the Strait is much indented by bays and lined by islands. There are several offlying shoals, but the water is deep close-to, and they oflFer no serious obstructions to navigation, being out of the direct track. The south shore of the Strait is comparatively free from indenta- tions. Shoal water extends some 4 (4J) miles WN W. from the extrem- ity of Waugoshance point; the outer extremity of this shoal being marked by Waugoshance lighthouse. The water in the Strait is generally deep, and the slioals lying near the usually traveled routes are marked by lighthouses, lightvessels, or buoys. EOUTES. Detour point through Mackinac strait to lake Michigan.— With the buoy in range with Detour Point light, and distant * mile, a course WSW. i W. (S. 73° W.) for 23J (26^) miles will pass Bois Blanc light abeam, distant IJ (If) miles; thence W. f N. (N. 86° W.) 7f (8J) miles to the channel between Mackinac and Round islands, with the red buoy in this channel abeam to starboard; here change course to WSW. f W. (S. 720 W.) for 6* (6J) miles. This should bring Old Point Mackinac abeam, distant IJ (If) miles. From this point a W. A K (N 890 W.) course for IGf (lOJ) miles will bring White Shoal lightvessei abeam, distant 1 (1/^) mile, and a W^W. f W. (N. 77° W.) course for 21 (24) miles will bring Simmons Reef lightvessei abeam, distant NORTH SHORE. 49 Detour point ou the east, it, is 415 (48) m the points ) miles wide, dth between n the south, north shore, rect route of hannel must Eind lined by leep close- to, g out of the om indenta- the extrem- shoal being 3 lying near itvessels, or gan.— With ile, a course Blanc light I (8|) miles ith the red ) course to ? Old Point W. J K (N. lightvessel W.) course am, distant 1 (lA) mile. These two positions are used as points of departure (m next ..hapter) for ports in lake Michigan. aeparture (m Strait of Mackinac to Thunder Bay island and lak« Eri- Tt^uTii;' "T- ^ y- '''' ''° ^-^ '' oid%o!rMrkU?H,?Cai: S?l V, *^ T fl u^^ ''""'■'^ ^^' ^^ ^' * E- (S. 620 E.) for 10 18S) miles; this should bring a vessel abeam of Cheboygan light with the bghthouse and Cheboygan Reef buoy in line. From hereTance south; thence change again to SE. by E. i E. (S. C2o E ) for 3fi u\x\ nVrTo I'Trih "?'* ^'^''"'^ ^' abL;^i;el inge Jsl !i IfV I -^ ^""^ ^** (^^*^ "•"^«' ^^^«» Thunder Bay Island light should be abeam, and a course shaped for the port desired Detour pc^t to ports on West and SB. shores of lake Huron - ^Sr/^ir",, f ^^^P*^*'^^ ^ SSE. i E. (S. 320 E.) course for 01^ TOJ) mles will take a vessel 4 (4^) miles off Thunder Buy Island ^rta^Zt" ' '"''"• ^'"''^ '"^ * ^•'"^^^ may be Shaped for Detour point to lake Brie—When off Thunder Bay Island light as above directed, change course to S. by E. 3 E. (S 19o e Worm TalrorLr^ TVrt '^"--ting'ligh^t ai tst e^rauL' L' 8 # E rS fo pf /':" ^,«^?^r"» *"d distant 4 (4-.-) miles; thence a 8. 1 E S. 70 E.) for 49^ (57) miles will take a vessel north of St. Clair Eiver .ghtvessel. The directions for St. Clair river and lake a^d Detroit river are given in Chapter VIII of^-^JV***"* to Georgian bay and ports on the eastern shore of lake Huron.-From off Detour point a SE. by E. f E. (S. 60° E) course for 44 (60S) miles will take a vessel 4 (L-) miles off Dn.k Island light, with the light abeam. From here ihi" uLlf he ^Testr "''" '"^ " ^'"^ ^"^ '''' «^«^ ^°-^ «^ '^^'^^ NORTH SHORE. in?r P?°i ^°i"* ^^^ "^'''^ "^^'^ ^^ ^^« St^^^t °f Mackinac ti^nds ma westerly direction U> the head of St. Martin bay, then it abruptly changes its direction to nearly south to St. Ignace point. From E point to La Barbe point the trend of the coast fsWSw'thenc^Tlux Ch6nes point it takes a northwesterly direction. - ' ^'^ ^ ^'^^ Detour point is a long, narrow peninsula forming the S W. entrance to Detour passage. There are 18-foot patehes at f mile SW. and SE. of the point, the latter being marked by a buoy. St Vital point is SJ (4) miles west of Detour point, the shore between r ti""^^ '^^ aorthward, forms a large bay open to the southwaTd In the NE. corner of thi, bay is Carlton bay, which might aX d nro tection to sman craft from northerly winds^' At 7 (8) miles ftom'st Vial point IS Beaver Tail point. There are several outlying shoa '^ W^Tir lotl!!i"' '''"^^ ""' ""' "P^^°"«^«^ wit'hiif IJ (Jj 50 STRAIT OP MACKINAC. miles. At 1 J (If) miles west of St. Vital point is Saddlebag island, and 2i*o i'H) niilea farther westward Albany island. Martin reef is a rocky shoal having 3 feet least water, with shoals all around. The SE. end of this reef is 3J (4) miles 8. by E. f E. (8. 20'^ B.) from Beaver Tail point, and CJ (7J) milea WSW. \ W. (S. 70° W.) from St. Vital point. The reef extends 1 (1 J) mile northwesterly, with deep water between the shoal patches. It is a menace to navi- gation, as it lies nearly in the track of vessels bound from Detour passage to the channel between Mackinac and Bound islands. Between Martin reef and the mainland, in a northwesterly direction, areTobin reef, Surveyors reef, and other patches with channels between. None of these channels should be attempted by strangers. Buoy.— A black can buoy is moored off the SB. end of Martin reef in 20 feet of water. Vessels should pass south of this buoy. Coast— Between Beaver Tail point and Fuyards point, 8f (10) miles to the westward, is a large indentation in which are several large and small islands, the principal ones of which are Strong, Boot, He la Salle, and He Marquette, the latter a large island with Marquette bay on its NW. side. Amougthese islands are many inlets, Scammou harbor being the largest, but on account of offlying shoals they are practically use- less except tor STnall craft. Goose island, '^ (2^) miles WSW. of Fuyards point, is surrounded by shoals, a reef extending for over one mile SSE. from its SE. end, From the eastern side shoals extend out J mile, with deep water between them and Marquette island. From the western side shoals extend off nearly f mile westerly and southwesterly. This side of the island should not be approached within a mile. Reef.— At 2^*^,- (3) miles 8W. by W. J W. (S. 62° W.) from Goose island is a 6-foot patch with a 9-foot patch a short distance north of it. This reef is J mile long north and south, and J mi le in breadth, being nearly circular in shape. It should be carefully avoided in navigating this part of the Strait. Brulee point— Between the NW. shore of He Marquette and Brulde point is an indentation forming Marquette and other bays; at the head of Marquette bay is the village of Hessel. There is deep water in these bays, with many shoal spots, and they are only suitable for small craft. Search bay. — West of Bruise point the shore recedes, forming Search bay, open to the southward, its western boundary being St. Martin I)oint. The bay has deep water, no oflaying dangers, and would serve as a shelter from northerly winds. St Martin point is steep-to and has a deep-water ohanncfl between it and a rocky shoal extending east and west 1 (IJ) mile in a direction parallel to the face of the point. St Martin bay,— Between St. Martin point and Gross point is St. Martin bay, a large bay free from shoals and with deep water. It is pro- tected from all winds from east to south by way of north, and from SE. ILE ST. MARTIN— GRAHAM 8H0ALB. 51 ,g island, and ', witb shoals )y E. f B. (S. ,JW. (8.70° orthweSterly, lace to uavi- from Detour mds. jrly direction, fuels between. i. f Martin reef aoy. ;, Si (10) miles ral large and otjllela Salle, ette bay on its 11 harbor being iractically use- is surrounded m its SB. end, water between pals extend oif of the island .) from Goose north of it. ireadth, being in navigating Itteand Bruise s; at the head water in these for small craft, lorming Search jng St. Martin |d would serve mntJl between in a direction Bs point is St. Iter. It is pro- , and Stom. SB. winds partially by He St. Martin and GroGse He St. Martin. Between these islands and the mainland are three channels into the bay, all hav- ing deep water. There are several rivers flowing into this bay at tts head, the largest being the Pine and Carp rivers. He 8t Martin, circular in shape, over a mile in diameter, lies 1^ (1^) being miles to the westward of St. Martin point, the channel between perfectly safe if a mid-channel course is kept. From the South and SW. sides of this island shoal water extends out for nearly a mile, and these sides of the island should be given a good berth in rounding it; the rest of the island is steep-to. OroBse Da St Martin is nearly If (2) miles long NNW. and SSE. and 1^ (1^) miles broad at its widest part. Shoals extend oft' } mile from the several points of the island. The channel between the islands is deep and safe. A course should be kept a little nearer to Tie St. Martin after passing the shoals extending from that island. This course will clear the spit extending ^ mile off the low east point of Orosse He St. Martin. The channel west of Grosse He St. Martin is also deep and safe in mid-channel. Shoal water extends to the eastward from Gross point and to the westward f^om the NW. point of Grosse He St. Martin. Coast — Between Gross point and Rabbits Back peak, 3^ (4) miles to the southward, the coast recedes, forming a bay open to the eastward; south of the peak is a small bight of shoal water, open to the SB. ; thence the coast trends SSB. for 3^ (4) miles to St Ignace point, with East Moran bay, which is small and open to the eastward, I4 (1^) miles NW. of the point. St Ignace is on this bay, and projecting into the bay are several railroad docks. Graham shoals. — North Graham lies § mile SSB. of St. Ignace point, and has a least depth of 8 feet. South Graham lies f mile SSW. of North Graham and 1^ (1^) miles south of St. Ignace point, and has a least depth of 6 feet. There is a channel between the shoals and St. Ignace poiot, but it should not be attempted. Currents. — ^The currents in the vicinity of Graham shoals and in the Strait of Mackinac are often strong and irregular. After fresh gales, vessels anchored in the Strait often tail to windward. Bnoys. — ^A red can buoy, is moored in 13 feet of \/ater on the south side of the center of North Graham shoal. A red bell buoy is moored on the southeasterly edge of South Gra- ham shoal in 24 feet of water. Vessels should pass south of this buoy. Coast — From St. Ignace point the coast treuds WSW. for 2^ (2f ) miles to La Barbe point, thence it changes its direction to the NW. for 2^ (3) miles to West Moran bay. All this coast is bordered with shoals and should not be approached within a mile. From West Moran bay the coast is bluff, bending to the northward as far as Gros Gap, and is steep-to; thence it takes a northwesterly I 52 8TEAIT OF MACKINAC. direction for 3 j (4) miles to Aux Clit'iies point, becoming low and broken by inlets, witli shoal water extending off some distance. From Aux CbCnes point the coast trends northwesterly into lake Michigan, and ia described in next chapter. St Helena island lies 1^ (1$) miles off the bluff, between West Moran bay and Oros Cap. It is about a mile long NE. and SW., but shoal Avater extends from its SB. side for nearly § mile, its outer extreme being marked by a buoy. Buoy.— On the SE. endof a shoal extending southeastward from St. Helena lighthouse a black spar buoy is moored in 18 feet of water. In entering St. Helena harbor from the westward give this buoy a berth of 100 yards. There is deep water in mid-channel between the mainland and this island. Light— On the SE. point of St. Helena island is a white conical tower,. 65 feet high, connected by a covered way with a red dwelling, Laving a red roof. From this tower a fixed red light is shown, visible 14 (16i) miles. This light is a guide to vessels making a lee under St. Helena island, and also a leading mark to vessels bound to the westward through the south channel of the Strait of Mackinac. Caution. — Do not attempt to round the northwestern end of this island at night unless its appearance under Gros Cap and the position of St. Helena shoal are well defined and understood. In rounding the SE. end of the island at night remember that the buoy marking the reef extending SE. from the island is 1,000 yards from the light. St Helena shoal is IJ (If) miles west of the northwestern end of St. Helena island, with deep water between, and with from 8 to 15 feet of water over it. The shoal is 760 yards in extent NW. and SE., and 500 yards NB. and SW., with 8 feet on its shoalest (southeastern) edtra. The sound- ings are irregular, bottom rocky, with from 3 to 4 fathoms close-to. On the south side of the shoal is a buoy. Buoy.— A can buoy, painted in red and black horizontal stripes, marks the southern edge of the shoal. , SOUTH SHOBE. ' Coast— From Nine-mile point, the NE. point of the lower peninsula of Michigan, to Cheboygan lighthouse the coast takes a general WNW. direction for about 8f (10) miles, and can be approached to f mile. West of the lighthouse is McLeod bay, extending to the SB., but almost filled with shoals, having deep-water channels among them. In the western part of the bay shoal water extends a mile offshore. There is an 11-foot patch J mile NW. by W. (N. 56° W.) from the Crib light, and a 3-tbot rook 1 (1^) mile NW. by W. f W. (N. 60° W.) from the same light. ■ ua iiii ii§ feet high, from which is shown a fixed red light, visible 11^ (13) miles. Vessels bound to Cheboygan should pass the crib close-to and then take the range. Range lights are on the west side of the Cheboygan river on the pro- longation of the center line of the cut, and form a range for passing through the cut. The front light is 42 feet above the lake level, shown from a square tower rising from a frame dwelling. The rear light is 08 feet above the lake level, exhibited from an open framework tower. The lights are ^xed red, visible 7-^g (8^) miles, and the towers are 1,112 feet apart. The range is SSW. J W. (S. 32° W.). Cheboygan is at the mouth of the Cheboygan river, which drains an' area of 850 square miles and empties into McLeod bay, locally known as Duncan bay. The locality is a heavy lumber producing district, and its water tratflc is important. Improvements. — A channel 200 feet wide and 15 feet deep has been dredged from the 15-foot ourve to the State Boad bridge, marking the upper limit of improvement. This channel has somewhat tilled. In January, 1896, the channel was dredged to 18 feet and 120 feet wide jQrom the Strait to Bakers Steamer landing. ^timber crib 40 feet square was built in 1881 on the north side of the entrance in 16 fe«t of water to mark the exact position of the cut and to serve as a guide for entering it. The crib is used as a founda- tion for the lighthouse previously described. Directions. — When a mile off the Crib light, bring on the range SSW. I W. (S. 32° W.), arid stand in. Coast — From Cheboygan the coast trends northwesterly for 13 (15) miles to Mackinac City, and it is safe to keep it a distance of a mile. The 4-fathom curve, excepting off the mouth of the Cheboygan river, in the western part of McLeod bay, is not more than f mile offshore, but it generally follows the shore at about ^ mile. A littie NW. of Au Sable point, 4f (5 J) miles NW. of Cheboygan Cnb light, and at the village of Freedom, 3^ (4) miles farther on, the edge of the curve is J mile off shore. 54 BTSAIT OF MACKINAC. li Mackinac Oity, on Old Point Mackinac, is an open roadRteail, and only protected from NW. winds. The beat anchorage for small craft is about J mile offshore BE. of the railroad pier. Light— On Old Point Mackinac a light, flashing red every ten sec- onds, is shown 62 feet above the lake level, and should be visible in clear w«>ather 13^ (ISJ) miles. The lighthouse is a cylindrical tower 50 feet high, and forms the NW. corner of the keeper's dwelling, both bnilt of yellow brick. Roof of dwelling red ; lantern black. Fog-signal house 80 feet'Oast of tower; brown. Fog signal.— A 10-inch steam whistle sounds blasts of five seconds' duration, with alternate silent intervals of seventeen and thirty-three seconds. McG-tapin point is IJ (2) miles to the westward of Old Point Macki- nac, the shore between forming a shallow bight, with shoal water, open to the northward. The point is a bluff, steep-to, and faces the N W. for over a mile. On the north extremity of the point is the lighthouse. Light— The light, 102 feet above the lake level, is fixed white, visi- ble 16 (18^) miles. The lighthouse, on a bluff 70 feet above the lake level, is an octag- onal tower attached to the NW. corner of the dwelling, both yellow, with red roofs. Coast- From the SW. extremity of McGulpin point the shore recedes to the southeastward for a mile, then trends SW. for 2 (2J) miles, and then NW. for a mile, forming a bay 2 (2J) miles wide and a mile deep, with shoal water extending out Ironi the shore for over ^ mile. This bay affords protection from all winds except those from north to west. From the SW. point of this bay the coast takes a general west- erly direction for 8 (9J) miles to Waugosliance point, with two shallow bijrhts open to the NW. This part of the coast should not be approached within a mile ; and as the extremity of Waugoshance point is neared, a nmch wider berth should be given it. Waugoshance point, a long, low, and narrow point, extends out fi-om the mainland for If (2) miles, and is farther continued by several small islets. The point is the top ridge of a long shoal, which extends out from the mainland for 5J (OJ) miles to Waugoshance lighthouse, the shoal having a mean breadth of If (2) miles. Waugoshance island, 1| (2) miles westward of the extremity of the point, is a mile long east and west and 1( mile broad. Caution. — In rounding Wangoshance shoal, do not pass between Waugoshance L'ghthouse and the island; keep a lookout for Vienna shoal, and give it a good berth. Waugoshance light is on the northwestern end of Waugoshance shoal, If (2) miles NW. of Waugoshance island. The light is fixed white, varied by a flash every forty-flve seconds, find is visible 14^ (16^) miles. L oadRtenil, and ibr small crafb every ten sec. 1 be visible in md forms the V brick. Eoof ■east of tower; ' five seconds' id thirty-three Point Macki- al water, open jstheNW. for lighthouse. Bd white, visi- 1, is an octag- ', both yellow, int the shore IW. for 2 (2J) ilea wide and ihore for over from north to general west- h two shallow n a mile ; and h wider berth extends out led by several rhich extends ;e lighthonse, shance island, mile long east pass between ut for Vienna Wangoshance '-five seconds, ISLANDB AND SHOALS. 56 The lighthonse, 65 feet high, iH an iron tower, with a dwdling and a fog-signal buihliMg, all surronnded by a sqnare crib. The bnildings are painted rod and wliite in alternate horizontal bands, nf^!? «i8«al-7The fog signal is a lO-inch steam whistle, giving blasts slc^nds"''" *'^'""' ^^'"'''''''^ ^^ * '"""* '"*"'""* ''^ twenty-tlve in«^?V?"*~^''r" m' ^'^"""'^ '""'*' *'''*" " ^««^' "f ^"^or "J-e recom- S buoy ''**'' northward of Waugoshaace Sixteen-foot (Rose) Under no circumstances should vessels approach Wangoshance light closer than J nule, with it bearing to the v, ^tward of VV8W. (S 680 NNfTn t"o ',m'^7 ^"'^^ J.^' lighthouse to bear to the northward of ^Hh. .(^•^■J° K) when standing to the southward, as the reefs are very loui with bowlders. "^ A description of the shoals outside of Wangoshance and of the east- ern shore of lake Michigan is given in the following chapter. ISLANDS AND SHOALS IN STRAIT OF MAC^INAO. Under this heading will be considered the islands and shoals in the Strait which he clear of the coast line, and which can not be considered as ibrmmg bounds to bays or harbors. They will be described from the eastward. Spectacle reef-This reef lies 9 (lOJ) miles east of the east point of Bois Blanc island, and is almost in the track of ships bound from Detour passage to the South channel of Mackinac strait. The reef is A. mile long north and south and i mile broad east and west, with a depth of 7 feet on its southern part. On the northwestern edge of the reef ou about 1,000 feet eastward and 2,500 feet southward from the lighthouse f^^Jj~t ''®?.*''"' ^"''^ '^ '"""'■^'^ <*^ *^« «o«t^ end of Spectacle reef. Light-The light, 86 feet above the lake level, is flashing red and white, alternately, every thirty seconds, and is visible 15 (17*) miles The lighthouse is a conical, gray tower, with dome and railings painted black, surrounded by a square wooden crib, on which are two white fog-signal houses and a white boathouse. Fog aigoal—The fog signal is a 10-inch steam wliistlo, sounding blasts of three seconds, with alternate silent internals of twelve and forty-two seconds. Raynolds reef, 3i (3f ) miles to the westward of Spectacle reef, is a dangerous shoal with from 12 to 13 feet of water over it. It should not be approached nearer than J mile. Buoy.-A can buoy, painted in red and black horizontal stripes, is m^red in 17 feet of water, and marks the northern edge of this shoal. Poe reef 18 li (IJ) miles from the SB. end of Bois Blanc island. The reef extends east and west 2,000 yards, with a least depth of 12 feet of water over it. There is a narrow channel north of it, which should not be attempted by strangers. M 8TRAIT OF MACKINAC. LightveMoL— A llghtvesnel is moorwl in 41 feet ui' water to tlie sonthwanl and eastward of the easterly end of the reef. Tlii- vessel shows simultaneously from three lens lanterns encircling the foremast- head a fixed white light. The light is 40 feet above the lake level, and is visible llj? (13^) miles. The vessel has two masts, is schooner rigged, without a bowsprit. There is a circular black cage work day murk at the foremasthead, with a small black smokestack, and the fog signal between the masts. The hull is red, with Poe Reef in large white letters on each side and No. 62 on each bow. Vessels should pass south of this lightvessel when using South channel. Fog signal.— A 6incli stea?n whistle sounds blasts of five seconds' duration, separated by silent intervals of ten seconds. If the whistle be disabled, a bell will be rung by hand. Buoy.— A red can buoy is moored in 17 feet water on the SB. point of Poe reef. Bois Blanc island forms the north boundary to the South channel. Strait of Mackinac. Its greatest length is 9^ (11) miles WNW. and ESB. and its breadth for half this distance is 4 (4^) miles, narrowing to a mile at its northwestern end. About 24 (2^) miles from its eastern end a narrow peninsula extends out from the northern shore northerly for IJ (1^) miles, tapering at its northern edge to a breadth of but J mile. On the NE. point of this peninsula is a lighthouse. Light— The light is fixed white, 53 feet above the lake level, and visible 12$ (141J) miles. The lighthouse is a square tower, 38 feet high, on a yellow dwelling. ShoaL— NW. of the light -^ mile is a shoal with 17 feet of water over it. Life-saving station.— Bois Blanc station is about halfway between the East and SE. points of the island. Coast of the island.— From the peninsula the coast of the island trends E8E. for 2J (2^) miles, and is safe to approach to ^ mile. Shoal water extends oflf the east point of the island for nearly j mile, and fol- lows the southeastern side at this distance until off the SB. point, when it extends off as a spit for a mile. Prom the southern edge shoals extend off for nearly f mile, closing in to J mile at the point where the southern coast changes its direction to the northwestward. The shoal water follows the trend of the coast to the NW. end of the island except at Zeia point. Zela shoaL— Halfway between the if W. and SW. ends of Bois Blanc island a narrow spit extends out northwesterly for If (2) miles from Zela point, and is marked on its extreme NW. end by a buoy. Buoy.- A red can buoy is moored in 18 feet water, and marks the extreme west end of the shoal. There is no channel between this buoy and the island. The northern shore of the island for 3J (3|) miles from the north point ROUND I8I.AND — MACKINAC. 57 i" water to t>ie ef. Tljfr vesnel ff the foreiniiHt- lake level, and tliooner rigged, k day mark at the fog signal in large white n using South )f five seconds' If the whistle I the SB. point iouth channel, ?8 WNW. and les, narrowing insula extends iapering at its ). point of this lake level, and r, 38 feet high, feet of water If way between of the island I mile. Shoal \ mile, and fol- E. point, when Q edge shoals }int where the ■d. The shoal of the island of Bois Blano (2) miles from t)uoy. md marks the reen this buoy he north point has shoal water extending out for ^ mile, and Bois Blanc is connected with Kound island by shoals. A roc^ky shoal of 3 feet lies almost on the edge of the 4-fatbom curve about one mile NK. of the north iK)int, with Tfi feet close tf>. This is a dangerous spot. About ^ (3i^) miles to Ihe eastward from the north point the shore becomes steep to, and continues so to the end of the peninsula. The bight formed by the peninsula gives good protection from 8E. winds. Round island is ^ mile from Bois Blanc island, with which it is con- nected by shoals. Shoals extend eastwardly 1^ (2) miles from the southeastern side of the island. The NW. point of the island extends in a long narrow point for J mile, with shoals on each side. Light— On the extreme N W. end of Round island is a light tower on a brick pier, rising 8 feet alwve the water. The light is shown at an elevation of 53 feet, and is visible 12,% (14;|) miles. The light is tlxed white, varied by a white flash every twenty seconds. ShoaL— A 24foot shoal lies 1^ (2) miles NE. from tlie extreme NW. point of Round island almost to mid-channel. Major shoal lies 2^ (2^) miles SW. by W. of the NW. point of Round island. The general direction of the shoal is NW. and SE., and it is 1,200 feet long. There is a least depth of 14 feet of water 400 feet SE. of the buoy. Buoy.— A can buoy, painted in red and black horizontal stripes, is moored in 19 feet of water on the middle of the shoal. Mackinac island, 2J (2^) miles eastward of St. ignace point, is 2,% (3) miles long and If (2) miles broad. Its southern part, on which is the town and fort of Mackinac, forms the northern shore of the nar- rowest part of the Strait of Mackinac. The island is of importance as a military station. Mackinac— The town of Mackinac, at the SE. end of the island, is on the north channel of the Strait of Mackinac. Many large passenger and transient steamers stop here. The town is a coaling station, and is a great resort for invalids and tourists. Harbor.— The harbor is between Biddle and Mission points. It is open to the southward and exposed to tlie wind from east or west, which often makes such a heavy sea that landing is impossible. The water front of Fort Mackinac comprises nearly J of the water firont of the whole harbor. Buoy.— A red can buoy is moored in 16 feet of water at the end of a spit extending off from the SW. point of Mackinac island. Vessels should pass south of it, and avoid the shoal oft' the NW. point of Round island. Directions— From the eastward.— Steer for the middle of the pas- sage until the docks are ranged, when haul up for them, giving the SE. point of the island a berth of ^ mile. M\ ■*-s^«,^ ^?^^! ;g^-g«^iiti-" Jt/t. ^-- ly sin fiij 68 STRAIT OP MACKINAC. island not be seen open up Bois Blanc light, a point on the starboard bow, «nt, the red light (private light) on the south pier bears North when haul up for the docks. x^unu. For clearing the spit off the SW. point of the island, a good range is with the blockhouse on Fort Mackinac on a line witL the south pier Current—During the prevalence of strong easterly or westerly wmds a strong current sets through the channel between these islands sometimes as great as 6 or 8 knots an hour. In the harbor, inside the range of the points, the current is usually contrary to that in the pas- sage, and is caused by the eddy. Anchorage.-Good anchorage is found in the harbor anywhere north of the range of the north pier in from 3 t^ 6 fathoms of water. The docks extend out about 500 fl t ESE. and have 16 feet of water at their There ava no pilots, but tugs are available. Wharfage is charged at the rate of 5 cents per 100 pounds. o & »« 1 L 'K.L£S'?;l.!r.?>',^g!^1a--,'t^ri; V. point of the I the starboard r bears North, I good range is the south pier y or westerly I these islands, bor, inside the liat in the pas- ay where north )f water. The water at their is charged at CHAPTER V. liAKE MICHIGAN. Lake Michigan derives its name from two Indi.an words of the Chip- pewa dialect, niichi (great) and sawgyegan (Lake). It is the largest lake wholly within the United States and the second largest known body of fresh water in the world. Lying in a north and south direction it extends from longitude 84° 45' W. to longitude 88° W., and from latitude 41° 37' N. to latitude 46° 05' N., a length of 279 (320) miles, with an average width of about 57 (65) miles. The area of this grand sheet of water is 22,400 square miles, its circumference nearly 821 (945) miles. Its surface is 581 feet above the Atlantic ocean, and, being 1,000 feet deep, its bottom is over 400 feet below the surface of that ocean. The Strait of Mackinac connects this lake with lake Huron. It is connected 'by canal with the Illinois river, and so with the gulf of Mexico. The shores of lake Michigan are generally low and sandy, and the land slopes gradually to the lake. The northern shore of the lake is irregular and more rugged and picturesque than the other shores, the summit of the highest peak being about 1,400 feet above the sea. On the eastern side are numerous sand hills formed by the wind into innumerable fantastic shapes sometimes covered with stunted trees and scanty vegetation, but most generally bare and rising to heights of from 160 to 250 feet. The southwestern shore is generally low, with sand hills covered with shriveled pines and burr oaks. Along the western shore woods and prairie alternate, Interspersed with a few high peaks. The cliffs on the east shore of Green bay form a bold escarpment, and from this ridge the land slopes gradually to the lake. On this slope there is a remarkable series of drift hills and circular depressions called potash kettles. From the appearance of the coast lake Michigan is believed to be mov- ing slowly westward, uncovering the eastern and encroaching upon the western shore. With the exception of Green and Traverse bays lake Michigan has few indentations in its coast line, and, excepting the north end, it is free from islands. The waters near shore are shoal, and, having few harbors, it is dangerous navigation in heavy blows. There are a number of streams flowing into Che lake, but, with the exception of the Fox 59 L 60 LAKE MICHIGAN. flowing into Green bay, and the Grand, Kalamazoo, and St. Joseph rivers in the east, they are unimportant. The snrfiice level of the lahe is subject to fluctuations from one season to another as well as during: the course of a season. In lake Michigan the point of the lowest low water has been falling for seven years, and has so far fallen 5 feet. The average now is 0.16 feet below the lowest average recorded. A sl»t,''.t variation of the surface level is also due to a lunar tidal wave of its own. Observations have shown the dift'er- ence of the level due to tide to be about 0.153 feet. At spring tides the difference between h^gh and low water is 0.2'15 feet. High water occurs half an hour after the meridian passage of the moon. Aroand the lake the climate is quite equable for, though the wint«r is cold and the summer hot, the waters of the lake modify the extremes. The mean temperature around the lake varies from 46° to 54°. The average rainfall is 30 to 44 inches. The mean barometer varies from 29.5 to 30.01. The country around lake Michigan is exceedingly rich and fertile, and an immense commerce has sprung up along this lake. Snow falls in the north before the occurrence of the heavy frosts. The northern part of the lake only is covered with ice in winter and it never reaches as far south as Milwaukee. Milwaukee river remains Closed on an average for one hundred days from the end of November to the middle of March. The Strait of Mackinac, which longest retains the ice, is usually open between May 1 and December 1. The finest agricultural laud in the United States is near the lake, and there is an icanense trade in all grains, fruits, live stock, and lumber, and their products, as flour, pork, hides, leather goods, furniture, etc. Bich lead and copper mines abound, as also salt, iron, and coal. Abun- dant water power promotes manufactures of all kinds. Beer and dis- tilled liquors are made in this region, and fine building stone is obtained fifo.!). numerous quarries. NAVIGATION. Navigation generally opens on the lake about the middle of April and closes about the middle of December. The iron buoys are taken up every year at the close of navigation and the places marked by spar buoys of the same colors and numbers, and the lightvessels are removed about the same time. When they are replaced on the opening of navigation their positions are sometimes altered; masters of vessels are therefore cautioned to obtain the latest information on this subject and to keep their charts corrected. See page 6. HABBOBS OF BEFUOE. Entrance of Sturgeon Bay canaL — The entrance of the Sturgeon Bay and Lake Michigan canal, on the NW. shore of the lake, has been .'iiiiaaiiiiiBBa mm b ., xfiBS — DIRECTIONS. 61 id St. Joseph >m one season ake Micliigan en years, and )w the lowest bI is also due \vn the dift'er- ring tides the water occurs the winter is the extremes, to a4o. The r varies from 1 and fertile, heavy frosts, winter and it iver remains of November usually open the lake, and and lumber, irniture, etc. coal. Abuu- ieer and dis- is obtained of April and trigation and numbers, hen they are sometimes n the latest ed. le Sturgeon :e, has been improved by converging piers, and is now a fair harbor of refuge for small craft. Except in northerly gales the bay at the NW. end of the canal is an excellent harbor of refuge. Milwaukee, on the western shore of the lake, has< beeii Improved. A breakwater sheltering it from NE. to SE. gales has been half com- pleted, At present it is a very good harbor of refuge liom NE. winds. Chicago, on the southwestern end of the lake, is, with its exterior breakwater, an excellent harbor of refuge from northeiiy gales. Grand Haven, with an entrance width of 390 feet, is the best harbor along the east coast for refuge from gales, but has no exterior break- water. Little Traverse has an excellent and well-sheltered natural harbor, though it is small and some distance from the direct routes of travel. DANGERS. All the southern half of the lake is free from offlying dangers. Between and around the islands in the northern part of the lake, and in the approach to the Strait of Mackinac, are numerous shoals, which will be described as they are met with in the description of the coast. SAILING DIRECTIONS. In the previous chapter, page 48, directions have been given that will bring a vessel a mile south of White Shoal and Sir^mons Eeef lightvessels; directions will now be continued from these points to the various ports of lake Michigan. These directions will take a vessel off the port desired, and special directions for entering will be found under the description of the port. To Traverse City. — From the point of departure bring White Shoal lightvessel astern bearing N. by E. J B. (N. 21° E.), and steer S. by W. J W. (S. 21° W.) 44 (50§) miles, when the south point of Northport point should be abeam, distant 1^ (IJ) miles; hnie change to S. by W. (S. 11° W.) for 21 (24^0 ) miles; this should brii:. ; vessel oft' Traverse City. To Chicc^o and porta on west shore. — Cm (he course S. by W. I W. (S. 21° W.), when He aux Galets light is abeam, change course to SW. f S. (S. 37° W.) for 51^ (59^) miles, when South Mauitou Island light should bear West; here change to SV . by W. f W. (S. (}5<^ W.) for 6^ (7 J) miles, when the same light should bear North; thenue BW. I S. (B. 35° W.) for 20 (23) miles should take a vessel 4^ (5) miles vest of Point Betsie light, which position is the point of departure for the ports in the lake to the southward. From this position- To Chicago, 3. by W. | W. (S. 18° W.). To Racine, SSW. | W. (S. 27° W.). To MUwankee, SSW. I W. (S. 33° W.). To Cheboygan, SW. (S. 45° W.), .J?i 62 LAKE MICHIUAN. To ports on east shore of lake. — Follow the shore at a distance of at least 3 (3^) miles iiutil ofif the desired port. For deep-draft vessels and in heavy westerly weather. — When abeaiu of Simmons Reef lightvessel (see p. 48) shape course W. f( S. (S. 89° W.) for 29 (33,%) miles, when a vessel should be abeam of Seul Choix Poiut light, distant 2 J (2^,-) miles; here change course to SW. J W. (S. 48° W.) for 38J (44J) miles; this should bring a vesstl abeam of Poverty Island light, distant 5 (5^) miles, which position is the point of departure for ports on the lake. From this position, after passing the shoals off the entrance to Green bay, the shore should be kept at a distance of about 3 (3^) miles, which will give smoother water and allow the position of the vessel to be well established at any time. To Q-reen bay. — Proceed as in directions for deep-draft vessels until Poverty Island light is abeam, when change course to W. by S. (S. 79° W.) and head directly for liock Island ligiit until within a mile of it, when round it at this distance and enter the bay. By keeping Rock Island light bearing between W. by S. (S. 79° W.) and W.byN. (N. 79° W., the 9foot shoal to the northward and the rocks to the southward of this entrance to Green bay will be cleared. With the light outside of these bearings a vessel will be too near one or the other of these shoals. A description of the islands and offlyiug shoals in the northern part of the lake, and the coast of the lake, will now be described in the fol- lowing order: (1) Islands and offlying shoals. (2) North and west shores of the lake, omitting Green bay. (3) East shore of the lake. (4) Green bay. ISLANDS AMD SHOALS. St. Helena shoal. See page 52. Manitou Paymen shoal is 3^ (3^) miles from the north shore of the lake in longitude 85° 04' W. The shoal is about ^ mile in extent NB. and SW. and 800 yards NW. and SE., with a least depth of 6 feet. Buoy. — A red and black horizontally striped nun buoy is moored in 17 feet water on the SW. point of this shoal. Pelkie reef lies 2-,-o (2^) miles WSW. of Epoufette point; it is about f mile in oiameter and has 7 feet over it. Potter leef lies 5 (6^) miles E. by N. of Patterson point; it ia about l mile in diameter and has 6 feet over it. At 3 (3J) miles B. by N. of this shoal are two 10-foot spots, and nearly a mile SE. of them is a 13- foot patch. These are all rocky shoals, and as they are unmarked ves- sels should give tliis locality a wide berth. Simmons reef lies almost in the latitude of Aux Chenes point, and its east end is 12 (IS,*';,) miles west of it. From its east end the shoal extends west l/„- (1^) miles and widens out, it being about J mile north and south over its shoalest part, wliich has C feet over it. t a distance of ither.— When ourse W. j^ S. beam of Seul urse to SW. J !88t'I abeam of I is tbe point after passing i be kept at a ei' water and any time, draft vessels } to W. by 8. within a mile 3. (S. 79° W.) nird and the ill be cleared, i too near one lorthern part ed in the fol- jay. WHITE SHOAL — ROSE SHOAL. 63 shore of the extent NE. f 6 feet, is moored in it is about it is about E. by N. of iiem is a 13- narked ves- point, and d the shoal mile north Llghtvessel. — The ligbtvessel is moored in 1 9 feet water southward of the reef. It has two masts, is schooner rigged, and has a red, oval cage-work day mark at each masthead. The hull is red, with Simmons Reef in white letters on each side and No. 55 ou the stern. The ligbtvessel shows two red lights, one from each masthead, 30 feet above the lake leve?, and visible 7/o m) miles. Fog signal. — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds blasti^ uf Ave seconds, with silent intervals of fifty-five seconds. ■White shoal lies 4 (4-i%) miles NW. of Waugoshaace lighthouse and 54 (6) miles 8SE. ^ E. of Simmons reef (6-foot spot} The shoal is of small extent, and has 3 feet over it. Lightvessel. — ^The ligbtvessel is moored in 42 feet of water, to the eastward of the shoal. It has two masts, is schooner rigged, with a black, oval cage-work day mark at each masthead. The hull is white, with White shoal in large black letters ou each side, and No, 56 on the stern. A fixed white light is shown at each masthead, each being elevated 30 feet and visible 9iJ (UJ) miles. Fog signaL — The fog signal is a 6-inch steam whistle, which sounds as follows: Blast one second, silent interval ten seconds; blast one second, silent interval ten seconds; blast three seconds, silent interval thirty-five seconds. 3uo7. — A spar buoy, painted in red and black horizontal stripes, is moored at the SW. end of White shoal in 17 feet of water. Gray reef is the eastern extremity of an extensive reef extending easterly from Hog and Hat islands. It consists of many detached rocky patches, with from 6 to 17 and 18 feet of water over them. The easternmost patch has 14 feet over it. Ligbtvessel. — The ligbtvessel is moored in 20 feet of water off the easterly end of Gray reef. It has two masts, is schooner rigged, show- ing a black oval cage-work day mark at the foremasthead, and a red one at the main. Hull red, bulwarks white, with Grays Reef in large black letters on each side, and No. 57 on the stern. A fixed white light is shown at the foremasthead, and a fixed red light at the main, each 30 feet above the water, and visible (white) 9f (llj) and (red) 7^ (8^) miles. Fog signal. — The fog signal is a 6-inch steam whistle, which sounds as follows: Blast one second, silent interval twenty seconds ; blast one second, silent interval twenty seconds; blast three seconds, silent inter- val fifteen seconds. Rose shoal consists of several patches, of from 15 to IS feet, lying between North and NW. by N. from Waugoshancc light, distant a mile and upwards. They lie almost ou a line between Waugoshance light and White Shoal ligbtvessel, and nearly on a line between St. Helena lighthoase and Grays Reef ligbtvessel. These ranges will be usel'ul in rounding tli.e shoal at night. Deep-draft vessels should not pass south of Rose shoal. 64 LAKE MICHIGAN. Buoy. — A black imn buoy is moored in 23 feet water ou the north edge of the 16fuot spot. WangoBhance light, shoal, and island. See page 54. Vienna shoal (the shoalest spot) is 1,^0 iH) utiles WSW. of Waugo- shance Mghthoase. It is nearly ^ mile in extent east to west and ^ mile north to south, with a least depth of 11 feet. In a southeasterly direction 1,200 yards from the 11-foot spot is an 18-foot rocky patch, and ^ mile beyond this ESE. is a 12-foot patch on the NW. extremity of an extensive 17-foot shoal. About IJ (l^^) miles west of Vienna shoal are depths of 22 nnd 23 feet, with deeper water in between. Buoy. — A red and black horizontally striped can buoy is moored in 18 feet water ou the NW. point of Vienna shoal. lie aux Oalets lies 7^ (8i%) miles SSW. | W. of Waugosbance light. The shoal extends § mile NW. and the same distance easterly from the lighthouse with least water 6 feet. Light — On He aux Galets (SkiMigallee) a fixed white light, visible :y^ 13 (lo^) miles, is shown 58 feet above the lake level from aa octagonal tower connected with a white dwelling. Fog signal — A 10-inch steam whistle, in a building near the toTcr, sounds blasts of five seconds' duration, with alternate silent Intervals of ten and forty seconds. Buoy. — ^A black nun buoy is moored in 18 fef t water and marks the NW. end of the reef extending, NW. from the light. Vessels must not attempt to pass between the buoy and lij^hthouse. Ree£ — NE. from the light 1 (l^) mile is a reef with from 14 to 16 feet over it. Hat island is the NE. island of the group in the northern part of the lake. It'is small, about 4 vaWe square, and is on tW northern part of an extensive reef which extends southward of the island 1 (IJ) mile. On this reef is an exiwsed rock and very shallow water. The reef extends to the eastward in disconnected patches and terminates m Gray reef. Hog island. — The north part of this island is 2^,^ (2|) miles west of Hat island. It is 3 (3^) miles long and It^ (IJ) miles wide in places. The island is low and wooded and is surrounded by shoals which extfud from the island in all directions for some distance. The shoals extending eastward, with those from Hat island, term; ^ate in Gray reef. There is no passage between Hat and Hog islands, nor between Hog and Garden islanc* < Hog island reef s 2^^ (3^) miles 8'^E. flcom Hog island. It extends east and west | roi'' aiid 220 yards north and south. There are only 6 feet on the west end of the reef. Buoy. — A red and black horizontally striped can buoy is moored iu 18 feet water on the SE. end of the reef. ■ Garden island— The SE. end of this island is 2^- (3) miles west of the SW. end of Hog island. From this end it extends 4^ (5) miles iu a mmnwwm'.i.'M. -r- ^f: ou the north V. of Waiigo- o west and J southeasterly rocky patch, W. extremity 3st of Yieuna )etween. is luoored iu )sbance light, terly from the light, visible aa octagonal 5ar the tcver, it intervals of dd marks tbe iscls must not i-orn 14 to 16 n part of the them part of 1 (li) mile. The reef terminates in er. miles west of le in places, ihoals which The shoals in Gray reef. >etweeu Hog It extends lere are only is moored in tiles west of 5) miles iu a GARDEN ISLAND SHOAL — TROUT ISLAND. 65 It northwesterly direction, and is from If (2) to 2-i^B (2 J) miles broad, is low and woocitid and surrounded by ten rocks, reefs, and shoals. Shoals. — On the east side extensive shoals connect this island with Hog island. These extend around the south and west sides, 7 feet of water being found in spots 2,^ (2^) miles SW. of the island. The NW. end of the island is apparently clear outside of f mile, but this and all these islands should be given a wide berth. Oarden Island shoal is a small 15foot shoal 2^ (2f) miles NE. by N. ftom the NW. end of Garden island. Buoy. — A red and bhick horizontally striped spar buoy is moored in IS feet water and marks Garden Island shoal. Squaw island is the NW. island of the group in the northern part of lake Michigan. It is a small island, low and partly wooded, and is ^ mile north and south, g mile wide at its north end and tapers to a point at its south end. It is surrounded by an extensive reef, and should not be approached nearer than l/o {H) miles. Light — A fixed red light, varied by a red flash every fifteen seconds, visible 13 (15) miles is shown 57 feet above the lake level from an octagonal tower attached to a dwelling, both red, on the north end of Squaw island. Fog signal. — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds blasts of five seconds' duration, with alternate silent intervals of twenty and forty seconds. Buoy. — A black nun buoy is moored in 23 feet water, and marks the north end of the shoal extending to the northwestward from Squaw island, and is 1§ (IJ) miles NNE. from the light. Lansing shoal lies 4 (4^-) miles north of Squaw Island light. It has 10^ feet on its southern end and 23 feet on its northern end. Buoy. — A red nnn buoy is moored in 28 feet water, and marks the SE. end of LaTising shoal. Vessels should pass between this and the black buoy marking Squaw Island shoal. WliiskAy island. — West of Garden island is Whiskey island, about f mile square, with a small bill on tbe western side. Shoals. — Eocky shoals extend from this island a mile to the east- ward, A mile to the westward, and | mile to the northward and south- ward. Between this and Garden island are numerous detached 14 and 17 foot spots, and the passage should not be attemijted. Whiskey Island sboal. — This shoal has a spot just awash one (1^) mile SW. of Whiskey island, and from this point it extends one mile east, J mile north and west, nnd J mile south. Buoy. — A red spar buoy is moored in 17 feet, and marks the south end of this shoal. , Trout island, 3-,^ (4J) miles SW. of Whiskey island, is of small extent. It is ^ mile NW. and SE. and | mile north and south. It is surrounded by .shoals wliich extend from it :i to ^ mile. Midway between this island and Hifjh is'and is a 12-foot patch. 1944— No. 108 e 66 LAKE MICHIGAN. ShoaL — West of the north end of Trout ishind If (2) miles is an 18-foot spot. High island. — West of the north part of Beaver island 3^ (4) miles is High island, 3 (3^) miles long north -and south, 2,^, (3) miles wide at the north end, and one (1^) mile wide at the south end. The island has a few small hills on the W. and NE. sides, and is thinly wooded. Exposed rocks skirt the coast to the South uud NW., and shoals extend from i to J mile from the shore. At the NE. end 5 feet of water is found 1 (1^) mile from shore. Gull island. — This island lies 5§ (6^) miles west of the south end of High island and is l,^u (1^) miles long north and south and § mile vide. Its shore is lined with low bluffs, and it is pnrtly wooded. Shoals. — Shoals extend nearly ^ mile off this island, and a 16-foot spit extends SSE. for one mile. anil Island reef is 3^ (4) miles SSE. of OuU island. It ia about ^ mile in length NE. and SW. and § mile NW. and SE , with 6 feet of water near the center. Half mile to the eastward and southeastward are several detached spots with 16 feet of water on them. Bowlder reef lies 17 (19^) miles west of Beaver Island light. It has 16 feet over it, and extends in a NW. and SB. direction. Bnoy. — A red and black horizontally striped spar buoy is moored in 19 feet water, and marks the NW. end of the reef. Beaver island is the largest of the group. It is 11 (12||) miles long north and south, 5§ (6^) miles broad at its southern end, and 2 ;|^ (3^) miles broad at its northern end. It is well wooded, with low bluffs on the east side and higher hills on the west side. At the NE. end is Beaver harbor, a small but well-sheltered anchorage. Shoals. — Shoal water extends ^ to f mile from shore around the island, excepting the middle of the eastern side, where the shore can be approached somewhat closer. A 10-foot shoal extends one mile NW. from the N W. end and a 4-foot spot § mile NNE. from the NE. point. Buoy. — A black spar buoy is moored iu 15 feet water, and marks the outer end of this latter shoal. The buoy is 1,100 yards from shore. Detached 16 and 17 foot spots lie E. and SE. of this bnoy. Beaver Island harbor. — The deep water in this harbor extends | mile NW. and SE. and J mile NE. and SW.. The entrance is very narrow, rendering it difficult for large vessels or tho«« unacquainted with the harbor to enter. Light — Beaver Island Harbor light, 37 feet above the lake level, a fixed red light, visible 11| (13) miles, is shown from a cylindrical tower attached to the south end of a dwelling, both white, on the north side of the entrance to the harbor. Life saving station. — There is a lifesiieing station 165 feet west of the lighthouse. Shoals. — On the north side of the entrance an 1 Ifoot shoal extends east f mile, its south edge being ^ mile south of the lighthouse. At If (2) miles E. by N. from the light is a 15-foot spot. ■-iiiasi matmm em nmmi*'' (2) miles is an »nd 3^ (4) miles {) miles wide at Tlie island bns thinly wooded, d shoals extend feet of water is be south end of ath and § mile y wooded, d, and a 16-foot [. It ia about ^ , with 6 feet of southeastward tn. id light. It has I. toy is moored in (12^) miles long ad 2j^ (34) miles >w bluffs on the !. end is Beaver ore around the bhe shore can be one mile NW. he NE. point. and marks the from shore. )uoy. rbor extends | trance is very uua/;qnainted le lake level, a indrical tower the north side 65 feet west of t shoal extends thouse. )t. BEAVER ISLAND SOUTH FOX ISLAND. ef Directlona.— With the lighthouse bearing NW. by W. (N. 50° W.), distant one mile, bring it a little on the starboard bow, and head NW. by W. % W. (N. 65° W.) into the harbor. Give the lighthouse a good berth. Anchorage can be found on a line between the inner and cater docks. Bearer Island light — On the south end of Beaver island a fixed, white light, varied by a white flash every minute, visible 16 (18^) miles, is shown 103 feet above the lake level from a cylindrical tower on the weal end of a dwelling, both yellow. This is a coast light and a guide between Beaver and North Fox islands. Fog signal.— A steam siren sounds blasts of seven seconds' duration, with silent intervals of forty-two seconds. Richards reef, with a least depth of 20 feet, lies 6} (7^) miles W. | S. (8. 82° W.) of Beaver Island light. North Fox island is 10 (11^) miles SW. of Beaver island, with deep wat«r between. The island is 2 (2^) miles north and south, and a mile wide at its northern end, tapering to a point at its southern end. At this end is a small hill. The island is wooded. Shoal water extends \ mile firom the north and east shores and | mile from its southwestern shore. Sonth Fox island is 3| (4^) miles SW. of North Fox. It is ^ (^) miles long NW. and SE. and l/o (U) miles wide, tapering to a point at the NW. and SE. extremities. The western coast consists of bluffs and hills, the eastern side being low. Around the south end of the island shoals extend ^ mile off shore, and off the NW. end there is shoal water for ^ mile, terminating in a narrow spit off the NW. point, which extends 1 (1^) mile to the NW. Sonfh Fox Island lifht — A fixed red light, varied by a red flash every two minutes, visible IS/i,, (16) miles, is shown 68 feet above the lake level from a square yellow, tower, attached to a yellow dwelling on the southern extremity of the island. Fog signaL — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds blasts of three seconds, with silent intervals of seventeen seconds. The fog-signal building is brown and is 420 feet SW. by W. from the light tower. Banka — From the northern part of the island a bank with from 4 to 8 fathoms extends northward 3J (4^) miles. It has an average breadth of aboat 2§ (3) miles. From the southern part of the island a bank with from 3 to 8 fathoms of water over it extends south 8^ (9f ) miles, varying in width from 1 (IJ) to IJ (If) miles, with depths of 12 to 50 fathoms outside. On this bank there are several small shoals. A shoal spot, 8 feet of water over rocks, bears S. by W. (S. 11° W.) fSrom the light, distant 4 (4r,\) miles. Bnoy. — A red and black horizontally striped nun buoy is moored in 20 feet water and marks the south side of this shoal, which extends 4 mile north and south. The bottom near the buoy is rocky, the sound- ings irregular, and vessels must be careful in this vicinity in thick weather. 68 LAKE MICHIGAN. Two otiier spots S. f W. (S. 8° W.), OA Hk) in'l«8 from tlie light, ha^e 8 feet over tliiina. Tlie Hh()als are lir»() yards ivi)nrt NW. nid 8E. Buoy. — A red niid black borizoutivlly striped spar buoy is moored in 17 fe«'t water and marks the south side of the NW. spot. A ^lioiil spot with 11 feet of water over it lies S. i V . (S. 5° W.), dig* tuiit 6^ (7^) miles from the light. Buoy. — A red and bhu;k horizontally striped can buoy is moored in 2U feet water niid marks the south end of this shoal. Caution. — In thiek weather vessels should not shoal the water to less than 10 fathoms in this vicinity. North Manitou island is G| (7^) miles north and south and 3^ (4) miles wide at its north end, 2 (2fg) miles at its south end. The island is ){en«3ra11y hilly and is wooded. The north shore is steep-to, and the east and west shores are sho; for nearly J mile. From the OW. point a rocky spit extends ^ mile SVV. and borders the SW. face of the island for % mile off shore. Life-saving station. — There is a life-saving station near Pickards wharf on the east side of the island. Wreck. — A wreck in 26 feet water with 12 feet over it lies 4,^ (5|) miles NE. by E. jj E. (N. G^o B.) of South Manitou light. Vessels should give this wreck a wide berth as it is a dangerous obstruction. South Manitou island is 3^ (4) miles SW. of North Manitou, with a clear channel between. The island h 2)| (3) miles north and south and not quite so wide. The western half of the island is hilly, and the eastern side lower and wooded. Ontsi(1« rhe distance of f mile there are no shoals, excepting a rock of 3 fathom 1 A^hich lies If (2) miles SSW. J W. (S. 28° W.) from the SVV. point of the Island. On the northeast'Crn side of the island is a symicircular harbor, with deep water and good holding ground. It is a good finchorage in all westerly winds. LigbC. — On the south point of Manitou harbor is a fixed white light, 104 feet above the lake level, and visible 16 (18^) miles. The light tower is conical, white, and connected by a covered way with a yellow dwelling. Fog signal — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds a blast of eight sec- onds' duration, with silent interval of fifty-two seconds every minute. The fog-signal hon^^es (two) have red roofs, and are 100 feet NE, and 200 feet NNE. of the lighthouse. NORTH SH(:)RE OP LAKE MICHIGAN. MICHIGAN. Coast— Epoufette point is 14 (16) miles NW. by W. J W. of Aux Chines point, the coast between receding slightly to the NE. The SE. portion of this coast is steep-to, but as Epoufette point is approached there are several patches of from 16 to 18 feet well off shore. rarinr- lie light, have md SE. y is moored in S. 50 W.), dig. y is moored in e water to less nth and 3^ (4) I. The inliuid lep-to, and the the OW. point e of the island near Pickards it lies 4,% (S|) Vessels should 3tion. ranitou, with a nnd soatb and hilly, and the ccpting a rock W.) from the he island is a {ground. It is id white light, The light with a yellow of eight sec- I every minute. feet NE. and EPOUFETTE POINT — MANI8TIQUE RIVER. 69 1 4 W. of Aux IE. The SE. Is approached lore. St Helena shoal, south of Aux Cfaf'iies point, is described on page 52. Manitou Faymen shoal. See page 02. Felkie reef. See page 62. Epoufette point is a narrow peninsula and forms the western extremity of a narrow shoal inlet at the head of which is Efwnfette. Biddle point, next west of Epoufette, projects some distance into the lake. NE. of Biddle point is Gilchrist. Between Epoufette and Biddle jjoints, shoal water extends from the shore for over a mile, and there is an ISfoot patch 1^ (If) miles SE. ^ E. (S. 48° E.) from Biddle point. Mille Coquins point. — Between Biddh nd Mille Goqnins points is a small bay, the shores of which are sb tl from ^ to | mile out. Nau- binway is on this point. At $ mile south of Mille Ooquins all island surrounded by exposed rooks and shoals extending oui o <. '"tt and west and ^ miJe north and south. SE. from this island, 1 (1|) mile, is a 7-foot rocky spot. Coast. — From Mille Goqnins point the coast trends NW. for 2§ (3) miles, thence SW. 9^ (11) miles to Patterson point. There is a rock i mile olf shore just after the coast line changes its direction to the SW., and from this rock the flats gradually leave the shore, and midway between this rock and Patterson point extend off shore 2-^ (2^) miles in the direction of Potter reef, which is described on page 62. As Pat- terson i)oint is approached the flats draw nearer to the shore line. Lansing shoal, SB. of Patterson point, is described on page 65. Scotts point, on which is the town of Orville, is 1^ (If) miles west of Patterson point, and Hughes point is 5| (6) miles farther west. All this coast is shoal for some distance off and should not be approached within a mile. South of Hughes point, about a mile, are shoal spots of 15 and 17 feet. Between Hughes and Seal Ohoix points is a bay with deep water and sandy bottom; it is protected fi'om north and westerly winds. Seol Choiz point projects into the lake If (2) miles. Its SW. face is quite steep-to. Light — On the eastern extremity of Seul Choix point is a fixed white light, 83 feet above the lake level, and visible 14f (17) miles. The light is shown from a conical brick tower. Fog signal. — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds blasts of four seconds, with silent intervals of twenty-six seconds. The building is red brick with red roof, and is 124 feet SB. J B. from the light tower. Manistique river. — The mouth of this river is 14 (16) miles W. ^ N. from Seul Ohoix point. The shore between is rocky and recedes to the northward. Vessels should not go inside the line joining the two. Gulliver lake is 1^^ (IJ) miles inshore and nearly midway between the point and the river. Manistique river is shoal, and its eastern entrance point has a rocky spit extending out for over J mile. Manistique is near the mouth of the river. TO LAKE MICHIGAN. Coast— At Manlstlqne river the coaHt line cliangos its direction to tlie soutliwanl m tar as Aux liarqucs |)oiiit, where it again changes to about SW. to Detour jxiint, Mhicli \n lo)} (IH) niilcH beyond. Along this latter Htretch are Heveral small rocky bays. Wiggins point is 4 ( t^) n»il«8 nortii of Aux Barques point, with Bourassas point midway between, llocky shoals, with 5 and feet water, extend ofi" VViKgins point IJ (2) miles in an easterly and south- easterly direction. Parent bay.— This bay, to the westward of Aux Barques point, is full of rocky, dangerous shoals 1^(1^) miles from shore, and these con- tinue to and around Aux Barques iioint at 3 mile from shore. Portage bay.— From the west side of Portage bay shoals extend for S mile from shore, and east of the bay dangerous 5 and 8 foot shoals extend 1} (2) miles to the SE., while lA(li) uiilcs to the NB. are some exposed rocks f mile from shore. The shoal water at the head of this bay extends Ifo- (IJ) miles from shore. Detonr point is the north point of entrance to Green bay. It is a narrow, wooded, peninsular point projecting to the SE. into the lake, and has shoal water projecMng southward from it for g mile. The islands at the entrance to Green bay will now be described; the description of the bay will be given in the next chapter. ISLANDS AT THE ENTRANCE TO OUEEN BAY. Summer and Little Summer islands are south and west of Detour point. They are wor.! I a 1 connected by a rocky flat, over which, midway between, are r i.y 3 leet water. This flat extends from Little Summer island to tli; main, leaving a very shallow and unsafe passage between. Just v ■ , of Little Summer island is Rocky island, which has shoals extending from it westward and northward for over ^ mile. There is a detached 13-foot shoal 1 (IJ) mile south of Rocky island. A rocky spit wit^h 13 feet over it extends nearly | mile south from the south point of Summer island. Poverty island is a mile SSW. of Summer island. The channel between, reduced to ^ mile in width by Summer Island spit, carries 20 feet nearer to Poverty island, but it should not be attempted except by those locally acquainted. The island is ^ mile north and south by J mile wide. There is a hill on the western side of the island. The south shore of the island is shoal for from ^ to J mile off. The TSW. shore is steep- to. Light— A flashing red light every fifteen seconds, visible 14J (16f) miles, is shown 78 feet above the lake l^-el fr^m a conical tower con- nected with a whit« dwelling on the south end of Poverty island. Fog signaL— A 10 inch steam whistle sounds a blast of five seconds' duration, followed by a silent interval of forty-five seconds; then a blast of three seconds' duration, followed by a silent interval of ten seconds. JisA, tmtfm^mmm 'iv'-ntv,,-^ its direction to gain changes to boyund. Along |uea point, with li 5 and feet tcrly and south- arques point, is I, and these con- shore. loals extend for id 9 foot shoals le NB. are some he head of this )n bay. It is a i. into the lake, mile, described; the ■ • AY. west of Detour lat, over which, lids from Little unsafe passage j^ island, which for over ^ mile. Rocky island, soath from the The channel spit, carries 20 pted except by and south by ^ nd. The soath B NW. shore is isible 14J (16f ) cal tower con- ty island. )f five seconds' tconds; then a interval of ten I I CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHIVI/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historicai MIcroreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques POVERTY ISLAND SHOAL — ROCK ISLAND. 71 PoviBrty Island shoal lies WW. J W. (N. 48° W.) 2 J (2f ) miles from Poverty Island light, with 14 feet of water over it. Bnoy.— It is marked by a red nun buoy moored in 20 feet water. This buoy, ^ mile south of the shoal, marks a narrow ledge of rocks, with 23 feet of water over them, extending about 500 yards S. by E. from the buoy. There may be less water in spots over this ledge, and caution is necessary with deeply laden vessels. Oull island is almost midway between Poverty island and St. Martin island. It is connected to Little Gull island, f mile to the southward, by a shoal with a least depth of 3 feet, which is | mile wide. GraveUy island is f mile ¥. by W. from Gull island. It is sur- rounded by shoal water, and in the channel between the island is a 13-foot shoal. G-raveUy Island shoal is one (IJ) mile north of Gravelly island. It has 16 feet over it. South of this rock J mile is a 13-foot shoal. Bnoy.— -A black can buoy is moored in 18 feet water to mark Grav- elly Island shoal. Vessels should pass northward of the buoy. Poverty Island passage.— If entering Green bay by this passage, keep at least one mile to the southward of Poverty Island light and between the buoys, not approaching Poverty Island Shoal buoy nearer than ^ mile. Bring GraveUy Island buoy to bear south before keeping to the northward. The passage between Gull and Gravelly islands on the north and St. Martin island on the south is to be preferred, as it has deep water and no dangers if a vessel keeps on the St. Martin side of a mid-channel course. St Bbrtin island is 2 (2*) miles NNW. and SSE. and 1 (IJ) mile east and west. The island is hilly and wooded. Shoals extend off the southern end of the island for a mile, with from 4 to 8 feet water over them. The rest of the island is steep-to. Shoals.— At If (2) miles SSW. of the SB. point of St. Martin island is a 9-foot shoal with a IS-foot spot ^ mile NNB. of it. These shoals con- tract the main entrance (Kock Island passage) to Green bay as they lie almost midway between St. Martin and Rock islands. Buoy.— A red can buoy is moored in 21 feet of water on the 8W side of the small 9-foot shoal. Vessels entering nust pass south of this buc/. WISCONSIN. Rock island, the south entrance point of Eock Island passage, is hilly, and is connected to Washington island by shoals. The NE. and W. shores of the island are steep-to. Light— On the north point of Rock island is a fixed white light 137 feet above tha lake level, and visible 17i (19f ) miles. The light tower is square, on a stone dwelling. Rooky shoals.— Prom the SB. point of Rook island, between the 72 LAKE MICHIGAN. bearings E. by 8. (8. 79° E.) aiid 8. by E. f E. (8. 20° E.), and (distant If (2) and 2% (3) miles, are two rocky shoals separated by clear water. The northern shoal is almost bare and the southern one has 3 feet over it. By keeping 4J (5) miles off the islands, a vessel will well clear the shoals. Rock Island passage should be preferred by vessels from the north and NE. It can be safely entered if the Rock Island light is kept between the bearings W. by 8. (8. 79° W.) and W. by N. (N. 79o W.) until within about a mile of the light. All this part of Rock island is steep-to, and it can be rounded at the distance of J mile, if necessary. Washington is the largest of the islands at the entrance to Green bay. It is connected to Rock island on the NE., Hog island on the east, and Detroit island on the south by shoals. Boyer bluff is its NW. extreme, just east of which is Washington harbor. Jacksons harbor is between Washington and Rock islands, and Detroit harbor n the south side of the island is protected by Detroit island. This harbor is shoal and only suitable for very small craft. . Hog island is | mile off the east coast of Washington island and is on a shoal which extends along this part of Washingtou island and J mile into the lake beyond Hog island. Detroit island.— This long, narrow island, lying to the southward of Washington island, is practically part of it, as very shoal water connects the two. Shoals.— From the southern end of Detroit island shoals extend | mile to the 8E., with 6 feet of water and rocks awash J mile from shore. On the SW. side of Detroit island the flats and detached shoals extend ^ mile from shore, the northwestern shoal. Middle shoal, with 8 feet of water over it, being marked by a buoy. Near the 8W. end of the island are two islets J mile offshore. Buoy.— The 8W. point of Middle shoal is marked by a red spar buoy moored in 11 feet water. Wrecks.— Tliere are two wrecks on Middle shoal, the one to the northward of the red spar buoy having but 8 feet of water over it, the one to the 8W. of the same buoy having 15 feet of water over it. Detroit Island £:assage.— This passage to the northward of Pilot and Plum islands can be used, but great care is necessary to avoid the shoals off Detroit and Plum Ws. It is sometimes used as an anchorage during easterly gau rium island lies in the cenusi of the channel south of Washington island. Shoal water extends i mile 8E. from the SB. end of the island and i mile northward from the north coast. This shoal is apparently making out in a NE. direction. Ou the SW. end of Plum island are the ruins of an old lighthouse. Buoy.— A black spar buoy is moored in 14 feet of water on the NE. point of the north shoal. It can be passed close-to from the north- ward, but on approaching it from the westward it should be given a berth of at lea ^t ^ mile. E.); and flistatt . by clear water. 3 has 3 feet over [ will well clear s from the north id light is kept r N. (N. 790 W.) f Bock island is ile, if necessary, itrance to Green g island on the oyer bluff is its ck islands, and icted by Detroit Y small craft. ■jon island and is gtoa island and > the southward ery shoal water shoals extend f mile firom shore, detached shoals die shoal, with 8 the SW. end of r a red spar buoy the one to the >f water over it, water over it. thward of Pilot ary to avoid the DCS used as an of Washington :nd of the island il is apparently i'lum island are ater on the NE. from the north- uld be given a PILOT ISLAND PORTE DES M0RT8. 78 Pilot island lies in the entrance to the southern channel into Green bay, and separates Detroit Island passage from Porte des Morts. It is on a small shoal ^ mile in diiiroetcr. Light — A fixed white light, varied by p white Hash every fifteen seconds, is shown on Pilot island. It is 38 feet above the lake level and visible 11^ (13^) miles. The liglit tower is square and on a yellow brick building, with red roof. The fog signal building is 200 feet S. by W. from the lighthouse. Fog Signal — A lOinch steam whistle sounds blasts of five seconds, with silent intervals of thirty seconds. Outer Shoal.— Porte des Morts entrance— This shoal is If (2) miles off shore at the south entrance to Porte des Morts, and has 14 feet over its northern part. It is the extreme easterly shoal on this part of the coast. Buoy. — A bell buoy is moored in 19 feet water on the SE. end of this shoal. Vessels sliould pass well outside of it. Nine-foot ShoaL — The center of this shoal is § mile off shore and If (2) miles WSW. ^ W. (S. 73° W.) from Pilot Island light. There is a least depth of feet on this shoal. Marked by a black bpar buoy. Waverly Shoal, with a least depth of 12 feet, is about 700 yards northward of !Nine-foot shoal. Buoy. — A black can buoy is moored near the NE. end of Waverly Shoal to mark it. Porte des Morta — Current. — Masters of vessels are warned against the currents which run in and out through this entrance, particularly on the sonth sides of Pilot and Plum islands. With southerly winds the current sets about NNW., passing on both sides of Pilot island, a branch passing to the NW. and south of Plum island. Its strength depends, in a great measure, on the velocity of the wind. With the wind NW. and blowing strong the current sets out into the lake and is frequently so strong that sailing vessels can not make headway against it. Sometimes the current is against the wind. Directions. — With strong southerly winds, vessels standing to the westward are advised to pass to the northward of Pilot island and, in all cases, to the southward of Plum island. With any but strong southerly winds the passage to the southward of Pilot island is recommended. Caution — The most dangerous shoal in this vicinity is that pro- jecting to the southwestward from Pilot island. Over this shoal the current runs with great strength and vessels from the eastward are frequently carried on the shoal. This may be avoided by watching the bearings of the lighthouse when standing in. If the bearing is not changed to the northward, it is evident that the vessel is being carried to the northward, consequently the course should be changed well to the southward of west, and not again to the northwestward until the lighthouse bears north. Coast. — Southward of Porto des Morts, lake Michigan is separated ®v^;Siil^f«si«MSai^&'i«fc*<4«iSS«S«^ 74 LAKE MICHIGAN. from Green bay by a long peuinBula, which extends northeasterly 60 (69) miles from a linejoiuiiig Kewaunee with Green bay. The eastern shore of this peninsula is much indented, but is safe to approach to 3 (3^) miles. Rawley bay is the northernmost of the indentations in the pcnin snla and aflbrds good anchorage and i)rotuction from northerly and westerly winds, but it is much obstructed by slioals botli at its entrance and within the bay. Off the north entrance point to the bay are the Spider islands, which are connected with tlio shore by slioals, and SB. of tlie islands, f mile, is a 13-foot pntch. Vessels in navigating this part of the coast should keep well outside Outer Shoal buoy to avoid the numerous outlying shoals in this locality. ShoaL — Directly in the entrance to IJawley bay is an extensive shoal extending north and south 2^*,- (2f ) miles. There are 3 feet on the south end of this shoal and 4 feet on the north end. Buoy. — A red spar buoy is moored in 18 feet water and marks the southeastern point of this shoal. Should a vessel find it necessary to enter Rawley bay this buoy should be left well to starboard and the course not changed to the northward until well over to the shore of the main. North bay, next south of Kawley bay, is small, and affords for small craft anchorage and protection from west and north winds. The anchorage is just within the entrance points of the bay, and is aboat 'i mile deep, all the rest of the bay being shoal. Sand spits extend from both entrance points; the channel is between the buoys, being about ^ mile wide. Buoys.— A red spar buoy is moored in 24 feet water, and marks the shoal extending southward from the north entrance point. A black spar buoy is moored in 14 feet, and marks the extreme point of the shoal extending northeastward from the south point of entrance. Oana island is 2^ {2^%) miles south of the entrance to North bay. It is a small island close to shore. Light— A fixed white light, 88 feet above the sea level and visible 15J (17^) miles, is shown on Cana island. The light tower is conical, and connected by covered way with dwelling. Both are of yellow brick. Mud bay is jnst within Cana island. It is contracted, with a shoal near the center, and having neither buoys nor lights, is not recommended. Bailey harbor is a good and well-sheltered anchorage, but has shoals extending from both entrance points, also in the entrance to the harbor. There is an old whit^ tower (formerly a lighthouse) on the east side of the harbor abreast the north entrance point which serves as a good day mark, and opposite it on the otlier side of the harbor a shoal makes out J mile. Off the center of the town on the west side the shore can be approached to J mile. Elsewhere it is best to keep at least i mile from shore. Hills rise from the western siiore of the harbor. northeasterly 60 iy. Tbe eastern to approach to 3 18 in the penin II northerly and hat its entrance the bay are the shoals, and SE. navigating this al buoy to avoid is an extensive re are 3 feet on i. r and marks the I it necessary to [irboard and the ' to the shore of aflbrds for small rth winds. The ay, and is about md spits extend ;he buoys, being ', and marks the )int. le extreme point toint of entrance. e to North bay. evel and visible cower is conical, B of yellow brick, itracted, with a [>r lights, is not e, but has shoals ice to the harbor. m the east side serves as a good or a shoal makes ie the shore can p at least ^ mile larbor. BAILET HARBOB — BTURaEON BAY CANAL. IS Eastern shoal — From the eastern point of Bailey harbor a slionl 1 (1^) mile wide makes out to tbe southward a mile, with 13 feet of water on its southwestern and 15 on its southeastern end. Bvoy. — Its southwestern end is marked by a red spar buoy in 18 fbet of water. Bliddle Ground shoal is in the mouth of Bailey harbor. It is a rocky shoal with 14 feet of water over the southern end and 7 feet over the northern. Bnoy. — The southeastern end of this shoal is marked by a black Spar buoy in 18 feet of water. Range lights. — On the north shore of Bailey harbor from a white tower is shown a fixed white Ught. The light is 21 feet above the lake level and visible 0} (11) miles. The rear light, also white, is 950 feet N. by W. ^ W. (N. 17° W.) of the front light. This light is 35 feet above the lake level and visible 11^ (13) miles. ^Thiteflsh point is 8§ (10) miles SSW. of Bailey harbor. In the middle of the bight north of Gave point a spit with 6 feet near its outer end projects from shore 1/f (IJ) miles. Whitefish bay, north of Whiteflsh point, is clear of shoals and open to the eastward. ShoaL— A shoal of 13 feet lies ^ mile SE. of Whitefish point. Bnoy. — ^A red spar buoy is moored in 18 feet water, and marks the SE. end of this shoal. Coast.— From Whiteflsh point the coast trends 7 (8) miles SW. to Sturgeon Bay canal. This shore should not be approached to within a mile, as rocky reefis extend out in places to nearly that distance. Harbor of reinge. — This entrance to the canal leading from lake Michigan to Sturgeon bay is a harbor of refuge, though too limited in area and too unprotected to be very efiicient. The village of Portage is a short distance to the northward. In shape the harbor is triangfu- lar, being bounded by two converging piers 850 feet apart at the shore line and 335 feet apart at the outer end. Beyond the piers on either side are detached, portions of crib work connected with the main piers by fender piling. The inclosed area is nearly 10 acres. In October, 1896, 16 feet could be carried into the harbor midway between the piers. From here the depth shoals gradually toward the !NW. and SW. angles of the harbor. Btaxgfion Bay oanal is 100 feet wide at water surface and 65 feet at bottom, and 7,200 feet long. In April, 1895, the canal had a governing depth of 13 feet. Vessels can not tie up in the canal, but must continue mi to Sturgeon bay. For a description of the western end of the canal, see Ohapter VI. Canal Pierhaad light — A fixed red light, visible 7,^ (8^) miles, is sbown Arom a square, white, pyramidal tower on the outer end of the north pier. Fog wiffui. — A 10-inch steam whistle, in a house in the rear of the 7€f LAKE MICHIGAN. light tower, 8onnds blnsts of five seconds' duration, with silent intervals of twenty Ave seconds. Note. — This signal has been reported as inaudible and unreliable at certain distances therefrom during the prevalence of a fog. The area of inaudibility covers a space of about 4 square miles. Straight out from the canal for nearly a mile the whistle ( m be heard; beyond this distance the sound becomes muffled, and is suddenly lost to hearing. This occurs for the space of about a mile, when it again becomes audible. This phenomenon extends over a space of about 2^ miles off the entrance to harbor north of SE. ^ E. (S. 50° E.) and about 1^ miles south of BE. ^ E. (S. 60° E.), and is about a mile in width, and has the same trend as the shore. Authorities differ as to the exact location ut' this apace of inaudibility. Life-saving statioa — There is a life-saving station about } mile from the light. Directions. — When 1^ (1^) miles off the entrance, bring the Pier- head light to bear NW., and stand in for it. When the piers are close- to, keep in mid-channel. In passing from the canal into Sturgeon bay remember that the channel in the bay is buoyed from Green bay in» Coast — Between Portage and Ahnapee the coast trends 12^ (14^) miles SSW. Near the canal the land is low, then hills 60 feet high line the coast. Along this stretch shoals extend from ^ to f mile from shore. At 2-j^ (3) miles south of the canal entrance and one mile from shore is a large 14-foot spot, with a smaller 14-foot spot ^ mile to the northward and another the same distance to the westward. South of this there is a 17-foot spot f mile from shore. East, a mile from Ahnapee light, is a 17-foot spot. Ahnapee is on both banks of the Ahnapee river at its month. The entrance to the river is protected by piers 200 feet wide at outer end and contracting to within 125 feet. Soundings in November, 1896, showed 14 feet at entrance and 12 feet at the shore end of the harbor piers. The bottom is rocky. Range lights. — The front light is fixed red, and shown from a post 22 feet above the lake level on the outer end of north pier. The rear light is also red, visible 6(7) miles. It is shown from a square, white, pyramidal tower near the outer end of the north pier. Directions. — When 1-^g (1^) miles SE. of the entrance, head in on the range. When the piers are close-to, run between them in mid-channel until the shore line is reached, when keep to the southern side of the channel to the bridge. Coast — From Ahnapee the coast continues in a SSW. direction for 9^ (11) miles to Kewaunee. The coast has rocky shoals extending off from i to J mile; halfway between, a spit extends out nearly % mile, with 13 feet at its outer end. There are dangerous rooks i mile north of Kewaunee entrance and J mile from shore. Kewaunee is on the south side of Kewaunee river. The entrance to the river is through a channel 300 feut wide at the point where tho '^Ig^j^^^g^p; KEWAUNEE — TWO RIVERS. 77 ;h silent intervals and unreliable at a fog. The area )s. Straight oat ird; beyond this lost to hearing, becomes audible. I ofif the entrance es south of SE. ^ le same trend as uf this space of bbout} mile from bring the Pier- n the piers are al into Sturgeon )m Green bay in» trends 12^ (144) 60 feet high line miie from shore, ile from shore is D the northward th of this there ihnapee light, ia its mouth. The de at outer end rovember, 1895, d of the harbor >wn from a post pier. The rear a square, white, ), head in on the in mid-channel ern side of the V. direction for 8 extending off i nearly f mile, Its ^ mile north The entrance oint where the J river bends to the north. The lake end of the channel is protected by two piers 200 feet apart. Soundiiiga in channel Ai>ril, 1895, Hhuwed a channel midway between the piers abont 80 feet wide and 13 feet deep. A basin 450 feet long and 11 to 12 feet deep, the same width as the entrance channel, has been formed in the old river be«l to the north- ward of the entrance. Range lights.— The front light is fixed red, and shown at outer end of the north pier. It is 24 feet above the lake level. The rear light, also red, is 42J feet high, and visible TiV m) miles. It is shown from a square, white, pyramidal tower 230 feet from outer end of the north pier. Pog signal. — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds blasts of three seconds, with silent intervals of seventeen seconds. Life-saving station at inner end of the north pier. Directions.— When 1 ,% (1^) miles E8E. of the entrance head in on the range. When the piers are close-to keep in mid channel. Caution.— If approaching from the northward be careful of the rooks north of the entrance. Shoal. — An 18-foot shoal has been reported as lying | mile SE. by E. I E. (S. 60° E.) of the north pierhead. It is 200 feet long, 15 feet wide, and extends NE. and SW. Coast— Twin River point is the easternmost part of Bawleys point and is south 14| (17) miles from Kowatiuee. From Twin River point the coast curves around to the SW. to Two Rivers. Between Kewaunee and Twin River point the coast line recedes slightly to the westward and in the bight are Deans and Two creeks, both at the mouths of small streams. There are no shoals outside the distance of J mile from shore along this coast. South of Deans and ^ mile offshore is a rock with 3 feet over it, and north of Two creeks, about the same distance offshore, are several detached 17-foot spots. Twin River light is 4J (5) miles from Two rivers on the extremity of a low, sandy point. It is a fixed white light, varied by a white flash every thirty seconds and visible 16J (19) miles. ' »} is shown 111 feet above the lake level from a conical tower connect d with a dwelling; both are white. Pog signal. — A 10-inoU steam whistle sounds blasts of ttve seconds' duration, with alternate silent intervals of ten and forty seconds. The fog signal building is on the beach 300 feet SB. from the lighthouse. Two Rivers is on the SB. side of Rawleys point, and has an excel- lent harbor, formed by the' junction of East and West Twin rivers, ill the fall of 1893 the city dredged the inside harbor to a depth of 10 to 13 feet. The rivers are navigable for 2^ (3) miles from the mouth. The entrance is between piers 210 feet apart. Soundings taken in April, 1895, showed a governing depth of 11 feet. An 11-foot shoal projecting from the south pier makes the channel very narrow and is a seiions obstruction. Light— A fixed red light, visible 7^ (8jJ) miles, is shown from a w LAKE MICHIGAN. 8<{uare pyramidal tower on the outer end of the north pier. It is SS} feet above the lake level. Life-Eaving station. — There i» a life-saving^ statfon near the innm: end of the east pier. Tnga. — ^Tugs are owned by four difl'erent parties, but are so mnob engaged in flsbing and towing rafts that they are not always obtainable. Directions. — When 1/,^ (1^) niile:} off the entrance bring the Pier- head light to bear SW. (the piers run NW. and SE.) and head in. When the piers are close-to. keep between them in mid-chanuel. Manitowoc is built up on both sides of the mouth of the Manitowoo river. The entrance to the river is between piers 240 feet apart at the outer end, narrowing to 220 feet inside. A breakwater commences at the prolongation of the north pier and SOO feet from its end and extends toward shore in a northwesterly direction 400 feet. A channel midway between the piers, 150 feet wide and 15^ feet deep, was completed in June, 1896. Diy dock. — Length over all, 360 feet; width of gate, 44 feet, and depth over sill, 13^ feet. Lights. — On the outer end of the north pier is a square, white, pyr- amidal tower, upper and lower parts inclosed. A fixed red light is shown Ax>m this tower 34 feet above the lake level, and is visible 7^^ (8^) miles. On the SE. end of the breakwater, 530 feet E. | N. (JS. 83° E.) from Pierhead light is a brown corrugated iron structure from which is shown a fixed red light, 34 feet above the lake level. Fog signal — A 10 -inch steam whistle sounds as follows: Blast three seconds, silent twelve seconds; blast three seconds, silent twelve seconds, blast six seconds, silent twenty-four seconds. A reflector over this steam whistle throws the sound toward lake Michigan. Direotiona. — When l^i^ (I^) miles off the entrance, head in on the range W. | S. (S. 83° W.), pass south of the b.reakwater and mid-ohannel in between piers. Shoals. — Several detached 16-foot shoals »re 1 (1^) mile NE. from Manitowoo Pierhead light and from ^ to f mile off shore. Another shoal with 16 feet on it is 1^ (If) miles S. by E. ^ E. from the same light and about a mile off shore. This patch is off the mo ith of Silver oreek. Coast — Sheboygan light is 20 (23) miles sou hward of Manitowoc. The coast between is all along shoal from ^ to $ mile offshore and has several detached shoal patches. Oenterville is about halfway between the two points. There is a depth of 0-feet ^ mile off shore, } mile SE. of Oenterville. Sheboygan light.— A fixed white light, visible 12^ (14$) miles, is shown 80 feet above lake level from a square tower on a white dwelling. It is on a point a mile northward from the town. Sheboygan ree£ — East of Sheboygan light is a small 18-foot spot South of this spot is a 17-foot spot, and SE. 4 E. (S. 48° E.) ^ mile is ^e north part of a reef which extends south 600 yards. It has 7 feet pier. It is 85^ near tlie inner lit are so mnob rays obtainable. t)ring the Pier> .) and bead in. -channel. ' the Manitowoo Bet apart at the r commences at )nd and extends hannel midway « completed in te, 44 feet, and are, white, pyr- ed red light is d is visible 7-^ E. I N. (N. 83° Btracture firom level. follows : Blast >, silent twelve II reflector over ;an. lead in on the id mid-ohannel mile NE. from Another shoal lame light and Silver ore^. of Manitowoo. shore and has fway between >re, I mile SE. 14|) miles, is rhite dwelling. 18-foot spot ° E.) i mile is It has 7 feet SHEBOYGAN — PORT WASHINOTOM. 79 over its northern part and 13 feet over the Bonthern. The passage betwtMMi the reef and sliore Hhoiild not be attempted. Buoys. — A red can buoy is niouied in 24 feet water off the north shlu of the 1 7-fuot 8pot. A red can buoy is niooied iu 24 feet water off the SB. eud of the reef. The 7foot depth is almost midway between the buoys. Sheboygan is on the north side of the mouth uf the Sheboygan river. The entrance to the river is between piers 270 feet apart out- side, iinrrowiiig to 170 foot nt the shore line. A chiumel midway between the piers, 17 feet deep with a width of about lOU feet, was com- pleted ill Juno, 1805. The river turns to tlie S\V. from the entrance, and forms a deep bight soutli of the main portion of the city. There is a winding basin 400 feet in width at the mouth of the river, and the average width of the river is 220 feet, increasing to 260 feot at the first bridge, about 2,200 feet from the month. Light. — On the north pier near the outer end is a fixed red light 32 feot above the lake level, and visible 7^^ (8^) miles. The light is shown from a square, white, pyramidal frameworic tower, upper part inclosed. Life-saving station. — There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the north pier. Signal-Senrico station. — There is a Signal-Service station on the pier. Tnga. — The Sheboygan Tug Line charges 3 to 4 cents per ton fw actual load carried. Fog signal. — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds, blasts of four seconds, followed by silent intervals of twenty-six seconds. The fog signal building is brown, and stands immediately in the rear of the light tower on the pier. Directions. — From the northward the pierhead light can be ap- proached on a SW. by W. ^ W. (8. 03° W.) bearing; from the south on a NIHW. i W. (N^. 2S° W.) bearing. Nothing inshore of these beariugn. The direction of the piers is about east and west. OoastL — Port Washington is the next place of any size, and is 22^ (26) miles to the sontlieastward of Sheboygan. This portion of the coast is more bold; the hills range from 60 to 140 feet iu height, and outside the distance of ^ mile there are no shoals, but vessels coasting should keep at least f mile oft' shore. Port Washington, at the mouth of the Sank river, lies 22 (25j|^) miles north of Milwaukee. The harbor consists of an inclosed, dredged basin of 5f acres in area, with two arms, one running north, 800 feet long and 200 feet wide, and the other running west, 500 fieet long and 150 feet wide. The Sauk river empties into the lake south of the south pier. The entrance is between piers 150 feet apart. The depth in the entrance channel was restored to 12 feet for a width of 90 feet in 1895. Soundings taken iu April, 1895, showed a depth of 11 feet over most of the area of tlte north basin j north half of west basin, 80 LA\E MICHIGAN. avertifre depth 11 foet; hoiUIi liiilf, iivvrii);(> depth iihout 4 feet. A short distance iiortli of the eiitriiiicu Ih nii ohl laiDliiif; pit^r, now abandoned. Port Washington light. — A fixed white iiglit, 113 feet above the lake level and viHible 1<(^ (VJ) miles, Is shown from a square tower on a yellow dwelling on the blutf in the nortiicrn part of the town. Pierhead light. — A fixed red light, visible 7,V (8^) miles, is shown fVom a square white tower on the outer end of the north pier. It is 42^. feet above the lake level. Wharfage. — There is a city ordinance to collect dockage on freight discharged or received at the foot of streets or alleys running to the harbor. Tngs. — There is ouo fishing tug which, wheu in port, will take vessels in and out of |)ort for a moderate charge. Directions. — When off the entrance, bring the Pierhead light west, and stand in for it with the piers end ou. When the piers are close-to, keep between them, changing course on passing the foundry as desired. Coast. — South of Port Washington is the highest land on the west shore of the lakes, ranging from 115 to 170 feet at Ulao. As far as Ulao the coast is comparatively steep-to. Here shoals extend out to the eastward for nearly f mile, with 10 feet on the outer end. They then approach the shore again, until off Kemps ^ mile there is a detached 10-foot patch. North of Fox point 3 (3^) miles a spit extends oat J mile, with 13 feet at its extremity, and off Fox point is "another spit, with a depth, g mile from shore, of 8 feet. A mile north of Fox point a spit extends to the northeastward, with 16 feet } mile from shore, and in the north part o^ Whiteflsh bay, south of Fox point, a narrow spit extends northeastward, with 16 feet'} mile from shore. South of Whiteflsh bay to Milwaukee there are no shoals outside the distance of ^ mile. IffUwankee bay is open to the eastward, with no oiflying shoals. Milwaukee light. — A fixed white light, varied by a white flash every forty-five seconds and visible 17^ (19f ) miles, is shown, 122 feet above the lake level, tcoia a brown, octagonal tower connected with a white dwelling. It is on the extreme north point of Milwaukee bay. Harbor of refuge. — ^This harbor will have an anchorage area when completed of 417 acres beyond the 18- foot curve, the whole inclosed by a breakwater. The present area outside of the 18-foot curve is 119 acres. The 20-foot curve is ^ mile off shore. A lightvessel, painted red, is moored near and inside the southern end of the breakwater. Two lights are shown, one directly over the other. The upper light is white and the lower light red. The lower light is 30 feet above the water, the distance between the lights being 4 feet. This vessel is under the control of the United States Engineers. Cribs. — North of the breakwater about ^ mile the waterworks pile bridge pier with the old crib at the end projects from the shore, and . NE. of the end is the new crib, ^ mile S. by E, from MUwankee light. ■=i«Jti..-C-HH«M--' feet. A 8hort w tibaiiduned. uet above the ire tower on a town. ilea, iH Rhown iier. It is 42^ ip^o on freight iiuning to the ort, will take (id light west, s are close-to, Iry as desired, id on the west 10. As far as extend ont to er end. They le there is a % spit extends int is another north of Fox t } mile from ' Fox point, a ) from shore. Is oatside the ing shoals, b whit« flash own, 122 feet lected with a aakee bay. ^e area when e inclosed by curve is 110 Ithe southern Btlyover the The lower J lights being fs Engineers. erworks pile shore, and . iukee light. MILW/.UKEB. 81 Mllwankee Is, next to Chicago, the largest city on the lake, and is at the mouth of the Milwaukee river on Milwaukee bay. It has a large commerce and steamers now call there direct from Guroi)e. The entrance to the river is between piers 200 feet apart. In May, 1805, the channel between piers was 140 feet wide and 10 feet in depth. The river is 200 feet wide at the entrance and as far as the principal docks. There are no obstructions excepting the bridges, the nearest of which is 2,000 feet from the entrance. The average depth of water in the river is about 16 feet. Pierhead light— A fixed red light, visible llt^y (13) miles, is shown 40 feet above the lake level from a square, white, pyramidal tower on the outer end of the north pier. The keeper's dwelling, with the tower of the discontinued light attached, is on the north pier inside this light. Fog signaL — A 10-inoh steam whistle in a bouse on the north pier in rear of the light sounds blasts of Ave seconds' duration, with silent intervals of fifty-five seconds. Life-saving atation. — There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the south pier. Dry docks. — There are two docks, 365 and 312 feet over ill; widths of gatec, 66 and 45 feet; depths on Hills, 16 and 15^ feet. Whaifage. — ^There are no wharfage charges for vessels. Twenty cents per ton is charged on cargoes. Toga. — ^The Milwaukee Tug Boat Line owns six tugs and the Inde- pendent Tug Boat Line two tugs. There is a published printed scale of prices for towing in Milwaukee harbor. The charges are about 6 cents per registered ton. Directioiia— When 2| (3) miles east of the entrance, head west for the Pierhead light, then in between the piers. Entering the outer harbor bring the lightvessel to bear NW., distant one mile, when head west until the lightvessel bears N. by E. (S. 11° E.), when head north into the harbor. These directions will hold for a change of the position of the lightvessel. The distance may be short- ened as the lightvessel approaches the end of the proposed breakwater. Ciurrenta. — During fresh northerly winds there is a current along the shore setting from north to south across the harbor entrance. Buoy. — ^A black can buoy is moored in 20 feet water off South point, Milwaukee bay. The bottom between the bnoy and South point is rocky, with only 12 feet water. Shoala. — ^There are two small shoals with 17 and 18 feet water over them, lying, respectively, S. by E. ^ E. (S. 14° E.) and S. by E. i E. (S. 21° E.), distant a mile from the buoy. South BCilwaukee, at the month of Oak creek, is 7f (0) miles south of Milwaukee. North and south of the mouth of Oak creek the lake shore is bold, rising in high clay blufis. The shore between should not be approached within a mile, as there are several otflying shoals. There are two piers, built by private parties, extending into the lake, 1044— No. 108 6 82 LAKE MICHIGAN. with a clear opening between the piers of 200 feet. Originally there was a depth of 12 feet between the piers, but it has shoaled considoi ably. It is proposed to continue the improvement and build new piers out to the 20-foot curve. Coast. — From Oak creek the coast trends 8| (9^) miles BE. to Wind (Bacine ) point; it then changes its direction to the south for 2-^ (3; miles to Bacine. This portion of the coast is quite bold and hilly. Wind (Racine) Point lights. — The poiut projects some distance into the lake, and on the point is a flashing white light every thi3rty seconds. The light is 112 feet above the lake level and visible 16^ (19) miles. The lighthouse is a conical tower, connected by covered way with dwelling, both cr yellow brick. A fixed red light is shown from the watch-room windows of the same tower, immediately under the main light. It is 104 feet above the lake level, visible 7^^ (^) miles between the bearings N. and N. by W. f W. (N. 20° W.), covering Bacine reef. Fog signal — A 10-inch steam whistle sounds alternate blasts of three and Ave seconds, with silent intervals of twenty-six seconds. Racine reef.— This dangerous reef lies If (2) miles ESE. ^ E. (8. 73o E.) ftom Bacine Pierhead lighthouse. It extends ENB. and WSW. a mile, and north and south § mile, with 8 feet of water over its sboal- est. part. There are several disconnected shoal spots of 15 and 1^ feet north of the reef proper. The channel between the reef and the city has a depth of 3 to 6 fathoms. Buoys. — A red spar buoy is moored in 18 feet and marks the eastern end of Bacine reef. A black can buoy is moored in 17 feet and marks the westerly edge of the reef. Between these buoys is a depth of 8 feet. Racine is at the mouth of Boot river. The entrance to the harbor is formed by two piers, 250 feet apart at the entrance, narrowing to 160 feet at the shore line. Soundings in October, 1895, showed a channel 13^ feet deep, with a width of about 60 feet, and a bar at the entrance projecting from the south pier about halfway across the channd, with a depth of from 12 to 13 feet over it. Racine (Root river) light — A fixed white light, 48 feet i^ve the lake level, visible 12 j^ (14^:) miles, is shown ftom a square yellow tower attached to a yellow dwelling on the north pier, about 800 feet from the outer end. Pierhead light. — A fixed red light, 35 feet above the lake level, is shown on the outer end of the north pier. With Bacine (Boot river) light (white) the light will guide clear to the northward of Bacine reef by keeping the white light open to the northward of the red light. Fog signal — A fog beli at this station is struck by machinery dur- ing thick or foggy weather, a single blow eyetj twenty seccmds. The bell is suspended from a frame in front of the pierhead tower. Life-saving statioa. — ^There is a life-saving station near the innw end of the north pier. BAniME — KEN08H4. ^nally there vas led considoiably. new piers oat to ilea 8E. to Wind suath for 2^ (3; lid and hilly. )me distance into :y thirty seconds^ le 16^ (19) miles. )vered way with shown from the trader the main ^) miles between rin^ Bacine reef, ite blasts of three econds. ESB.iE. (8.730 INB. and WSW. er over its sbeal- of 15 and 1« feet reef and the dty larks the eastern 7 feet and mtffks is a depth of 8 ce to the harbor narrowing to 160 lowed a channeA r at the entri;ttce le ohatt&d, with 8 feet al)oye the are yellow tower 800 feet from tlie the It^e level, is Bine (Boot riyer) d of Bacinereef he red light. machinery dnr- y seconds. The tower. near the innw Signal-Service station. — There is a Signal-Service station aboat 400 feet from the Boot Biver ligbthonse. Directions. — If coming np the coaei, keep % (1) mile off shore, then midway between the black bnoy and the shore nntil on the range with the piers end on, when head in between the piers. If coming from the northward, stand in with Boot Biver ligbthonse bearing WSW. ^ W. (8. 73° W.), bvkt nothing to the westward of this bearing, to avoid Bacine reef. At night — ^From the northward, stand in with Boot Biver light, white, bearing WSW. J W. (S. 73° W.) until Wind Point light bears north, when stand to the sontJi ward until the lights on the n uder. The city is 14 feet above the lake level. ■ The Ch ;»go river runs through the city from the lake, nearly one 9 mile west, then separates into two branches, one running NW. and the ■ other SW., dividing the city into three divisions, which are connected I by many bridges and tunnels. A canal connects the main or SW. branch with the Illinois river, and so with the Mississippi and the gulf. This channel has been so deepened that the waters of the river and the lake flow through into the Illinois and Mississippi. The water supply is drawn from cribs well out in the lake through tunnels, carrying it under the streets to widely separated parts of the city to stations, whence it is distributed by powerful pumps. There io also a system of cisterns connected with the tunnels, for use in case of fire or other emergency. The water is pure, cold, and wholesome, and the supply inexhaustible. There are numerous hospitals and many public libraries. The climate of Chicago is much modified by the lake; the mean tem- perature for seventeen years was 48.6°, varying between a mean of 24° in January and a mean of 72° in August, the mean temperature of the water for the same period being 48°, varying from 32.9° to 67.6°. There is a marked preponderance of laud winds (SW.) during the winter and a slight preponderance of lake winds (NE.) in the summer, this being an average of eighteen years' observations. The mean annual rainfall in the country surrounding Chicago is 34 inches, taken flrom observa- tions of forty-seven years. The death rate was lower than that of any other city of its size in 1892 and 1893. Chicago is a port of entry, and an immense amount of traffic passes through, it being the first city in the country as far as arrivals and departures of vessels are concerned, though it is second to New York in tonnage. Merchandise may be shipped direct from foreign ports to Chicago by being transported in bond from port of first entry. The number of ves- sels making direct trips to Europe is increasing. There is also a large number of railroads entering the city, which afford facilities for shipping goods to all parts of the country. The grain elevators are great features of the city, vessels being loaded and unloaded by machinery. The principal trade is in live stock, pork packing, and other products of the farm and dairy, flonr, grain, seed, mannfiMstures of steel and iron, leather, shoes, chemicals, wines, brewing and distilling, cigars, tobacco, etc. Eburbor. — ^The harbor of Chicago consists of an inner and an oater harbor, the former being the Chicago river, which has been dredged and its month protected by piers 500 feet apart at the entrance, but the river is so filled with docks as to be very cramped and crowded for the immense commerce. Constant dredging is necessary to keep oat •■vmiiammimim »6^!.*ia&^iSi^ff-»iS«SASifefe.*i«tt^'#B 86 LAKE MICHIGAN. the accamnlation of sand brought down by a NE. lake current, which has made many acres of new land on the north side of the entrance. The outer harbor is formed by the North pier, an eastern breakwater, and a southern breakwater, and incloses a basin of 270 acres to tho south and east of the river entrance. A portion of this basin was dredged to a Iti-foot depth prior to 1887, but since has been gradually filling up. A red and black horizontal-striped buoy marks a wreck in the harbor with but 7^ feet water over it. The North pier reaches east in continuation of the north bank of the river and extends 200 yards beyond the eastern breakwater, which is commonly known as the Obicago North breakwater. It is 4,036.5 feet long, running perpendicularly (S. 0° 37' W.) from the North pier, and about 3,300 feet from shore; a dock line 1,300 feet from shore and 2,000 £eet from the eastern breakwater and parallel to it has bv^n established, bat the docks have not yet been built out to this line. The southern breakwater, commonly known as the Ohicago South breakwater, extends SW. by S. 3,000 feet from the end of the eastern breakwater, completing the basin. There are three entrances to this harbor. The outer breakwai»r, beginning at a line running north from the end of the North pier and about 5,000 feet from that pier, extends 5,413 feet, S. S0° 34' E. with a depth of from 18 to 32 feet of water inside of it, forms an excellent harbor of refuge for vessels, and renders it easy fbr vessels to enter the outer harbor of Ohicago. The western half of this area has but 20 feet or less of water. The entrance channel to the harbor has been dredged to a dei^h of 20 feet, with a width of 250 feet at the eastern and 200 feet at the western end. At the latest information this channel had slightly shoaled, but there was a depth of 18 feet at extreme low water. There is a depth of 18 feet of water at the entrance of the river. Three of the tunnels have but 16 to 18 feet of water over their crowns. Only a small part of the river has over a 15-foot depth of water. The draft of vessels entering the river is limited to the depth of water over the crown of the La Salle Street tunnel, which is 16 feet 8 inches as an average. This depth is in the exact center of the river on aline between the central piers of the Olark Street bridge and Wells Street bridge. There are no public wharves or docks. The buildings are in many eases so near the docks as to prevent, dredging deeper than 16 to 18 feet close to them. There are about fbur bridges to the mUe, whioh sfiKMNialy interferes with navigation. Tugs should be employed in all movements of vessels above the j{Diioti"^^« -d Wreck^g Com^r^ t^Vfor^sptrptt'es^ ^^^' ^^- ^ "-^- o^ private Uefow^n Charges are moderate for the distance towed. These charges are rbor 3} (4) miles I and there is a bse this depth to II this depth is ctively, from the ghts. A tower } white. These •n the south side three docks, the 4 feet of water is 280 feet long, id the smallest the miter sill, lifting 25 tons, WKlen vessels, ^ard on the Gal^ feet wide at top I Hydrographio iffice is supplied s, also nautical bation or refer- r on top of the Ohicago, daily itandard time, through any ant of noon, it minutes after all fail to drop minutes after ng April 1 and age, so long as winter vessel upany. Vessel ing Company, e parties own ) charges are CHICAGO DIRECTIONS. 89 regulated by a tariff scale for the distance and size or tonnage of the vessel towed. Charges are on an average of $10 an hour for ground work. The average cost of towing steamers is $75 per trip, consorts or barges $130, and sailing vesseLs $45. Pilotage. — Tug masters are licensed and responsible pilots. All steamboat masters who navigate the river or harbor are also licensed pilots. Night aignala. — A temporary search light has been mounted on the Auditorium tower for the purpose of giving warning to mariners of the coming of severe storms, and also to announce the approach of cold waves. This will not take the place of the present signal flags and lights, but is in addition thereto. As a rule, the time for using the search-light signal will be immediately after the receipt of the evening reports, and if these show conditions dangerous to mariners or the approach of a cold wave the search light will sweep the horizon between 8.30 and 10 p. m. The signals are as follows: White light: Cold wave and frost warnings. Bed light: High easterly winds. Bed and white light (pencil of light half-and-half): High westerly winds. Cnrranta. — ^There is no perceptible current in the Chicago river, except when a sudden change of wind raises or lowers the lake surface or when an exceptionally high flceshet occurs, setting a current out into the lake. Near the end of the piers at the entrance to the river a current has been noticed which sometimes forces vessels against the piers. Direotioiia. — ^Vessels approaching Chicago firom the north or south should keep 2^ (3) miles off shore, to avoid the numerous shoals and cribs. When east from the Ohicago Pierhead light a vessel may enter from the west or east end of the outer breakwater, or from either end of che eastern breakwater, these ends being marked by lights. Ves- sels may then come to anchor behind the breakwaters or steer for the mouth of the river, which is marked by a range of lights, where they will be taken charge of by a harbor tug in charge of a licensed pilot, who will take the vessel to the dock to which she may be consigned. No vessel is allowed to use sails in the river. Making the harbor from the northeastward, pass i mile east of the Chicago Waterworks Crib light, on a course of south, until the North Pierhead light bears W. by S. (S. 79° W.}, when run in on this course for the entrance. To enter the outer harbor from the southward, bring the light on the south end of the eastern breakwater to bear west, stand in through the entrance, and, as you pass the light, haul up to the northward for anchorage. Between Chicago and Calumet rivers are several offlying shoals, besides the shoal water which lines this portion of the coast, and extend out in places for a mile. i9.iiia>attt<»4.iKi-is>Kfi'&»'s •9 LAKE MICHIGAN. Oakland ahoaL — Off Forty-first street, Chicago, 4 (4^) miles from the entrance to the river, a sand spit called Oakland shoal extends out f mile, with 9 feet least water near the center of the shoal. Buoys.^ — The outer (easterly) end is marked by a black can buoy in 26 feet of water; the inner (westerly) end by a red spar buoy ^ mile from shore, in 16^ fieet of water. These baoys are | mile apart, with 9 feet water about midway between. Morgana ree£ — About a mile to the southward of Oakland shoal, ofif the wharves at Hyde park, Morgans reef extends a mile firom shore; the outer end, with 7 to 16 feet of water thereon, being rocky and the inner part with a least depth of 3 feet. From Morgans reef to the World's Fair pwc shoal water extends f mile. At } mile east from the pier is a large 18- foot spot. "Buoju, — ^The outer end of Mmrgans reef is marked by a black spar buoy in 13 feet water and the inner end by a red spar buoy in 12 feeL naif mile south of the outer buoy are two spots with 18 feet of waXex on them. There is a narrow passage with a depth of 12 feet, which small vessels can use between Chicago and Calumet, passing between the inner bnoy and the shore, but closer to the buoy. Hyde Park idKtaUi. — Half mile to< the eastward oi Morgans reef is the Inner Hyde Park shoal, with 12 iieetof water on the northern end; two detached spots of 17 Mid 18 feet depth north of it and one of 17 feet SB. of it. Nearly a mile to the eastward and 2 (2^) miles from shore is the Outer Hyde Park shoi^ with 11 fiset of water. Bnoya. — Hyde Park Outer shoal, a red and black horizontal-striped nun buoy in 18 feet water, marks the northern point of this shoal. Hyde Park Inner shoal, a red and black horizontal-striped spar hamy in 17 feet water, mai^s the north side of this sheaL Iffadiaoa Park Shoal bm^.'-At | mile to the SW. of Hyde Park shoal is a red and blaok horizontal-striped spar buoy in 16 feet of water Mie (1^) mile off shore. Vessels will clear the shoal by giving the bnoy a berth of 300 feet. Sonth Park ahoaL— One mile south of Outer Hyde Park shoal and If (2) miles fhmi shore is South Park shoal, with 6 to 11 feet of water on its shoalest part. Bnoy.— The south side of the 6-foot shoal is marked by a red and black horizontal-striped can buoy in 28 feet of water. Inside of this shoal and of the Hyde Park Shoal bnoy there is » channel i mile wide. Vessels using it must keep ^ mUe to tbe weal- ward of the buoys, being earefol to avoid the Madison Park shoaL Oxiba— A mile south of this and a mile east of the World's Fak pier is the Hyde Park Waterworks innw erib, and distant | mile KB. by E. i E. (N. 590 E.) from this crib is the outer crib. These cribs, marked by white lighte in cupolas fiO feet high, are not yet completed. The inner orib is to ba abandoned. CALUMET. 91 I (4)V) milea firom ihoal extends out ihoal. iJock ean booy ia spar buoy ^ mile ftile apac^ with 9 Hkkland shoal, off e from shore; the ky and the inner water extends { •ot. by a blaok spar 'buoy in 12 feet 38 feet of watw ich small vessels n the inner buoy Morgans reef is e northern end; it and one of 17 (2^) miles li-om •rizontalstriped thisslMMd. riped spar buoy . of Hyde Park IffiiMtofwatnr h m the northward, and strong currents across the ends of the piers have been noticed at times, necessitating care in entering. Direotiomi.— When one mile off the entrance, with the light bearing 8W. by W. 4 W. (8. 69° W.) head for the piers, end on. When the light bears SW. i W. (S. 51° W.) it will be on a range with the red light on the Ninety-second Street bridge. The fair-weather channel lies between the entrance buoys. Light-draft vessels can, after passing Clarke point, bring the Pierhead light to bear SSW. and head for it, rounding the north pier 100 feet distant and keeping 50 feet from the north pier after entering the channel. In heavy weather and entering at night, light-draft vessels should approach the entrance with the pier bearing south, clear the pier about 150 feet, and head in to the harbor. In this way the current sweeping past the end of the north pier toward the south pier is avoided. It is safe to enter here in ordinary blows, but not in severe gales, the NW. winds being the most dangerous. There is good anchorage out- side with good holding ground of clay beneath the sand. Caution. — ^Tbere is a shoal south of the entrance on a line with the south pier and outside of the north pier. Keep the north pier closer aboard. An electric light on the end of the Illinois Steel Company's ore dock is used by persons familiar with the harbor as a guide at night. As there is no fog signal it is not safe to attempt the entrance in thick weather. Entering the lUlnoia Steel Oompany'e new harbor. — Head for Calumet Pierhead light SSW. (S. 2S° W.) until the stacks of the fi^maces are opened up, then head in the channel between the buoys until the stacks are all in line, when head in on this range W. ^ S. (S. M° W.) until abreast of the third red buoy, when haul up for the piers. Cantioa— There is a bar with 14 feet of water on it extending to the dredged channel off the SE. end of the north pier of this harbor. The eastern shore of lake Michigan will now be described from Wangoshance point southward to South Chicago. EASTERN SHORE OP LAKE MICHIGAN. MiomaAN. Wangoshance light, island, and shoaL See page 64. He anz Qalets and light See page 64. Coast — South of Wangoshance point is a large bay open to the west- ward. The northern part of this bay is all shoal, and shoals extend LITTLE TRAVERSE BAY — GRAND TRAVERSE BAT. 93 lave a dry dotsk s at the top, 70 8 feet of water 8 also all con- bhe northward, l)een noticed at e light bearing When the light 1 the red light r channel lies r after passing nd head for it, feet from the r and entering e with the pier ;he harbor. In th pier toward vere gales, the inchorage out- 1 line with the rth pier closer uiy's ore dock ftt night. As ttnce in thick >r.— Head for f the furnaces loys until the 840 W.) until ending to the harbor, scribed teom 1 to the west- loals extend 1^ (1^) miles out from the head of the bay. Cross village is at the southern point of the bay, near which the shoals extend off nearly j utile. From here the coast takes a southwesterly direction for about 4^ (5) miles and then south for 6 (7) miles to Seven mile point. This part of the coast is hilly. Middle village is north of Seven-mile point and from this point the coast carves in to the SE. and east to the head of Little Traverse bay. Little Traveraa bay may be considered as having Seven-mile point as its north entrance point and Big Uock point as it^ south entrance point. From a line Joining these points the bay is l(Mr (12) miles deep. It is wide, has deep water and good holding ground, and aflbrds pro- tection from all but westerly winds. Little Traverse is on the north part of the bay. Little Traverse light. — On the extremity of Harbor point, south of Little Travers, is a fixed red light, 37 feet above the lake level, and visi- ble 114 (13) miles. The light tower is square and attached to the south end of dwelling, both red. Fog signal— A bell is struck by machinery, a double blow every thirty seconds. Charlevoix, 3^ (3f ) miles SW. of Big Bock point, is at the mouth of the Pine river. The harbor entrance leads through Pine river and Bound lake to Pine lake, 3 mile back' from the coast. It is formed by two piers 160 feet apart, narrowing to 100 feet at the shore line. The available depth is 12 feet. There is a depth of 40 tieet in Bound lake. The channel from Bound lake to Pine lake is between revetments 83 feet apart, the depth being 11 feet. Charlevoix Pierhead light — A fixed red light, visible 8^ (9|) miles, is shown 37 feet above lake level from a square white tower ou the outer end of the north pier. Directioiis. — When 1^ (1^) miles off the entrance, head for the light on a course SE. by £. (S. 56° E.) Mrith the piers end on. When close-to, run in between the piers, keeping in mid-channel. Fishermans island is a small island ^ mile off shore, and is sur- rounded by exposed rocks and extensive shoals. A 12-foot shoal extends I mile north, an 11-foot shoal | mile NW., and about the same depth is found f mile to the westward of this island, whUe shoals connect it with the shore. SW. by W., 1^ (1^) miles, are two 18-foot spots. Grand Traverse bay extends south into the mainland 27f (32) miles. A narrow, hilly peninsula extends north from the head of the bay 14| (17) miles, terminating in Old Mission point and dividing this part of the bay into East arm and West arm. Within the east shore of the bay are Torch Light and Elk lakes, and on the west shore are Buttons and Northport bays. Bowers harbor is on the west shore of the peninsula. There are no ofBying shoals, although iu the entrance > l i ito i >i i >T i t -A' ■&i.'>iUxi'-\'7i^'i. 94 LAn MTCfllOAN. to the bay are Reyeral patches with from n to 10 ftithotns over them. The bottom is almost everywhere good for anchorage, the amis afford- ing the dee|)e8t wat«r, and the bay Ih only exposed to north winds; protection from these may be fonnd in the Hmaller bays. Old IflMdoB point has a reef extending north from it nearly 1 ^ (1^) miles, with abont the same breadth. Light— On the NB. end of the point is a fixed white light, 48 f^et above the lake level, and visible 12 (14) miles. It is shown ftvm a square tower on white dwelling. Bowers harbor, on the west side of the peninsola and inside of Tuckers point and Hog ^land, affords good and secure anchorage. Bog ialand. — ^There is a rooky spit eztrading ftvm the soutli iM>int for f mile to the SW. with 11 feet of water on it, and a smaller one NB. from it* northern point. Thia island lies near the course and must not be approached too close. TraTonm olty is at the head of West arm. There is good anchor- age off the town. Thero is no light under Government oontiol, Snttona bay, inside of Suttons point, is at the west entrance ta West arm. It affords good andiorage. Shoals extend ^ mile off its west shore. DonghortT* baibor, north of Buttons bay and inside of New Miaaion point, is a snug little anehorage in northerly winds. Novtbpert bay, between New Mission and Northport points, is the most extensive harbor within Orand Traverse bay. It also afforda good anchorage, but tliere are one or two shoafai to be avoided. At f mile north of Northport point is a rocky spit extending soutti* easterly ^ mile, with 9 feet of water on the outer end. Two dangerous shoals lie between Northport point and NorUiport; a small 8-foot shoal near the middle of Northport bay and a 6-foot shoal, $ mile long north and south, is f mile NE. from it. Brtlowa island.— This small island lies ^ (2}) miles S. by W. from Northport point, in the entrance to Northport bay, and thotA water extends ^ mile north and east from it. South of Bellows island, and extending | mile N. by E. fhnn the northern point of New liission point, i« a rocky shoal with IS feet of water over it. C^eneral direotions. — Grand Traverse bay can everywhere be aafely navigated if a vessel keeps a mile off shore, excepting in rounding Old Mission point, when the lighthouse ahoold be givtti a berth of If (2) miles; it may be approached aomewhat closer if bound down the East arm. Ti%^**V>""* point, the north point of the peninsula Ira^ng the west shoal of Grand Traverse bay, has a rooky spit extending ^ mile to the northward, with 12 fbet water on its oater end. Just within the point are several hills. Ught— On the NW. extremity of Lighthouse point is a fl^ced white oms over them, the amis afford- to north winds f I. >in it nearly 1 ^ te liffht, 48 fi^et I shown from a k and inside ot anchorage, the south i>oint d a smaller one ouTse and most s good anchor- St entrance te d i mile off its >f New Mission t points, is the [t also affords roided. tending seatA- 'wo dangeroas all 8-foot shoal lile long north S. by W. fh)m 1 BhoaA water y E. ftom the ^ithlSfioetof horebeeafely rounding Old lerth of If (2) own the East ning the west i mile to the hin the point a fl^ed white OOOD HARBOR BAY — ^FRANKFORT. 9i light 40 feet above the lake level and visible 1 If (13)) miles. The light is shown ttoin a square tower on yellow dwelling. Cathead point is 'J{ Of) milcH SW. of Lighthouso point; the bight betwe<^n is shortl. NE. of 0;ithead point f mile is n l«-foot slioal. Coaat.— From « thead point the coast trends 12J (14,'„) miles 8W. l^ 8. to Carp River imut. Within the point is Carp lake. North of C5ftrp River point the shore is bluff and wooded, with shoals extending ^ mile from shore. At 3) (4) miles NB. J N. from the dock at Carp River landing and 1-^ (Ig) miles tiom shore are several rocky patches with 12 to 16 feet over them. Gtood Huber bay, between Garp River and Pyramid points, is exposetl to northerly and northwesterly and protected from other winds. The western half of the bay has deq» water over sand, the eastern half is shoal, and there are several rocky spots with 7, 8, and 10 feet over them. North Unity is in the BW. part of the bay. North of Pyramid point about a mile are two IS-fbot detached shoals. Coast — Between Pyramid and Sleeping Bear ixtints is another bay open to the north and northwestward. Glen Arbor is at the head of this bay. From the shore north of Glen Arbor a rocky shoal extends out f mile. The south shore of this bay is hilly and steop-to. Within the bay is Bear lake. Maniton tehmds and light See i>age 68. Coast— From Sleeping Bear point the coast trends south 9} (11) miles, and is bold with high bluffs. It then becomes lower and curves around to the westward to Platte River point, off which an extensive reef 1 (IJ) mile wide extends north 1^ (1 J) miles, with 13 and 16 (teet on its outer end. From Platte River point the coast again becomes bold, with hills near 1%e shore, and trends 4f (5)) miles WSW. to Betsie point. At 2^ (2J) miles south of Sleeping Bear point is Sleep- Ingbear, a hill dhrectly on the shwe, and 4f (6J) miles farther t onth are the Empire bhifb. Betsle point is a rounding point with a prominent hill just withtn it. South of the hill is Oiystal lake. Light— On Betide point is a flashing white light every ten seconds. The light is 63 feet above the lake level, visible 12t^ (14f ) miles, and shown from a cylindrical tower connected to west end of dwelling by a covered way, both yellow, with red roofls. The ibg^signal house is about 17B fieet NB. by N. from the tower. Fog signal- A 10-inch steam whistle sounds blasts of five seconds, with alternate silent intervals often and forty seconds. Life'saviag statton, | mile south of the light tower. Frankfort, on lake Betsie, is df (4^) miles south of Betsie point There is a hill 323 feet high just north of Frankfort and another 265 feet high south of it. A short channel connects lakes Michigan and Betsie, and Idlie entrance is protected by piers. 96 LAKE MICHIGAN. The width between the piers is 200 feet. In Jane, 1895, there was a navigable depth of 13 feet between the piers. The depth in the inner lake is 20 feet. A line of steamers ferries freight cars across from here to Kewaunee, a distance of 55 (63^) miles. Pierhead light, a fixed red light, visible 7^ (8^) miles, is shown from a square, white tower en the outer end of the south pier. Fog belL — ^A bell in a tower on the south pier, 8 feet in the rear of the light tower, is struck by machinery, a single and a double blow alternately, at intervals of twenty seconds. ShoaL — A dangerous shoal is reported a short distance outside of the piers at this harbor, and directly in the track of vessels coming in. Its exact location is uncertain. Life-saving station. — There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the south pier. Directions. -When 1^ (1^) miles west of the entrance, head for the light and run in between the piers, keeping close to the south pier until well inside, when keep in mid-channel. Coast. — From Frankfort the coast takes a southerly direction for 16^ (19) miles to Portage lake. All along this stretch of coast are high hills, the highest, 400 feet, being about midway between Herring lake, (4^ (4f ) miles south of Frankfort), and North Bar lake. There are no outlying shoals and the coast is every whe<*e safe to approach to ^ mile. Portage lake. — This harbor was originally designed for a harbor of refuge, being favorably situated for such purpose. Portage lake, into which the entrance between the piers leads, measures 3 (3^) miles by one mile, and is close to the east coast of lake Michigan. The width at the entrance is 370 feet. In June, 1895, there'was a narrow channel with 6} feet of water. The depth in Portage lake is ample for any vessel. Pierhead range. — The front light is fixed red, and is shown from a post on the outer end of the north pier at a height of 23 feet. The rear light is fixed red, visible 11^ (13) miles. It is shown from a square, white tower 40 feet above the lake level. Directions. — When 1^ (1^) miles off the entrance, head in on the range. When near the piers, stand in between them, keeping in mid- chacnel. Coast. — Between Portage lake and Manistee, 7^ (8^) miles to the SW., the coast has the same general appearance, but the hills are not so high. Bush lake is 3 (3^) miles north of Manistee. Manistee is on Manistee lake and river, at their lower junction, about 8,000 feet from the shore of lake Michigan. The Manistee river, a swift, narrow stream, flows through lake Manistee into lake Michigan. There are several smaU towns on the southern shores of Manistee lake. The entrance to the harbor is formed by two piers 185 feet apart. In November, 1895, the depth at entrance was 13^ feet and 11 feet in the river. The depth in Manistee lake is ample for all vessels. MANISTEE LUDINGTON. 97 1896, there was a spth in the inner jre to Kewaunee, I miles, is shown nth pier. let in the rear of d a double blow itance outside of essels coming in. 1 near the inner nee, head for the i south pier until ply direction for of coast are high en Herring lake, e. There are no proach to ^ mile. I for a harbor of trtage lake, into 3 (3i) miles by . The width at t of water. The 3 shown from a i feet. i is shown from lead in on the i:eeping in mid- i^) miles to the le hills are not junction, about le river, a swift, chigan. There itee lake. feet apart. and 11 feet in ressels. Range lights. — The front light is Axed red, 23^ feet aboye the level of the lake. It is showi: from a lantern in the outer end of elevated conduit near the outer end of the north pier. The rear light, iixed white, variem a post, and is 25 feet above the lake level. Pierhead range. — ^The flront light is fixed red and shown from a post on the outer end of the south pier and 25 feet above the lake level. The rear light, 106 feet distant, is a fixed red light, visible T^ (8^) miles. It is shown at a height of 36 feet above the lake level from a square, white tower. Fog signal — A lOinch steam whistle gives blasts of three seconds; 1944— No. 108 7 98 LAKE MICHIGAN. silent intervals of seventeen seconds. The fog-signal building imme- diately in rear of tower is brown. Life-saving station. — There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the north pier. Directions. — When 1-^ (1^) miles off the entrance, head in on the range and in between the piers. Coast. — ^From Ludington to Pentwater, 10^^ (12) miles to the south- ward, the hills become more numerous and higher, ranging from 157 to 248 feet. Bass lake, with a small outlet into lake Michigan, is 3 (3^) miles north of Pentwater and close to the shore. Pentwater is on the north shore of Pentwater lake, one of the smaller of these interior lakes. The entrance to lake Pentwater is formed by two piers 15U feet apart, extending into lake Michigan. The channel between the piers aver- ages a depth of 9 feet. Lake Pentwater is 25 feet deep. A bar extending from the lighthouse on the south pier in a NW. direction frequently forms during a gale. Pierhead range. — ^The front light is fixed red and is shown 25 feet above the lake level from a post. It is on the outer end of the south pier. The rear light, fixed red, is visible 7^ (8^) miles. It is shown from a square, white tower, and is 33 feet above the lake level. Life-savii^ statioa — ^There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the north pier. Tngs. — ^There is one tug owned by the Sands & Maxwell Lumber Gompauy, the charges being reasonable. Directions. — When 1^\ (t^) miles off the entrance, head in on the range, keeping to the NW. side of the entrance and closer to the north pier until within the entrance, when keep in mid channel. Little Point Sable, 8§ (10) miles SW. of Pentwater, is, from its rounding appearance and interior hills and lake (Little Sable), some- what similar to Big Point Sable. The hills are not so high ; the highest, 160 and 173 feet, are south uf the lighthouse. Light. — A fixed white light, varied by a white flash every thirty seconds, visible 16^ (18^) miles, is shown firom a conical tower con- nected with a dwelling, both of red brick| on Little Point Sable. Coast — South of Little Point Sable the hills become higher, with numerous bluffs. Benona, on Stoney lake, is 5^ (6|) miles SE. of the light and Clay banks, a prominent bluff, 246 feet high, 3^V (H) miles farther on. The entrance to White lake is 7-^- (9) miles to the south- ward of the Cla> banks. There are no shoals more than | mile from the shore, excepting a small spit 4| (5^) miles north of White Biver light, whi'jh extends out nearly i mile, with 14 feet water over it. 'White river. — White river flows through White lake, a large body of water near the coast, into lake Michigan. Near the upper end of White lake, about 4^ (5) miles from the eu trance, there are two towns, Whitehall on the south and Montague on the north shore. The harbor entrance is formed by two piers, with a width between of WHITE RIVER — ^MUSKEGON. 99 1 boilding irnme- 1 near the inner head iu on the les to the sontli- ginjr from 157 to ichigan, is 3 (3^) ake, one of the 's 150 feet apart, the piers aver- P. pier in a NW. is shown 25 feet )f tlie south pier. t is shown f):oin irel. 1 near the inner iazwell Lumber head in on the tser to the north lel. ;er, is, from its e Sable), sorae- fh; the highest, 1 every thirty ical tower cou- nt Sable, me higher, with iles SE. of the ih'eiH) miles ia to the south- tan I mile from >f White Biver er over it. e, a lurge body e upper end of are two towns, re. dtb between of I 190 feet. The sand is constantly shifting, and the entrance is liable tc be barred by heavy gales. January, 1896 : A depth entering along- side of south pier 10 feet, shoaling to 8 feet a short distance inside, and from 25 to 60 feet in White lake. light. — A fixed white light, varied by a red flash every forty seconds, visible 12^ (14) miles, is shown 57 feet above the lake level from an octagonal tower on the NW. corner of a dwelling, both yellow, on thQ south side of the entrance to White river. Pierhead light — A fixed red light, visible 7^ (8^) miles, is shown ftom a square white tower on the outer end of the south pier. Life-Baling statioa — ^There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the north pier. White Lake shoals.— There is a 5-foot shoal | mile east of the entrance, and one mile east of that another, none, however, on the north shore extending over ^ mile from shore. The south shore can be approached to | mile for 2^ (2}) miles, from which point shoals extend $ mile from the shore as far as Whitehall. Directions. — When l-,\ (1^) miles west of the entrance, head in for the Pierhead light with the piers end on. When close to, keep between the piers in mid-channel. After passing the shoal at the entrance, by keeping ^ mile off the north shore, and following its general trend, all shoals will be avoided. Coast— From White river the coast trends SE. by 8. for 9J (11) miles to Muskegon river, and is lined with bluffs and a few hills. Duck lake is 2^ (2^) miles from White river. Mnskegon is on the south shore of Muskegon lake, the largest of the interior lakes along the east coast of lake Michigan. The Mnske- gon river discharges through this lake, the city being 3 (3^) miles from its mouth. This river is sei^nd only to Grand river in drainage area and volume, and its current keeps the harbor open the year round, except when ice is forced upon the shore by strong westerly winds. The entrance to the lake is formed by two piers 300 feet apart, con- verging to 190 feet at the shore line. In July, 1895, the available depth in the channel between the piers was 13 feet. The depth in Mnskegon lake is 30 to 40 feet, with 15 to 20 feet at the head of the landing piers. Mnskegon light — A fixed white light, visible 12^% (14) miles, is shown from a square tower on a white dwelling on the south side of the entrance about 100 yards from the lake. Pierhead range. — ^The front light is fixed red, 24 feet above the lake level, and exhibited from a lantern in the outer end of an elevated conduit. The rear light, 580 feet uistant, is fixed red, visible 7^ (8^) miles. It is shown from a square white tower 36 feet above the lake level. ^hese two lights show the range and direction of the piers. Fog signaL— A bell is struck by machinery, one blow every fifteen seconds. « liiniriiiritfnfiaiiip Mli>HUlMaiMil>IW*rt»M1fflllMIHIHl1l 100 LAKE MICHIGAN. Ziak* Seaeoil light — On the north side of the inner entrance to the lake in line with the pierhead lights and 100 feet from tlie east extremity of the boom piling, from a post, is shown a fixed red light 25 feet above the lake level. ZiifiHMVlBg Btation. — ^There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the north pier. Bhofils.*^In Mnskegon lake shoal water extends f mile from the Booth shore. Booms have been built to control the flow of sand. Bimk Point HhoaL — In the middle of the north shore a shoal extends southward f mile, with 6 feet of water near the buoy on the enter end. It extends NB. and ISW. from the bnoy. Bnoy.— A black can buoy in 12 feet of water marks the extreme Boathefft point of this shoal and also the turning point of the lake. There is no passage to the northward. DireetionB. — When 1^ (IJ) miles of the entrance, head in on the range with the piers, end on at first, keeping to the south side of the bar until the piers are approached, when run in between them in mid- channel. On leaving the channel, head east (nothing to the northward) passing southward of the buoy. From here head lilE. ) N. (N. 39° E.) until abteast of the docks. Cantion.- -Oare is necessary in entering, especially in NW. gales. Several schooners have been sunk or severely injured by colliding with the piers. Coast. — From Mnskegon lights the coast trends 4^ (4f ) miles SBE. 4 E. to the entrance to Black lake, and has all along high hills close to the shore. At Black lake it becomes lower, but continues in the same direction 7 (8) miles to Grand Haven, when it again becomes hilly. GfttUd Haven, lying near the mouth of Grand river on its south bank, is the principal harbor of refuge on the east coast, and, with this object in view, was designed with an ent>ranc4 width of 400 feet and a depth of 18 feet. Two piers have been built. Grand river is the largest stream on this coast. Thete are large sand dunes on the north side of the entrance tcom which quantities of sand are blown into the river, and, being carried by the current, maintain a bar opposite the middle of the entrance and outside the piers. Vegetation is being cultivated on theM dunes to prevent this, and catch-sand fences are also used, but only furnish temporary relief. On Kovember 22, 1895, the least depth in southern crossing of the ontetbar was 19 fteet; shoalest depth on bar being 13J feet; channel depth between piers near entrance, 15^ feet; farther inside, 20 feet or more, to the Grand Haven landing. Shoid.— There is a rock and sand shoal inside of the harbor, about ^ mile firom the pierhead. Which has a least depth of 6 feet. #ruid fintren Ugfat— A fixed white light, varied by a white flash GRAND HAVEN HOLLAND. 101 r entrance to the le east extremity ;bt 25 feet above near the inner \ mile from the (T of sand. ) a shoal extendH n the onter end. ^s the extreme int of the lake. head in on the mth side of the 3n them in mid< lihward) passing [J. 390 E.) nntil in NW. gales. Y colliding with (4f ) miles SBB. iiigh hills close mtinnes in the 1 becomes hilly. )r on its sonth i, and, with this 400 feet and a id river is the entrance from , being carried le entrance and theae dnnes to It only famish crossing of the \ feet; channel tide, 20 feet or harbor, about } b. ^ a white flash every minute, visible 13A (16) miles, is shown 70 feet above lake level from a conical white tower on the blutt" at the south side of the mouth of the river. Pierhead light— At 75 ffeet from outer end of the south pier is a fixed wUte light, visible llVo (13) miles. It is 37 feet above the hike level, and shown from a square, white, pyramidal tower, upper part inclosesd. Elevated walk along pier to the shore. Fog signaL— A steam siren on the south pior in the rear of the light- house sounds blasts of five seconds' duration, with silent intervals of thirty-five seconds. liifO'saving statloa— Thc-^e is a life-saving station near the inner end of the north pier. Wharfage.— Freight is cliarged wharfage here. Cantioa— The greatest depth of water was, at the last notice, on the southern crossing of the bar, but this and the depth may change in a sliort time during a gale, so great care is necessary in entering at such times. Currents.— During the spring months the currents in the river run from 3 to 4 miles an hour. During the summer months the eoirents are light. Directions.— When l^^ (IJ) miles off the entrance, head in on the range with the south pier end on. When close-to, head between the piers, closer to the south side of the entrance unta inside, when keep mid-channel. Coast- From Grand Haven the coast trends almost south 17 (19i) miles to the Holland lights. Hills are scattered all along this stretch. Pigeon hike, with an outlet into hike Michigan, is about balfWay between. Holland.— Holland (or Black) lake is a large body of water near the eastern shore of lake Michigan, with which it is connected, the town of Holland being at its head some 4J (5) miles from the entrance. The entrance channel is beuween piers, 216 feet apart at the entrane«, diminishing to 155 feet inside. In winter the depth is usually reduced to 7 feet. The depth in Black lake is 24 to 40 feet. Pierhead rang*.— A fixed red light is shown from a post on the outer end of the south pier. It is 26 feet above the lake level. The rear light is also red, visible 8^ (Of) miles, and 32 feet above the lake level. It is shown from a square, white tower. The lights are 102 feet apart and form a range for entering the harbor. I4f«*8airing ttation.— There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the south pier. Diwcttona.— When l^ (IJ) miles off the entrance, head in on the range. When the piers are close-to, stand in between them, keeping in mid-channel. If not acquainted with the waters of Black lake, it is best to anchor 102 LAKE MICHIGAN. and get a pilot. A system of ranges is used which is said to be easily understood. Cnrrents. — There are no currents save those due to fluctuations in the lake level. Kalamaxoo River entrance is 7 (8) miles south of the Holland lights. The coast is hilly all along, and can be approached with safety to f mile. There is a detached 18-foot shoal halfway between, about I mile off shore. Saugatuck and Douglas are on opposite banks of Kalamazoo river 2^ (34) miles from the mouth, Saugatuck being on the north bank. The stream is one of some capacity, draining 1,700 square miles and haying a natural depth of 6 to 8 feet. Below Saugatuck is a deep bend in the river, and bordering this is a large expanse of sand extending to the lake shore. Were the driit of sand from this vicinity into the river controlled there would be no difficulty in maintaining a channel of 10 or 12 feet depth. In June, 1895, 6^ feet could with difficulty be carried in. Thence to above the bend in the river are numerous bars. Kalamazoo light— A fixed white light, visible 12^ (14f ) miles, is shown 53 feet above the lake level from a square tower on a white dwelling on the north side of the mouth of the river. Pierhead light. — ^A fixed red light is shown at the outer end of an elevated conduit at the outer end of the south pier. Directions. — When 1^ (1^) miles west of Kalamazoo light, head for the light and run in between the piers, keeping in mid-channel. Kone but small vessels can enter this harbor. Coast. — From Kalamazoo river the coast trends 15^ (18) miles southerly to South Haven. It is regular and lined with bluffs, being highest in the neighborhood of Saugatuck. South Haven is at the mouth of Black river, a narrow stream. The harbor is formed by two piers projecting into the lake from the mouth of the river, the width between the piers being 177 feet. The main obstruction is the bar outside the piers. Yearly dredging is necessary in the river. In July, 1895, there was an available depth of 10 feet. Pierhead light— A fixed red light, 32 feet above the lake level and visible 8^ (9|) miles, is shown from a square, white tower near the outer end of the south pier. Signal-Service station. — ^There is a Signal-Service station on the lighthouse reservation. Life-saving station. — ^There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the north pier. Directions. — When 1^ (1^) miles west of the lig^'t, i» 3ul for it. As it is approached, open it a little on the starboara how and mn in between the piers, keeping in mid-channel. Caution. — Keep the piers end on, as there is shoal water on either side of the entrance. aid to be easily fluctuations in )f the Holland bed with safety between, about 'alamazoo river north bank, nare miles and dering this is a )re the driit of ■e would be no h. in. Thence to (14f ) miles, is vet on a white uter end of an zoo light, head n mid-channel. 15§ (18) miles th bluffs, being ow stream. ) lake from the L77 feet ) lake level and tower near the station on the near the inner L» 3kl for it. As ow and run in rater on either ST. JOSEPH — MICHIGAN CITY. 108 Coast— From South Haven the coast trends about 19J (22J) miles SSW. to St. Joseph. It consists of low bluffs and some few hills. There are no offlyiug dangers. St. Joseph is an important harbor on the south bank of the St. Joseph river. Benton harbor, on a canal, is If (2) miles NE. A small stream. Paw Paw river, empties into this canal near its junction with the St. Joseph river f mile from the lake. Two piers have been built out from the river's month, the width between the piers being 263 feet. The shoaling outside the harbor has at times threatened to close it. The Benton Harbor canal is 90 to 100 feet wide. A wing dam has been constructed at the mouth of the Paw Paw river as a protection against the sand. In January, 1896, the available depth in St. Joseph harbor and in Benton Harbor canal was 12 feet. St Joseph light — A fixed whit« light varied by a white iiash every forty-five seconds, visible 15^- (ISJ) miles, is shown 101 feot above the lake level from a square tower on a white dwelling on a bluff" in the city SE. of the entrance. Pierhead range. — The front light near the outer end of the north pier is fixed red and 24 feet above the lake level. The rear light, 300 feet distant, is also fixed red, visible 8J (9f ) miles, and 50 feet above the lake level. The front light it shown from a lantern in an inclosed end of an elevated conduit; the rear one from a square white tower. These lights show the direction of the outer end of the north pier and, in range, the course for entering the harbor. Pog signal. — ^A bell struck by machinery every thirty seconds. Signal-Senrioe station.— There is a Signal-Service station 400 yards north of the lighthouse in the town. Life-saving station. — There is a life-saving station near the inner end of the north pier. Buoy. — ^A red spar buoy is moored in 20 feet of water and marks the northwestern point of the shoal on south side of entrance to harbor. Directions.- When 1 ^ (IJ) miles off the entrance, head in on the range with the piers, end on; as the piers are approached open out the north pier on the port bow. Coast— From St. Joseph the coast trends 13§ (15f ) miles SSW., the first portion of this stretch being low bluffs and the latter part hilly. At the above distance from St. Joseph and^i mile inshore is Bald Tom, 320 feet high; it terminates this range of hills. Here the coast line trends a little more westward and runs about SW. for 17| (20J) miles to Michigan Oity. As Michigan City is approached the coast again becomes hilly. The boundary line between Michigan and Indiana comes in to the lake 4^ (5) miles NE. of Michigan Oity. -KUfm rnm ni Sismi * miSm-i^ss^i^^ lOi LAKE MICHIOAN. INDIANA. BAiohigan City i» at the SE. end of lake Michigan. Trail creek, a small stream, winds throngh the city, emptying into the lake. The inner harbor is formed by two piers 100 feet apart at the shore line (the month of the creek) and 250 feet apart at the outer end of the eastern pier, 800 feet from shore. The western pier extends to the line of the old breakwater and 600 feet farther out than the eastern pier. The depth is from 11 to 14 feet. The east pier had an original length of 1,500 feet, bat the outer 700 feet have been destroyed by the waves. A lookout for the wrecked portion should be kept when approaching the harbor. The outer harbor is formed by a 1,200-foot pier projecting from a point on the shore 1,400 feet east of the entrance and a breakwater 1,400 feet long extending west ft-om the end of the east pier. These, with the prolonged pier on the west side, inclose an area of 40 acres. This harbor will be of no nse nntil dredged. An outer breakwater is under construction. The width of the entrance between the outer breakwater and the northern extension of the old breakwater is 400 feet, and the width of the entrance between the west pier and the old breakwater is 216 feet. Lights.— Michigan City light, a flxed white light, visible 12V\r (14^) miles, is shown 52 feet above lake level from a square tower on a yel- low dwelling, both with red roofs, on the east side of the entrance. Four lanterns on jMsts are maintained by the United States Engin- eers, as follows: A flxed red light on the breakwater pier, 64 feet from the outer end and 36 feet above the lake level. A flxed white light on the breakwater pier, 376 feet from the outer end and 42 feet above the lake level. These lights on range show the direction of the breakwater and the course for entering. « A flxed white light on the west pier, outer end, and 36 feet above the lake level. A flxed red light on the outer breakwater, east end, and 16^ fSeet above the lake level. Ziife-Miviiig station.— There is a life-saving station aboat 40 feet north of the lighthouse. Direetioiis.— When 1-^^ (1^) miles oif the entrance bring the lights on range and stand in, keeping the breakwater pier a little open on the port bow. Corrants. — A strong westerly current sets past the entrance to the harbor; the breakwater pier was built as a protection against it. Coast — ^From Michigan City the south shore of the lake curves to the westward to Calumet, South Chicago. The first half of this stretch is hilly; it then becomes low and marshy. The boundary between Indiana and Illinois is 1^ (If) miles SE. of Calumet. •■^aar ■ffssfijiyj^'^t- BHOAL. 106 Trail creek, a I lake. rt at the slifwe uter end of the tnds to the Hue e eastern pier, original lengtli [ by the waves, in approaching ejecting Arom a [ a breakwater t pier. These, rea of 40 acres. water and the id the width of bter is 216 feet iible 12W {i^) ower on a yeL ) entrance. States Engin- the outer end from the outer Lwater and the > feet above the i, and 16^ iSeet aboat 40 feet ring the lights >tle open on the Qtrance to the rainst it. lake carves to )t half of this The boundary imet. ShoaL — A bar of sand and gravel with 5 fathoms and less extends northeastward into the lake for some distance. The center of this bar is about 6 (7) miles SB. of Calumet. The least water is ' "< feet and is found in two detached patches IJ (If) miles olfsliore. N. .tral causes probably form this bar, and as there is apt to be less water over it than shown on the charts, navigators are cautioned accordingly. The west shore of the lake to Calumet has been described in a pre- vious part of this chapter. Qreen b&y will now be described. CHAPTER VI. ^ OBEEX BAT, Oreen bay opens into the northwestern part of lake Michigan, and has a greatest length of 102 (117^) miles in a 8W. ^ S. and NB. ^ N. direction from the head of Big Bay de Noquette to the entrance of Fox river. Its greatest breadth, 21 (24) miles, is abreast of Bock Island passage in a NW. J W. and SB. ^ B. direction. Its entrance, between Detour point and the point of the peninsula, in Portes des Morts, is 25 (283) miles wide. In the entrance are numerous islands which divide it into several passages, the principal of which are Pov«,fty Island and Bock Island passages on the north and Detroit lalaad passage and Portes des Morts on the south. These passages and the islands have been described in the previous chapter. HiomaAiT. Coast — Detour point, the north entrance point of Oreen bay, is the narrow termination of the peninsula bounding Big Bay de Foquette on the east The point has shoals extonviing from it f mile, and the shore of the peninsula to the westward U the point is connected by shoals to Little and Big Summer islands. From Detour point the coast trends 4$ (6^) miles NW. to the head of Sag bay, and from Sag bay it trends north in a bluff point, called Burnt bluff. Big Bay de Noqnette.— A peninsula extending south from the main divides the north end of Green bay into Big Bay de Noqnette and Little Bay de Noquette. The entrance to the Big bay between Burnt bluff and Peninsula point due west is lOy^ (12) miles. Stony and Pop- lar points further divide the head of Big Bay de Noquette; the western head is known as Ogontz bay, and is shoal. East shore.— The east shore, which has several indentations, has, besides Burnt bluff. Middle, Garden, and Jacks bluffs. Vessels navi- gating this portion of the bay should keep close to the westward of a line joining Burnt and Garden bluffis. On this shore are South Biver bay, south of Garden bluff and Garden bay, between Garden bluff and Ansels point. Both these bays are shoal. North shore. — AU the north shore of the bay ia shoal for some dis- tance, and between Stony and Indian points a rooky spit extends south- ward 6§ (6}) miles. This spit separates the deep water in the east head of Big Bay de Noquette from that in Ogontz bay. 106 BOUND IRLAND — CORONA SHOAL. 07 e Michigan, and 8. and NE. i N. , entrance of Fox of Bock Island trance, between des Morts, is 25 i which divide it uty Island and id. passage and lie islands have reen bay, is the >y de iN^oquette f mile, and the B connected by * point the coast from Sag bay oath from the e Noqnette and between Burnt Stony and Pop- to; the western lentations, has, Vessels navi- I westward of a >re South Biver arden blufT and %l for some dis- ) extends south- er in the east Wast ahore.— The west shore of the bay is shoal; off St. Vital point is St. Vital island. This island is small and surrounded by shoals, which connect it with the west shore in all directions and extend eastward ^ mile, narrowing the deep-water channel in Ogontz bay. Ronnd ialand, small and triangular, is 2% (3) miles oil' the west shore of the bay and about midway between St. Vital and Ohippewa points. The island is surrounded by shoals which extend north in detached patehes 1} (If) miles. Midway between Bound Island and the main is another shoal. Paninaula point is the narrower termination of the peninsula sep- arating Big and Little Noquette bays. The whole point is surrounded by shoals, wliieh extend south from the point l-^r (1^) miles. This shoal is rocky, is known as Peninsula Point shoal, and has only 2 feet of water over it f mile south of the lighthouse. Bnoy. — A red spar buoy is moored in 18 feet water, and marks the south end of Peninsula Point shoal. The passage between this buoy and Eleven-foot shoal should not be attempted. Light — On Peninsula point from a square tower at southern end of dwelling, both yellow with red roofs, is shown a flashing white light every thirty seconds. • The light is 41 feet above the lake level, and visible 11} (13^) miles. Blavan-foot ahoal lies 2 (2^) miles S. by W. $ W. of Point Penin- snla light. It is a detoched shoal, least water feet, with deeper water all around, but vessels should not pass to the north of the buoy, and it is safest to pass south of Eleven-foot Shoal lightvessel before stand' ing up Little Bay de Noquette. There is a small spit with 14 feet over it ^ mile eastward of the Eleven-foot shoal. Buoy. — ^A red nun bnoy is moored in 18 feet water on the sonth side of Eleven foot shoal. A line connecting the lightvessel and Peninsula Point light passes over the buoy. Blavan-foot Shoal lightveBsal is moored in about 60 feet of water to the southward and westward of Oorona and Eleven-foot shoals. The lightvessel is schooner rigged, and has two masts, but no bowsprit; the hull is painted black, with Eleven-foot Shoal in large white let- ters on each side and No. 60 on the bows. A fixed white light is shown from the foremasthead, 40 feet above the bay level, and visible 11} (13^) miles. Fog aignaL — A 6-inch steam whistle sounds blasts of five seconds, with silent intervals of ten seconds. If the whistle be disabled a bell will be rung by hand. Corona ahoal is 2| (3) miles S. ^ E. from Peninsula Point light. The shoal has its greatest extent, 275 yards, in a NNE. and SSW. direction. The least water, 11 feet, is about 100 yards NE. of the buoy. Bnoy. — ^A red and black horizontal striped spar buoy is moored in 18 feet, and marks the southern point of Oorona shoaL 106 uKEEN BAT. Driaoo ahoal is 0^ (7^) miles 8. | B. fh>in PeniiiHiila Point light. It is nearly ^ mile in extent Nli). and SW., and haa n loHHt depth of 10 feet. From it« outlying jiosition, and being nearly in the track of vesHols, the shoal is very dangerous in thick weather, as the soundings in the vicinity can not be depend«aoli. is moored in 21 ) Hhoal. 8 coinimratively irtli of tbis, and tore and almost r and Saanders bbere is a goouoy is moored )re making out arks the nortb- Noqaette, and s. miles, is shown ihed to a white ad point. ID Town, fiboftla dian Town 1^^ ledar river the >ting at 4 (o E.), or to the southward of this bearing. Sturgeon bay is of importance as having at its head the canal lead- ing into lake Michigan. This bay runs SSB. and affords good anchor- age, and is the re^ harbor of refuge to which the artifloial lutfbor and canal (on the west shore of lake Michigan) give access. The town of Sturg'on Bay is on the east shore near the head of the bay about 4^ (6) miles from the mouth aad 3^ (4) miles from the Sfl. entrance of the canaL A high hill, called Stevens hill, rises back of the town. At least 18 feet of water will be found in the center of the bay. Stnrgaon Bay Oanal UghtB are under the control of tho United States Lightlioase Board, and wre as follows: "^■' '■"..# STURGEON BAY. 113 whig bearings; I, distaut 1,580 ibered red spar entering. n Bay city and 8. !iOng Tail Point ring Long Tail ^ble Point buoy I for the outer proached, paJM I, which eourae deep water at i passed; then nth of the Fox mme. 3 eastern shore len Bed banks stance ^ mile, . of Bed banks the east shore lorthward and is a small dr- of the bight a reral detached »nd Mid Slier- Sturgeon bay, niles, and not ight bears SE. ;h« canal lead* t good anohor- al harbor and le head of the from the SJB. I. At least IS of tho United Northwest entrance, No. 2, light— A tixed white lantern light, 11 feet above the bay level, on top of a square, pyramidal, nnpainted wooden structure, the upper part inclosed, ou the southwesterly side of the entrance to the canal from Sturgeon bay. Northwest entrance to cut, No. 3, light— A fixed white lantern light, 11 feet above the bay level, on top of a square, nnpainted wooden skeleton structure, the upper part inclosed, on the south- westerly side of the entrance to the cut in Sturgeon bay leading to the canal, and 4,50U feet northwesterly from light No. 2. Southeast entrance, No. 1, light — A fixed white lantern light, 15 feet above lake level, on top of a square, pyramidal, inclosed wooden structure, painted red, on the northeasterly side of the entrance to the canal from the harbor of refuge, Lake Michigan, and 6,()54 feet south- easterly from light No. 2. Sherwood Point light— A fixed white light, varied by a red flash every minute, visible 13^ (15J) miles, is shown 61 feet above the bay level from a square tower attached to the north end of the dwelling, both of red brick. Fog signal — A bell on Sherwood point is struck by machinery a single blow every twelve seconds. Dnnlap Reef range.— The front light is fixed white, and is shown from a red tower attached to a white house with a red roof. It is visi- ble 9^ (lOf ) miles and is 18 feet above the bay level. The rear light, also fixed white, is shown from a square tower on a white dwelling, both with red roofs. It is visible 11^ (13^) miles and is 30 feet above the bay level. The lights are on Dunlap reef, and are 680 feet apart on a range SSE. i B. (8. 28° E.). They guide through a narrow channel abreast of Hills point. Shoals. — ^There are numerous shoals in this bay, but they are marked by buoys and lights. Quarry Point shoal is off the entrance to Sawyers harbor (south of Sherwood point); there is but 6 feet of water over it. Buoy. — ^A red spar buoy marks the east side. Hills Point shoal. — Shoal water here extends nearly across the bay A*om the east shore, leaving a narrow channel between it and Hills point, and is marked by the following buoys: . Hills point (outside), a black spar buoy (No. 1) in 15 feet of water, marks the western edge of the above shoal. Hills point, a black nuu buoy (No. 3) in 14 feet of water, marks the western edge of the same shoal. Hills point (inside), a black spar buoy (No. 6) in 14 feet of water, marks the SW. point of the same shoal. Dnnlap Reef or Biliddle Qronnd shoaL— This shoal lies in mid- chanuel NW. of the town and west of Stevens hill, Dunlap Beet lights are ou this middle ground. 1944— No. 108 8 114 OREEN BAT. BnoyB.— Middle ground, (NW. end), a, rod and black horizontally striped spar buoy, marks the NW. end of the shoal. West channel, No. 1, a black spar buoy in 12 feet of water, marks the west point of the middle ground, and is a guide through the West channel. East channel, No. 2, a red spar buoy ;u 18 feet of water, marks the NE. edge of tiie middle ground, and is « guide throDgh the Bast ^-.hanuel. Middle ground (SE. end), a red and black horizontally striped buoy, marks the SE. point of the middle ground. Directions. — A vessel can stand toward the bay with Sherwood Point light ahead bearing anywhere betw^een 8. by W. (8. 11° W.) and SE. ^ 8. (8. 39° E.). When about a mile from the light, steer so as to round the point at about 4 mile ott", and then south, passing close east of Qtiariy Point buoy. Bring the Dunlap Reef lights in range, and stand on past the black buoys off Hills poiut (these mark the east side of the channel). When nearly up to the Middle Ground buoy (NW. end), open the lights, and pass to the eastward of them through the drawbridge; then keep nearly in mid-channel until the entrance to the canal is reache<1. There is good wat«r in the channel to the westward of Dunlap reef, but the turn around the southern end is too sharp for vessels bound through the canal. Caution. — Vessels firom the canal must remember that the channel through the bay is bnoyed in from Green bay; therefore, when passing out through Sturgeon bay to Green bay, the red buoys should be left to port and the black buoys to starboard. Monument point is 6% (7§; miles NNE. of Sturgeon bay, and Egg harbor is 3 J {^) miles beyond. Monument point is shoal NE. and 8 W. for nearly J mile, and there are several oflQying shoals along this stretch of coast. Monument shoal, with a least depth of 8 feet, lies 1^ (If) miles SE. of Monument point. The shoal is about 600 yards long ENB. and WSW. There are 7-foot shoals closer to shore, 8. aud NNE. of Monument shoal. Buoy.— A black spar buoy is moored to mark the roost westerly point of Monument shoal. Caution.— Between Sturgeon bay and Egg harbor keep at least 1} (If) miles offshore west of Monument Shoal buoy, and do not head in for Egg harbor until 3 (3^) miles beyond the buoy. Egg harbor, 10^ (12) miles NE. of Sturgeon bay, is j^ mile wide by f mile deep. It is a good harbor except in N. and NW. gales. Hat island.- The coast between Egg and Eagle harbors is steep-to, except Fish Creek bay, Which is shoal. Hat island is NNW. of Egg harbor and 2,^ (2S) miles off shore. Shoals extend ^ mile E. and SE. from it. Detached shoaL— A detached shoal 4 mile square lies one mile 88W. of Hat islaii4. « EAOLE BLUFF — EAQLB HARBOR. 115 lack horizontally of water, marks trough the WcHt irater, marks the he East ^-.haiiMel. illy striped buoy, with Sherwood (8. no W.) and ht, steer so as to nssing close cast ts in range, and »rk the east side ^ end), open the rawbridge; then ianal is readied, of Dunlap reef, »r vessels bound hat the channel re, when passing 8 should be left n bay, and Egg al NE. and SW. loals along this i (If) miles BE. long ENE. and i. and KNE. of it westerly point ^eepat least!} do not head in j^ mile wide by bors is steep-to, NNW. of Egg mile E. and SE. B lies one mile Bagle Bluff light — A fixed white light, visible l^ (16^) miles, is shown 76 feet above the bay level from a square towor attached to the NW. corner of a dwelling on the extreme westerly point of Eagle bluff. Both buildings are yellow, with red roofs. Here the coast is dangerous on account of the SE. shoals from Cham- bers island and the Strawberry islands with their shoals. The Strawberry Island group consists of three or four islands, the . aoatheru one being the largest. They are connected by shoals with sevenU. small detached shoals to the south. With the shoalb the g^oup is 2^^- (3) miles north and south and 1 (1^) mile wide. Buoys. — Strawberry channel, SE., a red spar buoy in 13 feet of water, marks the SB. end of this group. Pass close to the buoy. Strawberry channel, NE., a red spar buoy in 24 feet of water, marks the NE. end of the group. Chambers island lies near the center of Green bay. The east and west sides of the island extend nearly north and south, the east side being 34 (3f) and the west side If (2) miles long. A prominent point forms the NE. end. There is a lake back of it. There are 1 wo points at the N W. end, the lighthouse being on the most northern one. A hill rises back of the lightiiouse, with another to the SE. The south side is almost a straight line, trending 2} (2f ) miles SE. by E. 4 E., forming a long, sharp point at the intersection with the east side. The island is wooded, and much of its coast line consists of low bluffs. Chambers Island light — A fixed white light, varied by a white flash every minute, visible 13 ,% (16) miles, is shown 68 feet above the bay level firom an octagonal tower on the NW. corner of a dwelling, both being yellow, on the northern point of the NW. end of the island. Shoals. — ^A reef extends f mile from the north point, and the bay on the north side is full of shoals, extending f mile from shore. Standing along the west side of the island, shoal water extends about } mile from shore. Off the SW. point a narrow spit, with 16 tu 17 feet of water on it>, makes out 1 (1|) mile west. There are no shoals on the south shore more than 4 mile from shore. A spit If (2) miles long, with 8 feet least wataving atatioa— The life-saving station is on the SW. point of the island ^ mile from the lighthouse. Diaplay atation.— The United 8tate8 Weather Bureau has a special display station on the island. Anchoragaa.— Anchorage, clay and sand, is found north of Gull island. The harbor between Thunder Bay and Sugar islands, 13 feet of water, good holding ground, gives protection from all winds. 8W. of Thunder Bay island and south of Sugar island the anohorage is not good, the bottom being rocky. Thunder bay.— Between North and South points the bay is 8| (10) miles wide, and from this line in to the mouth of Thunder Bay river is nearly the same distance. The north shore is safe to approach to f THUNDER HAY — ^ALPRNA. of the island are is a 3-foot patch ' which ig a mile ed water marks 20 feet of water, nd there is good mainland, vessels loy, and when it WSW. (8. 680 irW.(N. now.) ^ mile from the int trends south- re trends to the shoals. In this nller ones. The art of it is OoU 1 on the eastern long NW. and binaes 300 yards the SE. part of visible 13J (16^) ike level from a ig by a covered of eight seconds )n a blast of two he SW. point of an has a special i north of Gall lands, 13 feet of winds. SW. of lohorage is not le bay is 8} (10) ler Bay river is » approach to l»i 1 } mile, excepting sonth of North point, whoro the shonls extend (14) mile SSE., the extreme soutli end being marked by a buoy. Buoy. — A can buoy, p..hitcd red, is moored in IS feet of water 1 (li) mile 8. by E. f E. from North point. It marks the extreme end of the shoal extending soatheasterly from North point. Vessels must pass to the sonthward c*' this buoy. On the western and so hern shores of the bay shonls nnd flats extend some distance from the various points and island.s, but otter no obstacle to safe navigation if vessels keep within 2^ (2^) miles of tlie northt ru shore. GhrasB island, { mile oft' shore, lies on a rocky flat at the head of the bay nearly 1} (2) miles northward of Partridge point. Three-fonrtiis mile and 1 (1^) mile, respectively, 8E. of Grass island are shonl pntclies of 13 and 10 feet, bat they offer no obstacle to navigation if the northern shore of the bay be kept aboard. Partridge point extends from the shore 1 (1^) mile, and is ^ mile broad. South of the point ia a bight 1^ (1^) miles lung und wide, but filled with a flat, which extends out to and surrounds Sulphur island. The flat continues northward tVora Sulphur island f mile, and then curves to the NW., almost Joining the spit extending ^ mile from Par- tridge point On this flat is a 6-foot spot, | mile N. by E. from the north point of Sulphur island. East of this north point 1 (1^) mile is a small 13-foot shoal, which is the NW. point of a narrow detached shoal extending j mile, with 14 feet on the southeastern end. South of this spot J mile is a small 17-foot patch. Between the shoal and Sulphur island is a detached 14f >ot patch. The whole sonth shore of Thunder bay is fllled with a ro<;ky flat extending northward from South point toward Bird and Scare Grow islands nearly 2^ (3) miles. The edge of the flat ^ mile north of Scare Grow island trends W. by N. to the western i^hore of the bay, passing 1^ (If) miles outside of Hard Wood point and 1 (1^) mile outside of Devil river. From South point a rocky spit extends northeastward a mile, and another rocky spit eastward the same distance. Alpena. — Thunder Bay river empties into the head of Thunder bay, and at the mouth of the river is Alpena. Improvements. — The general project calls for a channel 16 feet deep between the 16-foot curve and a point in the river a mile above its mouth, the width varying from 200 feet at the outer end to 75 feet above. Bed rock was found | mile above the mouth of the river, and the improvements were not carried &rthef than this point. The chan- nel has shoaled to 13^ feet. Light — A fixed red light, visible 11^ (13) miles in clear weather, is shown 53 feet above the lake level from a square, brown, pyramidal, open-framework tower, the upper part inclosed. The lighttower is on the north side of the entrance to Thunder Bay river, on a crib 57 feet east of and in a line with Gilchrist wharf. i „4ae*«>ft»*«<^" smm^fmrntm a am m: '-' 122 LAKE IIUKON. Pog sigBaL — A bell Btrnck by inacliiiipry ivery ten Reconds. Signal Station.— Thuru is a 8ignal station two blockH NW. of the HghtlioiiRe. Display station.— The United StatoN Weather Bnrean lias a re^jular display station at Alpena. Directions.— From the northward.— Hound Tlmndcr Bay JHland 8K. point at a distance of ^ mile, then 8W. by W. t, W. (S. 63° W.) H m) mil 8, nntil the bnoy off North iniint bears north, distant J mile, or the extreme enstern \r.nt of Norlh i^int X. by W. ^ W. (N. 17° W.), distant 1^ (IJ) miles, tlicnco NW. by W. I W. (N. 66° W.) 7A m) miles will bring a vessel j mile off Thnniler Buy River light From the southward — When east of Sonth point 4^ (5) miles, a NW. i N. (N. 3»o w.) courhe I3§ (If.^) mlhs will bring a vessel } mile off Thnniler Bay River light. Coast— Between South point and Bl«ck river, iff (5) miles to the Bonthward, the shore shonid not be aiipvonrhod within ij (2) miles. Black RiXM island, a mile Ni*;. of Black river, is snrronnded \dth shoiils which extend J mile east from it, a mile NNE. and north flrom it, and then west to the shore. Black river.- Rocky shoals extend 1 (IJ) mile eastward from this river. From Ulack river the shore continues rocky to Alcona, 3J (4) miles to the southward. Here the coast line bends to the westward, forming a shallow bight between Alcona and Sturgeon point, 3^ (4) miles SSE. of Alcona. A spit extends nearly a mile ENE. from Sturgeon point and on the point is a light. light— A iixed white light, visible 14 (16) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 69 feet above the lake level from a conical white tower, con- nected by a covered way with a dwelling. The lighthouse is on the easternnioeit point between Thunder and Saginaw bays. Life-saving statioa — The station is 75 yards south of the light- house. Coast — At Sturgeon point the coast changes its direction to a little west of south and continues its rocky character. Harrisville is 3^ (4) miles from Sturgeon point, and Spring Mills If (2) miles beyond. Between these places a rocky shoal extends off shore for a mile. Greenbnsh is 3^ (4) miles south of Spring Mills, and from here to An Sable light, a distance of 10 (11^) miles, the shore continues its rocky character. At 6 (7) miles northward of Au Sable river there is a 9-foot spot a mile offshore. Oscoda and An Sable are at the month of the An Sable river. The shipments from the port are principally made from private piers built into the lake entirely outside of the harbor. Light— A fixed red light, visible 8^ (If) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 32 feet above the lake level from a square, brown, pyramidal, OBCODA — TAWA8. 128 I second R. ocks NW. of the eau lias a rr{;ular iiilor Bay iolaod t, W. (S. 630 W.) north, distant i . by W. i W. (N. W. (N. 66° W.) >)\y River light. It 4^ (5) mileH, a g a vessel } mile (6) miles to the i 1$ (2) niiles. siirronnded with I. and north flrom itward from this ;o Alcona, 3^ (4) to tlie westward, eon point, 3^ (4) point and on the clear weather, is irhite tower, con- en Thunder and ith of the light- rection to a little i.rri8ville is 3^ (4) I) miles beyond. Iiore for a mile, from here to An itindes its rocky ' there is a 9-foot An Sable river. )m private piers ulear weather, is 'own, pyramidal, open framework tower, upper part inclosed. There is an elevated walk ft-om the lighthouse to the shore. The tower is on the outer end of the north pier at the mouth of the river. DiapUiy station.-— Tlio United States Weather Bureau has a special display station at Oscoda. Coast — The shore continues its southerly direction from Au Sable ii( (6) miles to Point au Sable. Shoals surround this i>oiiit to a distance of S mile, and it is best to keep at Icjvst 1^% (li) niiles oft" slioie. At Point au Sable the coast bends more to Avestward to Tawjw (Ottawa) iwint, 6f (7J) miles 8W. of Point an Sable. Tawas point has a sand spit extending from it for nearly a mile southwesterly and westerly. The SW. and NW. ends of this spit are marked by buoys. BnojTS. — A nun buoy, iiainted retl, is moored in 33 feet of water 1 (li) miles SW. f W. of Tawas (Ottawa) point. Is is placed on the extreme SW. point of the shoal. Vessels must not pass inside of this buoy. A spar buoy, painted red, is moored in 16 feet of water 1 (IJ) miles N. by E. of Tawas Point buoy and marks the NW. point of the shoal. Light — An intermittent white light with red sector is fixed for twenty-five seconds, followed by an eclipse of five seconds. The light shows red over the flat for 90<3, from bearing NE. to bearing 8E., ami white the remaining 270^. The light is visible in clear weather 14 (16) miles, and is exhibited 70^ fe<>t above the lake level from a conical, white tower connected with a icd dwelling by a covered way. The lighthouse is near the SW. end of Tawas point. Wreck.— A wreck with 2 feet of water over it lies in 11 feet water 950 yards 8E. by E. | E. (S. Qo° E.) of Tawas lighthouse. It is a dangerous obstruction to coasters. LifeHMVing station is 1,100 yards NE. by E. from the lighthouse. Tawaa bay is protected by Tawas point, a narrow peninsula pro- jecting over a mile southwesterly from the mainland. It is 3J (4) miles wide between Tawas point and the sli ore west of the point, and If (2) miles long northwesterly from this line. The avaat trends soath- roached within l ly that distance, ihoals are rather E. of Whitestone 1 of it and a little I to Saginaw bay, ly. It continues ipit. There is 11 feet at the SE. short distance is loy. feet of water 2^ extreme point of ' and tbe shore, itrauce, Point au niles wide. It is k points, but the Oharity island is lly point is filled ?ard of Point aux atcli. From this ead of the bay. og rivers empty iathom curve is 3 i extending east outhof theSagi- of Saginaw bay lie eastern shore point to Little ids and extends es. eastern entrance ay southward of 8A6INAW BAY AND RIVEK. 126 the islands. On the eastern shore are Sebewaing and Pigeon rivers, and the towns of Sebewaing, Bayport, Caseville, Port Crescent, and Port Austin. The northwestern edge of the flat is marked by a buoy. Buoy. — A can buoy, painted blacic, is moored in 17 feet of water, 2^ (2^) miles NW. by W. J W. of Oharity Island lighthouse. It marks the NW. end of the shoal extending from Charity island. Charity Island light — A fixed white light, visible 12^^ (14) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 45 feet above the lake level, from a conical white tower, connected with a dwelling by a covered way. The lighthouse is on the NW. point of Charity island. Approaching Saginaw bay from the southward. — Vessels must p0ss at least 1^ (li^) miles to the northward of Port Austin light; then steer W. ^ S. (S. 84° W.) 22^ (25J) miles, which will lead to the north- ward of Charity Island buoy, being careful on approaching it to keep it well open on the port bow, to avoid the shoal extending 1^ (If) miles northward from Charity Island lighthouse. "Vessels should not pass southward of the island. After passing the buoy, steer SW. by S. (S. 34° W.) for Saginaw river, leaving Gravelly Point buoy on the star- board hand. Saginaw river, with its tributaries, drains a territory of some 5,800 square miles. The nver proper has a length of 19 (22) miles, at which distance from the mouth the Tittabawasnec and Shiawassee unite to tbrm the main stream. The cities of East and West Saginaw are built on the upper end of the river and Bay City near the mouth. The river baa a large volume and at times a strong current. Improvements. — Prior to improvements theentrance was obstructed by an extended bar in Saginaw bay a mile from the shore and ^ mile aerosB between the lOfoot contours, with a minimum depth of feet. On January 1, 1895, the channel across the outer bar had been dredged to a depth of 14 feet and a width of 200 feet from the month of the river to the 14-foot curve. It is not safe for vessels drawing over 13 feet to cross the bar. It is proposed to Airther increase this depth to 16 feet. finoys. — ^The entrance to the channel is marked by two buoys — a black spar buoy, No. 1, in 13 feet, on the east side, and a red nun buoy« No. 2, in 13 feet, on the west side. At 550 yards S. ^ W. from No. 1 is a black spar buoy, No. 3, in 11 feet of water, on the east bank, and oppo- site, on the west bank, in 11 feet of water, is a red spar buoy. No. 4. Beyond these, at intervals of 550 yards, the spar buoys are in pairs, black on the east bank and red on tlie west bank, all in 11 feet of water, the black buoys bearing odd numbers, the red buoys even num- bers. Buoys 9 and 10 maiiE the commencement of deep water inside the bar; buoys 13 and 14 mark the mouth of the river, and are the last on the course 8. ^ W. (8. 6° W.). A short distance beyond this pair the course is changed to 8. by E. ^ £!• (S. 14° E.). ■TFffliirirffffli ■ii>^' 126 LAKE HURON. Range lights.— Two fixed rwl lighta^ viaiblo in clear weather (front-) 7iV (84) and (rear) Hi (13) miles. The fron» Hg^ is shown 37 feet above the lake level and the rear light Gl feet. Tiie front light tower is at the west entrance i>oint to the SNigwaw liver. It is a square, red, pyramidal, opeu-framework tower, upper pai-t inclosed, on a crib. The rear light is 2,330 feet S. ^ W. (8. 6° W.) from the front light, and is shown from a square, yellow tower attached to a dwelling. Dry dock.— At Bay City the dry dock is 310 feet over all, 42.foot gate, and has 13^ depth over sill. 2>i8pla7 station.— The United States Weather Bureau has a special display station at Bay City. Directions for entering.— Bring the lights in range S. ^ W. (S. 6° W.) when 2^ (2^) miles from the front light, and steer in on the range, passing between the spar and nun buoyb at the entrance to the cut These buoys are about If (2) miles from the front light. Keep on the range, following the buoys to i mile from the fi-ont light until Nos. 13 and 14 are about one point abaft the beam, when change course to S. by B. 4 B. (8. 14° B.), and keep in mid-channel until oflf the Bay City dry dock, when haul to the sontii shore, to avoid tlie shoals in mid- chuiiucl opposite the ships at McBwau^s mill, after which there is no obstruction until the Belinda Street bridge is reached. Wreck.— About 800 feet northerly from the nun buoy (red) and 60 feet westward from the center of the channel is a wreck forming a shoal. Several vessels have struck this with their wheels. (January 31, 1895.) Coast.— Between Oak point and Pointe aux Barques, 14 (16) miles to the BNB., the coast has several indentations, but is generally bordered by a rocky flat which extends offshore, in places If (2) miles. Off Port Crescent, at the mouth of the Partridge river, the reef is broken, and a vessel with local knowledge can approach the shore close-to; but off- shore 1^ (If) miles is a narrow detached shoal, least water 5 feet, run* iiing north and south for over a mile. Midway between Flat Bock point and Pointe aux Barques is Port Austin, an open roadstead, with several piers. Pointe aux Barques is surrounded by reefs which extend l^ (IJ) miles NW. Near the NW. end is a lighthouse. Port Austin Reef light— A fixed white and flashing red light— fixed white for one minute, followed by five consecutive red flashes at inter- vals of twelve seconds during the next minute— visible 14j^ (16f ) miles, is exhibited 80 feet above the lake level from a square, white, pyram- idal, open-framework tower, upper part inclosed, with brown fog- signal building on a high crib. The lighthouse is on Port Austin reef, 1^ (IJ) miles fi-om the main- land. There is no passage between the light and the mainland, and vessels should give the light a berth of IJ (If) miles. The light is known as Fort Austin light. 1 f POINTE AUX BARQUES SAND BEACH. 127 xreathor (front') shown 37 feet to the Sugwuw k tower, upper the front light, k dwelling, over all, 42-foot an has a special B 8. i W. (S. 6° in on the range, ance to the out. t. Keep on the ht until No8. 13 iige course to S. flf the Bay City shoals in midr licb there is no loy (red) and 60 forming a shoal, nnary 31, 1895.) U (16) miles to erally bordered eniles. Off Port s broken, and a lose-to; but oS- E»ter 5 feet, run* 'een Flat Bock roadstead, with ixtend lA (IJ) red light— fixed Bashes at inter* 14} (16f ) miles, , white, pyram- th brown fog- from the main* I mainland, and I. The light is Fog s^;naL — A lOinch steam whistle sounds a blast of seven seconds, followed by a silent interval of eighty seconds. Display Station. — The United States Weather Bureau has a special display station at Pointe aux Barques. Coast. — Between Pointe aux Barques and Burnt Cabin point the reef if. somewhat broken, but it extends off the latter point a mile. It follows the coast, extending out from a mile to 1} miles, and at Pointe aux Barques lighthouse the edge of the reef is 1§ (2) miles offshore. Just south of Burnt Cabin point is a life-saving station, and a little beyond is Grindstone City. New river is If (2) miles farther SE. and Huron City, at the mouth of Willow river, is 1 (IJ) mile beyond it. Orion rock, with 6 feet of water over it, lies 1 (1^) mile NW. of Willow lliver wharf. Two miles SK. of Huron City is a lighthouse. Pointe mat Barques light — A flashing white light every ten sec- onds, visible in clear weather 15^ (17^) miles, is exhibited 80 feet above the lake level from a conical tower connected by a covered way with a dwelling, both white. Life-Saving station is 300 yards south of the lighthouse. Buoy. — A bell buoy, black, is moored in 33 fieet water 2 (2|) miles E. ]f S. (S. 88<^ E.) of Pointe aux Barques lighthouse. It marks the reef extending offshore. Vessels must pass outside this bell buoy. Coast — At 1 (14) mile NNE. ftom Pointe aux Barques lighthouse is %n S foot slioal, with deeper water between it and the shore. Between u> te aux Barques and Sandbeach, 12,^ (14) miles SSE., the reef con- > > V'is, and in places extends out for a mile, generally f mile. Port Hope is halfway to Sand Beach. Halfway between port Hope and Sand Beaeh is Forest bay, oft' which are several dangerous ledges running north and south a mile fh)m shore. Sand Beach, a harbor of refuge, is just north of Cranes point This is the only place of shelter in the vicinity of Pointe aux Barques, an exposed and stormy locality, with no other harbor or safe anchorage for 60} (80) miles along a rocky and dangerous coast The entire lake Huron traffic passes within sight of this harbor. This includes all through traffic to and from lakes Superior and Michigan. Improvements. — As constructed, the harbor works are built ii^ threo sections, each consisting of heavy timber cribs, filled with stone. The west pier incloses the harbor on the north shore and, starting in shallow water 750 feet from shore, extends ESE. 1,503 feet, with a width increasing from 19 to 26 feet. The main pier extends 4,676 feetNW. and SE., with a uuitbrm width of 38 feet. The south pier extends north and south 1,956 feet, with a width vajrying tcom 26 to 18 feet, and protects the harbor from the eastward. The north entrance is 300 feet and the main entrance 600 feet wide. January, 1896: The east and north entrances have both been dredged to 21 feet below two of g^nge^ ^»t with the preTWMl'g stage of water 128 LAKE HURON. tlie available entrance depth is not over 20 feet; equal or greater depth adjoins t,iie main breakwater, inside, at nil points between these two entrances. Vessels can reach the landing pier on a draft of about 12 feet at the present stage of water. Directions. — Anchorage. — The main entrance is the one commonly used by all vessels. Tlie southern margin of it is bordered by a rocky bottom of insufUcient depth. There is very limited holding ground inside the harbor, most of the botfoni being rocky. Steamers go directly to the main pier and make fast; sailing vessels either make fast to the pier or anchor on the west side, south of the west pier, where there is limited holding ground. Life-saving station.— There is a railroad pier in the harbor, at the inner end of which is a life-saving station. Display station.— The United States Weather Bureau has a special display station at Sand Beach. North Entrance.— East light, a fixed white light, visible 11$ (la^) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 42 feet above the lake level, from a white, pyramidal, open-framework tower, upper part inclosed, on the end of the breakwater, east side of the north entrance to the harbor. West light— A fixed red light, visible about 9^ (11) miles in clear weather, is shown 27^ feet above the lake level Irom a skeleton tripod on the end of the breakwater, west side of the north eutrauce to the harbor. These lights mark the northern entrance to the harbor of refuge. Main (east) entrance.— North (main) light.— A flashing light, alter- nately red and white every five seconds, visible 12-1^^ (14f ) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 64J feet above the lake level from a conical brown tower, surmounted by a black lantern. The lighthouse, with brown fog-signal house, is on a rectangular crib just inside the north side of east entrance to the harbor. Fog signal— A 10-inch steam whistle sounds a blast of five seconds' dnratioti, followed by a silent interval of twenty-five seconds. Bonth light— A fixed red light, visible 9J (11) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 27J feet above the lake level from a skeleton tripod on the end of the breakwater, south side of the east entrance to the harbor. These lights mark the eastern or main entrance to the harbor of refuge. Coast— From Cranes point to the St. Clair river the coast trends 8. by E. nearly 51 (58}) miles, and is fronted by rocky shoals the whole dis tance, but can be safely approached anywhere to a mile. Barnetville is a mile southward of Cranes point, and Elm creek ^ (5J) miles farther on. At Elm creek a dangerous spit extends from the shore f mile NB. Whiterock town is If (2) miles south from Elm creek. North § mile from the end of the wharf at Whiterock point is a rock out of water, known as White rock. A ledge with 4 or 5 feet of water over it extends 300 yards SE. fifom the rock, Porestvillo is halfway between White- rock point and Indian creek, 7| (9) miles to the southward. Booky -f PORT SANILAC ST. CLAIK RIVER. 129 Teater depth !u these two of about 12 16 commonly 1 by a rocky ling groaud ■8 go directly e fast to the tiere there is irbor, at the las a special blellJ(13J) level, from a »sed, on the I the harbor, liles in clear iletou tripod rauce to the f refuge, r light, alter- iiiles in clear mical brown lingular crib Ive secoudH^ ds. )ar weather, ripod on the le harbor, or of refuge. St trends S. le whole dis Im creek ^ mile NE. ^orth § mile ut of water, sr it extends rcen White- trd. Booky spots are found along this stretch of the coast i mile o£f shore. Bich- moudville is a short distance southward of Indian creek. From here to Port Sanilac, 8§ (10) miles farther sonth, the coast continues its rocky character, but can be approached somewhat nearer than that farther north. Picnic point, 3 (3J) miles north of Port Sanilac, is the south point of Pools bay, a slight, shallow indentation in the coast, with Forester at its northern end. Port Sanilac light— A fixed red light, visible llj (13) miles, is exhibited 69 feet above the lake level, from an octagonal, pyramidal white tower, connected by a covered way with a red dwelling. Coast— From Port Sanilac to Lexington, 10 (11 J) miles to the south- ward, the coast continues in the same direction, and of the same general character. At Burchville, 6 (7) miles beyond Lexington, there is a detached rocky spot of 17 feet, f mile NE. of the town and nearly the same distance off shore. At Lakeport, 3 (3J) miles south of Burchville, the coast changes its direction slightly to the eastward and trends SSE. for 7f (9) miles to the west entrance point of the St. Clair river. North of this point, IJ (If) miles and If (2) miles, are 16 and 17 foot shoals f mile off shore. Lake Hnron, foot of channeL— Jannary 1, 1896: Work in progress for channel 2,400 feet wide and 21 feet deep. The east half of this channel is completed. Shoals.— Corsica shoal with 16 feet least water over it, Harlem shoal with 17 feet, and Northwest shoal with 16 feet lie off the entrance to St. Clair river. An extensive shoal, 15 feet over it, has been reported as lying 2^ (2^) miles N. by E. of Port Oratiot lighthouse. Lake Huron UghtvesseL— A fixed white light, visible Uf (13}) miles, is shown 40 feet above the lake level from the fore masthead. The vessel has two masts, is schooner rigged, and has no bowsprit. There is a circular black cage- work day mark at the fore masthead and a small black smokestack and fog signal between the masts. The hull is straw color, with ^^Lake Huron" in large black letters on each side and **2iro. 61" on each bow. The vessel is moored 1} (If) miles N.by E. f E. (N.20o E.) from Part Gratiot lighthouse in 20 feet of water. Fog signal— A 6-inch steam whistle sounds a Blast of two seconds' duration, followed by a silent interval of ten seconds. If the whistle is disabled, a bell will be rung by hand. Dredged Cat buoy.- A red spar buoy marks the edge of the new out near Lake Hnron lightvessel No. 61, and is on the following bearing: Fort Gratiot lighthouse S. by W. | W. (S. 18° W.), distant IJ (If) miles. Fort Oratiot light— A fixed and flashing white light, flash every one minute, is exhibited 82 feet above the lake level fh>m a conical white tower, with a red dwelling detached, onthe western entrance point to St Olah* river. The light is visible 14f (17) miles in dear weather. 1944— No. 108 ^9 130 LAKE HUSON. Fog aignaL — An 8-ineh steam whistle sonuds a Mast of tiiree sec- onds' duration, followed by a silent interval of seventeen seconds. The fog-signal building is in front of the lightstation. Fort Oratiiot range lights.— Both lights are red, the front light 67 and the rear light 80 feet above the lake level. The front light is shown from a telegraph pole surmounted by a white triangle as a day mark, on the west bank of the river. The rear lighthouse, 300 feet BSW. j W. (S. 31° W.) of the front light, is a white pyramidal op^i-framework tower, with day mark S feet long and 12 feet wide. The description of, and directions for, St. Olair river are given in the next chapter. CANADIAN SHOBB OF LAKX fiFBON. Dotoiur paasago and Port Collier are described in Chapter II. Drummond island belongs to the United States ; Oockburn and Qrand Manitoulin islands to Oanada. These islands form the eastern part of the northern shore of lake Huron . The southern shores of these islands have not been surveyed and no description can be given of them. Yessels should give this whole coast a wide berth. False Detour channel, nearly 17 (19^) miles east of Detour passage, is 6 (7) miles long NE. by N. and SW. by S., witJi im averi^e width of 1| (2) miles. Apparently there are no dangers if a mid-channel course be kept. Strait of Mliwrtfisanga, the next passage east, is a little longer and broader than False Detour channel and takes a N. by E. ^ E. direction. This passage is also apparently clear in mid-chann^ At the western entranee to the strait o£f the southeastern side ci Gockbum island are the Magnetic reefs. They extend 2^ (2|) miles southeasterly from the south point of Godcburn island and 2^ {9) miles into the strait. Mississai^;a light— -At the southeastern entrance point to l^e strait is a fixed white light, visible 13 (15) miles in clear weather. It is ex- hibited 46 feet above the lake level from a white square tower on the SW. point of Grand Manitoulin island. It sraves as a guide thf>oiigh the strait. Fog signal — A steam wildcat whistle sounds a blast of eight socMids' duration, fcllowed by a silent interval <^ two minutes. The pitc^ of the whistle varies during the blast. Shoals. — At the eastern entrance to the strait, 8. by E. | B. (S. 20° M.)f 3 (8^) miles from tiie light, is a detached rook «ind shoaL Ghi-een island, a little farther eastward, is connected with Manitoulin island by shoals. Dnok islands, five in number, extend south off the coast of Mani- toulin island 12 (13f ) miles. The Inner Duck island is surrounded by reefiSj which extend northward almost to Manitoulin island. Beeib ex- tend off the north shore of the Western Duck. Middle Dock is sur- rounded by reefs. Beefs extend off the eastern edge of Outw Duck, of tiiree see- leconds. The front light 67 ight is shown i a day mack, I feet SSW. I sn-flramework i given in the iftpter II. rn and Qrand Ekstern part of these islands [>f them. ttour passage, iri^e width of banuel course ble longer and \ E. direction. istern side ci 2A m miles 1 and 2A(a) ittotiiestmit her. It is ex> tower on the snide ths>ongh eight soeiHidik' The pitdi of a. I B. (B. 20° lOaC th Manitenlin soastof Maui- urrounded by nd. Beefii ex- ) Dock is sttf • r Outw Duck, DUCK ISLANDS — STOKES BAY. 131 and l^ (If) miles southerly from its 8«)athern -point. Beefb line the north and eastern shore of Great Duck, and extend a mile to the south- ward from its SE. end. There is a detached reef ^ mile off the north shore of Great Duck. The passage between the Duck ii^ands and Mtween the islands and the shore should not be attempted. The SW. end of the Great Duck is marked by a lighthouse. Light — A revolving red and white light, one red and two white flashes every two minutes, greatest brilliancy every forty seconds, and visible 15 (17^) miles iu clear weather, is exhibited 64 feet above the lake level from a square, white tower, with dwelling att8e. Chantry Island light— A fixed white light, visible 15 (17^) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 86 feet above the lake level, from a white, circular tower on the north point of Chantry island. Fog signal — ^A hand horn answers vessels' fog signals. Southampton is at the month of the Saugeen river, east of Chantry island. The harbor is formed by a breakwater 1,600 feet long extending easterly from the old breakwater at the northern end of the island and a breakwater 2,000 feet long curving from the mainland to within 400 feet of the end of the breakwater extending from Chantry island. A landing pier has been built in the inner harbor, where a quantity of stone has been removed from a shoal adjoining the anchorage ground, The breakwaters are continuous cribs, filled with stone. The depth of the channel is reported to be only 14 feet. Saugeen light— A fixed white light, visible 10 (11^) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 30 feet above the lake level from a mast with a brown shed at the base, standing on a crib on the breakwater, on the north side of the mouth of the Saugeen river. It serves to guide fishing boats into Saugeen river. Soufhampton Harbor range lights.— Front light— Fixe^ red to the north, white in the harbor, visible 7 (8) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 29 feet above the lake level from a square white tower on the east end of the west breakwater, 833 yards NE. J E. (N. 63" B.) from the light on Chantry island. Rear light— A fixed white light, visible 10 (11 J) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 34 feet above the lake level from a white, square tower on the shore south of the landing pier, 2,100 yards S. by E. (S. 11° E.) from the front light. PORT ELGIN — OODEBICH. 133 Qland, to the ' Lyal iHlaiid jyal island is ionds, visible ove the lake cached, id to a small miles south, ipal of which 1 be given a er from reefs, h connects it r over ^ mile, bhe mouth of lighthoup.e. IH) miles in rom a white, itofOhantry g extending te island and to within 400 mtry island. i quantity of rage ground, Ihe depth of dies in dear mast with a rater, on the Fixed red to r weather, is tower on the 63" B.) from lies in clear rhite, square 8.byE. (8. Dtreotioiia. — This range leads to the opening in the breakwater, at the north end of the harbor. The rear light must be opened east of the front light to clear the shoal running out from the north end of Ghantry island. Port Elgin is in the bight, 3^ (4) miles south of Ghantry island. The reef extends northward from the point west of Port Elgin 1^ (If) miles. Port Elgin light. — A fixed white light is exhibited from a pole on the corner of a shed on the outer end of the Government wharf. Coast — From west of Port Elgin the coast trends 8 (9J) miles 8W. to Douglas point, and should not be approached closer than 1^ (If) miles on account of the reefs which line it At 2 (2^) miles south of Douglas point is Inverhufon, at the mouth of a small stream. It has one pier 450 feet in length, with 14 feet at the outer end. From here the coast trends 7 (8) miles SSW. to Kincardine, where there is a small stream. BUncardine range lights.— Pront light— A fixed red light, visible 8 (94) miles in clear weather, is shown 37- feet above the lake level from a square, white tower on the north pier. Main (rear) light, 1,185 feet ESE. (8. 68° E.) of front light, is an alternating red and white light every twenty seconds, visible 14 (16) miles in clear weather. It is exhibited 76 feet above the lake level iW>m a fawn-colored octagonal tower, dwelling attached, on a high stone foundation on the hillside in the town of Kincardine. The front light is visible in the direction of the range. The rear light is visible from all points seaward. The range leads somewhat to the northward of the head of the north pier. Point Clark is 7^ (8§) miles SW. from Kincardine light, the coast between being bordered by a reef which extends a mile off shore in places. Tiiere is a reef extending from the point 1^ (If) miles west- erly, and south 3 (3^) miles of point Glark is a similar reef. On point Glark is a lighthouse. Point Clark light— A revolving white light, every thirty seconds, visible 15 (17^) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 87 feet above the lake level from a white, circular tower. Port Albert at the mouth of Nine-mile river, is 8 (9|) miles south of the last-mentioned reef, and Goderich, at the mouth of the Maitland river, is 8 (9^) miles south of Port Albert. All this xK>rtion of the coast can bo approached with safety to ^ mile. Qoderich, a harbor of refuge, is an inoloserl basin, with a channel cut through the beach connecting it with deep water in lake Huron. The sides of the channel are protected by two piers extending west into the lake; the north pier has an extension to the ISW. The width between the piers is 200 feet ; depth about 16 feet. There is an artificial bank between the Maitland river and the harbor, the river discharging -;;■ i ait«8gi»MB»EiM;:- ;fl 134 LAKE HUROK. into the lake through the north beach, aud not into the harbor. There are clay banks from GO to 120 feet high on each side of the harbor. Good anchorage off the piers; clay bottom. The United States is represented by a consul. Dims. — Tonnage dnes range from 50 cents to $5. fiUgiud station. — ^There is a storm signal station in the harbor. Gk>derieh Main light— A fixed white light, visible 18 (20|) miles iu etoar weather, is exhibited 160 feet above the lake level Arom a square, white tower, dwelling attaohed, on the high bank south of the entrance to the harbor. Fog signal — An 8-inch steam whistle sounds a blast of ten seconds' duration, followed by a silent interval of fifty seconds. The fog signal is on the town waterworks building on the bcach^ SB. by E. i E. from the outer end of the north breakwater. It is 30 feet above the water, aud maintained by a corporation. Gtoderich range lights— Front light— A fixed red light, visible 5 (5|> miles in clear weatlier, is exhibited 45 feet above the lake level from a 6(iuare, white, open-frauiework tower on the north pier about 117 feet fk-om its outer extremity. Rear light — A fixed green light, visible 5 (5f ) miles in clear weather, is exhibited 34 feet above the lake level from a square, white tower on the north pier, 1,500 feet E. f S. from the front light. These lights in range E. $ S. (S. 82° E.) lead to the head of the breakwater. ZiifB-saving station is between the breakwaters. Basrfleldi, at the month of Bayfield river, is 10 (11^) miles south of €k>derich. There is a harbor composed of two piers aud a basin. The north pier is 820 feet and the south 875 feet long, with a width of 200 feet between them. Depth of water at the entrance, 10 feet. Lake View is 13 (15) miles south of Bayfield, and here the coast oommenoes to bend to the westward to cape Ipperwash, the end of which is 16 (174) mUes SW. by W. (8. 50° N.) from Lake View. The reef extends as the cape is approached, and suiTonnds the cape for a distance of 1^ (If) miles. It is a dangerous reef, having only 5 feet of water a mile from the cape aud from 12 to 16 feet at its outer extremi- ties, between cape Ipperwash and Harris point there are bowlders and rooky points within a mile of the shore. The reef continues 2 (2^) milee south of Harris point. At Errol the coast changes direction to the westward, and becomes steep-to as far as the oitranoe to the St. Olair river, a distance of 9 (lOj^) iiiles. Point Bdward range lights (iirivate lights).— Two fixed lights, white over red, fure shown from ^ligh open-framework towers, which are oonspicuous day marks. The range is S. j E. (3. 8° E.), and leads 450 liMt west of Northwest shoal, the most we^»rly of the slioal spots. the harbor, side of the liarbor. ( (20f ) milett om a sqaare, the euirauce ten seconds' e boach^ SE. It is 30 feet :ht, visible 5 le lake level 1 pier about lear weather, lite tower on head of the ilea south of . basin. The width of 200 e(. re the coast L, the end of View. The 16 cape for a >nly 5 feet of Iter extremi- ae bowlders itinues 2 (2^) diroetion to le to the St. fixed lii^ts, rs, which are nd leads 450 »al spots. CHAPTER VIII. ST. CliAIR AND DETROIT RIVERS, AND I^KE ST. CLAIR. ST. CLAIR RIVER, St. Clair river, the ootlet of lake Huron, oommenoes at the southern end of this lake, where the shores of the United States and Canada nearly meet. This river, in connection with lake St. Clair and the Detroit river, forms the link between lakes Huron and Erie. It is 39 (46) miles in length, counting from the ^-foot curve in lake Huron to the 20 foot curve in lake St. Clair. As the proposed improvementH by dredging will form a continuous deep channel between these curves, it is but right to class them with the river proper, which extends from Fort Oratiot to the mouth of the South channel. The proposed channel, from the 20-foot enrve in lake Huron into the river and terminating just inside of Fort Gratiot lighthouse, is to have a depth of 21 feet, with a length of 2,400 feet at the Huron end, which will be continued to the deep water in the St. Clair river. January, 1886, the eastern half of the channel had been completed. Thence through the river the navigation is easy until leaving the South channel, when the flats are encountered. NOBTHBBN APPROACH TO ST. CLAIR RIVER. From Lak^wrt, in Michigan, the coast of lake Huron trends SSE. i E. to the mouth of the St Clair river, and the coast can be approached within f mile until near Lake Huron l^btvessel, when the ranges must be taken up for entering the river. From Errol, on the Canadian side, the wm* trends W. by S., and it is safe to approach within ^ mile until close to Fort Gratiot lighthouse. In the approach to the river, if coming firom the northward, vessels of light draft should pftss dose to the lightvessel, keeping it to port Ves- sel of greater draft can find deepar water by keeping the lightvessel to starboard 1^ (IJ) mUes away and continuing to ap^oach the Caaadian shore until Fort Gratiot light bears SW. by W. i W. (8. 50° W.), distant 2 (24) miles, whence a course WSW. i W. (8. 70° W.) wUl lead through 4 fathoms untQ the Fwrt Gratiot range is made, on which range vessels should enter the river. When fee chtuiuel is cut fcom t^e lake into the river all vessels can use it If oondng firom the eastward, vessels should bring Fort Gratiot light 18B 136 BT. OLAIB BIVER. to bear 8W. by W. J W. (8. 89° W.), distant 2 {2\) miles, and then keep a course of W8W. ^ W, (8. 70° W.), antil ou tbe Fort Giutiot rauge. At the entrance of the river are Oratiot (United 8tate8) and Huron (Canadian), while just within the entrance is I'ort Huron, Mich., and Sarnia, Ontario. The lights at the entrance to the river are given iu the previous chapter. Dry dooka. — At port Huron are docks of 210 and 412 feet over all, with widths of gates 32 and G2 feet, and depths over sills of 13 and 18 feet. DIBBOTIONS FOB ST. CLAIB BIVEB. Fort Oratiot range. — On tbe west bank of this river and near the Grand Trunk Bailway freight house and dock at Fort Gratiot is n fixed red light, shown from a telegraph pole surmounted by a white triangle for a day mark. The light is 57 feet above the lake level. About 300 feet 88W. J W. (8. 31° W.) is a second red light at a height of 80 feet above the lake level and shown from a white pyramidal framework tower with a day mark 14 feet long and 10 feet wide. This range will carry deep water into the river and clear the 20-foot spot lying 300 yards 8E. from Fort Gratiot lighthouse. After passing this 20-foot spot a mid-channel course should be kept until near the nonth of Black river, when the deepest water will be found near the Canadian shore. A shoal makes out fi*om the month of Black river 1,200 yards to the southward, with a greatest widtli of 600 yards. Twelve feet can be carried over this shoal, but a lookout must be kept for some spots of gravel and rock, on which there are but 10 feet. Buoy. — A black spar buoy is moored in 15 feet of water to mark tbe easterly side of this shoal. Oantion as to Anchoraga — From Fort Gratiot light to below the rapids the holding ground is rocky and bad. Off Port Huron and Sarnia it is clay and good. Vessels should anchor as close to shore as safety will permit, so as to leave the mid-channel clear for passing vessels. Black river. — If intending to enter this river it is well to know that a channel has been dredged from the 8t. Clair river to Washington avenue. The width varies from 150 feet at the mouth to 60 feet at the upper end. In January, 1896, the available depth at low water near the month was scant 15 feet, and near the upper limit of improvements about 9 feet. Having cleared the shoal off Black river, a mid-channel course will carry deep water until approaching Stag island, which, with the shoals projecting fr^m its north and south ends, divides the river and forms two narrow but deep channels, through either of which deep water can be carried, remembering that in the Michigan side channel there is a 15-foot spot a little below Stag island and nearer to the Michigan shore. The Canadian channel is clear. 8TA0 ISLAND — WOODTICK ISLAND. 187 hiid then keep iitiot raiigv. i) and Uuron D, Mich,, niid the previous feet over all, of 13 and 18 aid near tiie tiot is a flxed hite triangle d light at a te pyramidal wide. X the 20foot ould be kept rater will be 1 the month ;est w id til of nt a lookout here are but to mark the below the Huron and » to shore as for passing know that Washington ) feet at the water near provementa . course will 1 the shoals ' and forms p water cau }1 there is a dgan shore. Conmiui range (Canadian).— ThL> ft-ont light, a fixed white light, is shown from a white, skeleton-framed tower with an iiuilosod top, the side facing the water being slatted. It is 18 feet abovu high water and visible 4 (l^) miles. The rear light, a flxed white light, 07 feet almve high wiiter, visible 4 (4A) miles, stands i568 feet 8. by E, ^ E. (8. 13° E.) from the front light. It is shown from a square white tower. Both of these towers are in the village of Corunna, the fr«mt light being near the old wharf at the foot of Fane street, while the rear light is on the west side of Beresford street. Tho course 8. 13° E. carries through the best water in the Canadian channel past the shoals at the head of Stag island, as also past the shoals off the mouth of Talfords creek. Stag island is about li^ (1^) miles long, with shoals exteiding northward from its north end for nearly J iDi^e, and southward from the south end f mile. Buoys. — Near the north end of the northern shoak a ret and black horizontally striped spar buoy is moored in 16 f^^et watej , The. s)- >al extends a short distance north from this buoy. A similar but ' is moored in 12 feet water on the south end of the southern shoal Cantion.— A short distance to the southward from this buoy lue two shoal spots of 17 feet water, and one of the same dept? v,\. jt from the buoy and nearly in mid-channel on the Michigan side. Having passed the shoals near Stag island, deep water continues for IJ (1§) miles to a shoal nearly in mid-channel and extending from off Mooretown, Canada, to the mouth of the Pine river, Mich. The shoal water extends for a distance of nearly 1,^ (1^) miles, with a least depth, opposite St. Clair, of 4 feet. The shoal is marked by tw n buoys, and is known as St Clair middle ground. Bnoya.— A spar buoy, painted in red and black horizontal stripes, is moored near the north end of this shoal in 16 feet of water, and is about 660 yards W. J S. from the mouth of Baby creek, Canada. A spar buoy, painted in red and black horizontal stripes, is moored near the south end of this shoal in 17 fe'»t of water, and is about 450 yards ENE. from the north side of the ut i" of Pine river. Pine river. — This river empties into the iit, Clair river at St. Clair. There is a dredged channel from its mouth to ^he shipyard, 10 feet deep and from 75 to 100 feet wide. From the shoals off Pine river the channel is clear until Marine City is reached, a distance of 8f (7^) miles. Off Marine City, and just to the northward of Woodtick (Fawn) island, is a shoal nearly one mile long, with a least deptL of 16 feet, and not buoyed. The main channel is on the Michigan side until Woodtick island is passed, and there is a narrow channel on the Canadian side. Woodtick island. — This island, with its shoals, is 1^ (1^) miles long by I mile wide; the shoals are marked by buoys. There is a channel on 138 ST. CLAIR RIYEB. either side of the island, that of the United States being the straightest and widest and most frequently used. BuojTB.— A spar buoy, painted red and black in horizontal stripes, is moored in 16 feet of water on the shoal extending north from Woodtick island and about 900 yards from the northera end of that island; the shoal extends to the northward beyond the buoy. A spar buoy, painted red and black in horizontal stripes, is moored in 13 feet of water on the end of the shoal extending to the southward from Woodtick Island, and is about 700 yards from the south point of that island. From the buoy off the south end of Woodtick island a mid-channel course can be kept until off Babys point. Belle river.— This river, on the Michigan side, empties into the S*. Clair river just above the northerly end of Woodtick island, and in the south end of Marine City. It has a (hedged channel 50 feet wide and about 10 feet deep from the mouth to the first bridge, and thence to the Broadway bridge a vessel can carry 9 feet. Chenal Ecart^ (Canadian) is one of the seven months of the St. Clair river, and at Babys point takes its direction to the southeastward. It is very narrow, and navigable for vessels drawing 16 feet. About 5 (5f) miles from Babys point a second dliannel (Johnston) makes off to the southward. About 3 (3J) miles farther on Bear creek empties into Chenal Ecart^. Neither of the channels lead into deep water. South channeL — Before the construetion of this canal the St Clair river emptied into lake St. Clair through seven principal mouths or passes, the one most used being the Sooth channel. Where the river runs into lake St. Clair there were formerly numerous shoals and flats; this has been remedied by the building of diJces and dredging, a^ a straight channel made carrying 20 feet. St Clair Flats canaL — ^The northern or river end of the channel has a bottom width of 650 feet, and from that narrows gradually until the eanal is reached. Between the dikes a depth of 20 feet is to be main- tained with a width of 300 feet for a distance of 7,221 feet. From tJ» lake end of the dikes the width increases gradually until a bottom width of 800 feet is attained, and this width is continued to the 20'iootemve, FROM BABYS POINT THBOUaH SOUTB CHANNEL. For the South Channel range lights, see latest United States List of Lights aud Fog Signals on the l^orthem Lakes and Rivers. Directions. — Keep a mid-channel course from Babys point vntA the npp«r range (No. 12-No. 11) is made, when bring this range a little oh the starboard bow, giving the buoy (red tmd black horizontal stripes, in 16 feet water, 900 yards from No. 12 light) a clearance of at least | mile. If the range is kept it will carry into 14 feet watw. Con feet wide and , and thenee to oftbeStChuf leastward. It 'eet. About 5 ion) makes off Dhenal Ecart^. J the St Glair pal mouths or 'here the river oals and flats; edging, a^ a lie channel has lally until the is to be main- «t. From titer k bottom width > 2O'fo0t eurve. States Litt of trs. point vntA the Age a little oh zoutal Btripes, 9 of at least | tex. Oonitinne iieiithe«opn|6 DIRECTIONS. 139 should be gradually changed to the southwestward until the lower rauge (No. 10-No. 11) on ftussel island is made astern. This range should be made about J mile below the lower light, No. 10, and the range then carried to a little below Fish dock, when will be made the Herson Island lower range (No. 8-No. 7). Soon after heading on this range the Squirrel Shoal buoy (red spar, moored in 17 feet water to mark a shoal on which there is a depth of 13 feet) should be made. Wreck. — A schooner lies sunk in 30 feet water about 150 feet from the west bank of the river and about 2,400 feet SW. from Squirrel Island buoy. When abreast of this buoy the course should be changed gradually to the southward, keeping closer to the Michigan shore for the deeper water. When a little below the red light, No. 7, of the lower range, Squirrel Island buoy (red spar, moored in 11 feet water to mark the edge of the flat off Squirrel island) should be seen, and when it bears nearly South the upper range (No. 8-No. 9) should be brought on astern, and kept until off Bassett channel and Southeast Bend upper light, No. 6. This light shows white upstream, and when it changes to red the course should be gradually changed to the SW. for rounding the Southeast bend. A mid-channel course should be kept past the next two lights — Southeast Bend middle, No. 5, and Southeast Bend lower, No. 4. This light (No. 4) shows red upstream, changing to white at the time a vessel should change its course to take the ran; ; No. 3-No. 2. This range will carry nearly a mid-cbannel course through the upper part of the Lower reach, but do not go too close to the Canadian side. A vessel keeping to the northward of a line join- ing lights Nos. 4 and 1 will koep off the shoals. Do not go to the northward of a line joining lights Nos. 3 and 4, but ou approaching that line, if on the range, the course can be gradually changed to the west, and a mid-channel course will carry past the lights until the lower range (No. 1-No. 2) is nearly made astern. Vessels should not go westward of this range, but should keep close to it until nearing the Star Island hotel, when a course more in mid- channel should be kept. When § mile to the southwestward of Star Island hotel, a course SW. I 8. (S. 41° W.), with the lighthouse on the upper end of the west pier of the United States ship canal nearly ahead, will carry in deep water to the canal. At this entrance to the canal the width is 296 feet. There is a light on each end of the west pier. St. Clair Flats Canal lights.— A fixed red light, visible 11| (13) miles, and 45 feet above the river level, is shown from an octagonal tower rising from the corner of a dwelling, both being built of led brick. It is on the NE. end of the west pier. A fixed red light, visible 11^ (13) miles, shown from the same descrip- tion of tower and ait the same height above the lake level) is on the S W. end of the west piw in lake St. Qlair. 140 LAKE ST. GLAIB. LAKE ST. CLAIR. Laki St. Olair is of irregular shape, being 23 (26J) miles long from New Baltimore on tlie north to Belle river on the south, and 21 (24) wide miles across its southern part in an east and west direction. Anchor bay, the northwestern section of the lake, is cut off by a bar, with a least depth of 8 feet over it at the center. This bar extends across from the mouth of the Olinton river to the mouth of the Ohenal Aboutrond. Anchor bay can be approached through the north channel, but it has a bar of 8 feet least water at its mouth. New Baltimore and Fairhaven are on the north shore of the bay, the former having 8 feet and the latter 6 feet off the ends of the wharves. At 7 (8) miles south of New Baltimore is Huron point, with shoal water off it. From here to Milk Eiver point there is but 12 feet of water 1 (IJ) mile from shore. From here to Windmill point vessels drawing 12 feet should not approach the shore nearer than | mile. On the south shore Belle River station is the only town of any size between the Detroit river and the Thames river. The 12.foot curve is from 1 to 1,^ (2 J) miles off this coast The Thames at the SE. end of this lake is the only river of any impor- tance on the Ganadian side, and at its mouth are range lights. Thames River lights.— A fixed white light, visible 12 (13j^) miles, is shown from a circular white tower. It is on the south shore of the mouth of the river. A fixed white light, visible 6 (7) miles, is shown from a square red tower. It is 300 feet NW. ^ N. (N. 39° W.) from the main light. These two lights in one lead over the bar. This bar has a least depth of 7 feet. From the Thames river the coast trends nearly north to Mitchel point and north and west of the point is Mitchel bay. From the east shore the 12-foot curve averages the same distance as it does from the south shore. The north shore from Mitchel point to the United States ship canal is low and marshy, with shoal water extending off over If (2) miles. The course from the month of the ship canal to the bar of the Thames river is SE. The middle of this lake has an average depth of 3^ fathoms, mud and clay. Grosse Poirte flats extend into lake St. Olair from the head of the Detroit river. On these flats at the ordinary stage of the lakes a depth of 16 feet can be carried, but during low water it is difficult to carry more than 16 feet. A channel 800 feet wide and 20 feet deep has been cut through the flats from the 20-foot contour in lake St. Olair to the Detroit river. Grosse Pointe Ugfatressel, No. 10, is moored about 1^ (2) miles east of Orosse pointe. :^ff ilea long from b, aud 21 (24) irection. t off by a bar, s bar extends of the Ohenal lel, but it has f the bay, the the wharves, it, with shoal )ut 12 feet of point vessels Q ^ mile. On ' size between irve is from 1 of any impor- ghts. (13j^) miles, shore of the a square red light. These )pth of 7 feet. Mitchel point le distance as ship canal is 2) miles, f the Thames 'athoms, mud e head of the }th of 16 feet ry more than through the oit river. It^ (2) miles LAKE ST. GLAIB — ^DXBECTIONB. 141 The lightvessel is a scow with one mast, with a circular cage- work day mark at the masthead. The hull is painted red with the name in large black letters on each side, and N^o. 10 on the stern. The day mark and topmast are painted black. The light is fixed white, 25 feet above the lake level, and visible in clear weather lOJ (11|) miles. Fog signal — During thick weather a bell is rung. Windmill Point light — A fixed white light varied by a red flash every fifteen seconds, visible 12f (14J) miles, is exhibited, 55 feet above the lake level, from a conical white tower connected v/ith a red brick dweUing by a covered way. The tower is on Windmill point, the north side of the entrance to the Detroit river. Lights. — The following lantern lights are shown from pile clusters to mark the 20-foot channel into the Detroit river. They are maintained by the Lake Carriers' Association. Lower entrance beacon. — A fixed white light, 15f feet above lake level, on the pile cluster on the SE. side of the channel at the lower entrance, on the following bearing: Wiudwill Point lighthouse WSW. J W. (S. 73° W.), distant about 1 ^ (1|) miles. Middle beacon. — A fixed white light, 15f feet above lake level, on the SE. side of the channel, on the following bearing: Windmill Point lighthouse SW. by W. f W. (S. 65° W.), distant 2-i% (2^1^) miles. Upper beacon. — A fixed white light, 15| feet above lake level, on the SE. side of the channel, on the following bearing: Outer end of Fishers dock W. J S. (8. 87° W.), distant If (l^) mUes. DIBEOTIONS ACROSS LAKE ST. OLAIB. From the lighthouse on the SW. end of the west pier a course of SW. (S. 46° W.) for IOt^ (12) miles will carry to the Grosse Pointe light- vessel, which leaves to port. The pile beacons by day and lights at night mark the SE. side of the channel into the Detroit river. DETROIT RIVER. From the southern end of Groase Pointe channel to the southern end of the ship canal below Amherstburg this river is 27f (32) miles long, with a navigable depth of water for large vessels of from ^ to ^ mile in width until the vicinity of Ballards Beef lightvessel is reached, whence the channel narrows decidedly and is filled with shoal spots having but 17 feet of water on them. These spots are about the center of the main channel and extend from the lightvessel to Fort Maiden. The channel from Fort Maiden on is narrow, about ^ mile, until | mile below Bois Blanc lighthouse; thence to the cut which is to be dredged through the bar the channel wideus. This cut is to be 800 feet wide and to carry a depth of 21 feet from the Detroit river into lake Erie. It has been completed for half its width. Detroit —The city of Detroit is near the head of the Detroit river, and has deep water alongside the numerons wharves. ■■miiiHil ^VX^SSt-tMS^SiS JH^^fi^fSggig 142 DETROIT RTVEB. Dry docks. — The Detroit Dry Dock Ootnpany has two timber docks, as also has the Clarke Dry Dock Company. The largest clock is 365 feet on blocks, 378 feet over all; width, gate 79 feet, top 90 feet, and depth on sill, 16 feet. Weatiier signal statloa— The United States Weather Barean has a special station at Stanley B. Smith's coal dock, 5 miles below Detroit. Amherstburg (Canadian) is on the Detroit river near lake Erie, the deei>- water channel of the river imssing in front of the city. Note. — For the description of lights and ranges in the Detroit river see the latest United States List of Lights and Fog Signals for the Northern Lakes and Waters. DIBBOTIONS FOB THE DETBOIT BIYEB. Isle anz Peches buoy. — ^A spar buoy, painted red, is moored in 16 feet of water on the edge of the shoal, extending from the west end of the Isle aux Peches. Belle Isle (east end) buoy.— A spar buoy, painted red and black in horiasontal stripes, is moored in 16 feet of water on the east point of the shoal off the head of Belle isle. It is also a mark for the division of the channel, which is divided into two parts by Belle isle. MAIN OHAITNEL. A vessel having passed through Orosse Pointe, channel should steer to pass 4 luile Arom Windmill Point light, and when this light is abeam a course SW. by W. f W. (S. 65° W.) will carry between Windmill point and Isle aux Peches, which island is surrounded by shoal water, with a spit off the west end. Keep the coarse 8. ft5o W. until the Windmill Point range comes on, when bring it astern and stand SW. (S. 45° W.) between Isle aux Peches and Belle Isle buoys until Belle Isle light is abeam. From here a mid-channel course can be kept past Detroit until near Fighting island. NOBTHEBN OHAimEL. Scott Middle Oronnd bnoys.— No. 6 is a spar buoy, painted red, moored in 18 feet of water on the north point of this middle ground. A mid-channel course should be kept past buoys Nos. 4 and 2. No. 4 is a spar buoy, moored in 24 feet of water on the NW. point of the middle ground. No. 2 is a spar buoy, moored in 11 feet of water just above the Belie Isle bridge. A vessel taking the northern channel should, when Windmill Point light is abeam, distant | mile, steer a course W. f S. (S. 86° W.) until close to the Scott Middle Ground Upper End buoy. Pass this buoy, as also buoys No. 4 and No. 2, in mid-channd, leaving them to port, and then through the draw of Belle Isle bridge, after which a course dose to Detroit will clear the spit extending west from Belle isle and marked at its extremity by a red and black horizontally striped buoy mowed in 13 feet water. Leave this uuoy to port, after jtassing which » mid- ohan<~ r I course cmi be taken until near Fighting island. f timlier docks, »t (lock is 365 p 00 fSeet, and ST Barean lias >elow Detroit. lake Erie, the ity. I Detroit river iguals for the moored in 16 le west end of ed and black ) east point of >r the division isle. 1 shonld steer light is abeam een Windmill J shoal water, W. until the id stand SW. 7S until Belle L be kept past , painted red, die ground. 4 and 2. "So. . point of the of water just indmill Point 86° W.) until iss this buoy, n to port, and \ course dose e and marked buoy moored which a mid- DIBECTIONS. MAIN OHAinnSL OONTINXTED. 143 When nearing Fighting island keep a mid-channel course between Fighting island and Michigan until the Ecorse range comes on, when bring it astern and steer S. \ E. (S. 2° E.) between Grassy and Fight- ing islands, until Grassy Island light is abeam. This course passes west of Fighting Island Bed Spar buoy in 11^ feet of water, marking the elbow of the flats at the upper end of Fighting island, and east of Grassy Island Black Spar buoy, marking the elbow of the Grassy Island shoal. When abeam of Grassy Island light the Mamajuda range should come on ; bring it ahead, and steer on it S. f W. (S. 8° W.), pass- ing west of East Bank Bed Spar buoy in llj feet water (marking the east side of the channel and the outer point of Fighting Island bank), when Grassy Island range should come on bearing north; then steer south, this range on astern, until the Grosse Isle North Channel range comes on, when steer on it 8. by W. ^ W. (S. 12° W.) until the Grosse Island South Ohannel range comes on, when bring it astern and steer S. by E. ^ E. (S. 17° E.). This latter range should come on when just west of Fighting Island (lower) Bed Spar buoy in 0^ feet of water, mark- ing the east side of the channel and the outer edge of the bank at the southern end of Fighting island. The range passes about \ mile east of Ballards Beef lightvessel, showing a fixed red light, visible 6 (5f ) miles (fog signal, a bdl), and marking the easterly end of Ballard reef. This course (S. 17° E.) will then carry over and between several 17 and 18 fo.>t spots, west of the red can buoy marking Dougalls rock and to abeam and east of North Limekiln Grossing lightvessel, No. 65, showing a fixed white light (fog signal, a bell), and moored in 15 feet of water at west side of the north end of Limekiln Grossing dredged channel. A similar lightvessel is moored at the south end of the cut on west side of channel in 15 feet water. Between these lightvessels, steer on the Limekiln Grossing range S. 1° E. until abeam of South Limekiln Gross- ing lightvessel. No. 64; here the head of Bois Blanc Island range (Canadian) should come on, when steer on it S. by W. f W. (8. 20° W.) until abeam of the front light of the Canadian Limekiln Crossing range. A near mid-channel course should now be kept until the Amherstburg range is made. It is preferable to keep on the Bois Blanc island side, to clear the New York bowlders marked by a' red spar buoy. An obstruction has been reported as lying 775 yards SE. ^ E. (S. 47° E.) of Bois Blano Bange rear light, and is almost in mid-channeL After passing west of the red spar buoy the Amherstburg range will come on, when bring it astern and stand down the river, heading S. by W. ^ W. (8. 14° W.). Bois Blanc light, fixed white, on the south end of Bois Blano island, visible 14 (16j^) miles, will soon be passed, and below this light the various buoys should be passed, leaving them on their proper sides, the black buoys to the westward. Pontiac shoal, with 17 feet over it, hard bottom, is on the Amherst- burg range, and vessels should pass east of it, resuming the range after [|^F^ftW^^^g^^|Bj^^^; 144 DETROIT BITER. passing, and continue on it until the red buoy oflf Bar point is abeam, when change course to S. J W. (8. 10° W.), and stand down through the deep-water dredged cut to Detroit Biver (Bar Point) lighthouse; pass east of the lighthouse and into lake Erie. The east half only (400 feet) of the cut has been dredged to 21 feet. The east edge of this dredged cut is marked by seven red wooden spars. Bar Point Ughtvessel is moored in 17 feet of water off Bar Point shoal. It is schooner rigged, two masts, no bowsprit. The light is fixed white, shown from three lanterns encircling the foremasthead. It is visible 11^^ (13^) miles. There is a circular, black cage work day mark at the foremasthead and a small black smokestack and fog signal between the masts. The hull is black, with M. 59, Bar Point 8ltoal in white letters on each side. Pog sigaaL— A 6-inch steam whistle sounds a blast of ten seconds every thirty seconds. If the whistle be disabled a bell will be rung by hand. Detroit River (Bar Point) light— The lighthouse is in the mouth of the river and is a conical tower, surmounted by a lantern. The tower and fog-signal house, both brown, on hexagonal pier. The light is fixed white for one minute, followed during the next minute by six consecu- tive white flashes at interval of ten seconds. The light is 55 feet above the lake le^al and visible 12^ {l^) miles. Pog signal— A lO-inch steam whistle gives blasts of five seconds, with silent intervals of twenty-five seoonda. w oint is abeam, [lown through it) lighthouse; half only (400 t edge of this off Bar Point The light is foremasthead. sage work day iiud fog signal r Point 8hoal f ten seconds ill be rung by I the month of a. The tower i light is fixed y six consecu- ^ht is 55 feet ' five seconds, CHAPTER IX. IiAKE ERIE. Lake Erie is the most sonthem of the Great Lakes. The State of Michigan bounds its western shore, and Ohio, Pennsylvania, and New York its southern and southeastern shores. The Province of Ontario, Canada, bounds the northern shore. The lake lies between 41° 20' and 42° 55' N., and between 78° 55' and 83° 30' W. It is nearly elliptical, the m^jor axis, 217 (260) miles in length, lying east.and west. Its greatest breadth north and south is 52 (60) miles, its circumference 573 (660) miles, and its area about 10,000 square miles. Its elevation above the sea level is 572.86 feet, and its surface is 326.25 feet above that of lake Ontario, this great descent being taken up by the Niagara river and falls, which connect the two lakes at the eastern end, its western end being connected with lake Huron by the Detroit river and St. Olair lake and river. There are four important canal systems which connect with this lake: The Erie canal, extending from Buffalo, N. T., to the Hudson river; the Miami and Erie canal, from Toledo to Cincinnati, on the Ohio river; the Ohio and Erie canal, f^om Cleveland to Portsmouth, on the Ohio river, and the WeUand canal, connecting lakes Erie and Ontario, this latter being entirely within the Dominion of Canada. Like lake Michigan, the coast of lake Erie is comparatively free from indentations, and, excepting the western end, it is clear of islands. The shores, of clay and sand, are generally bold and elevated. The meet fertile country is some distance from the banks, except at the western end, where the growth is more luxuriant along the beach, which here is of fine, white sand. The peculiar features of lake Erie are its shallowness and its clayey shores, the depth, excepting East and SE. of Long point, rarely exceed- ing 100 feet. The bed of the lake can be considered as in three di dsions, increasing in depth from the Detroit river to the outlet. The western portion, as far as Pointe Pel^e island, has a level bottom with an average depth of 30 feet. The middle portion, taking in the principal part of the lake to Long point, is also level and from 60 to 70 feet deep. Beyond Long point the depths vary from 210 feet near the point to 40 and 30 feet near the eastern shore. The shallow waters of this lake are easily disturbed by the winds, 1944--NO. 108— 10 145 146 LAKE SBIE. aud, for this reason and the lack of good harbors, it is very dangerous navigbtioD. Loiigcontinued storms, with the wind setting along the lalce in one direction, pile up the water to ieeward with disastrous results. BnfCalo has suffered much from this. The retarn of the wate**" after a storm is often so rapid, especially if the wind changes with it, as to produce powerful currents. On one oooasion the waters burst a passage through Long point, making it an island. The bottom is a light, clayey sediment, which rapidly accumulates from the wearing away of the shores. Along the coast the disintegrating strata are frequently seen forming high cliffs, extending back into elevated plateaus, with rivers cutting channels through them and carrying the excavated matter into the lake. Underground water courses undermine the cliffs, and the waves aid in breaking them down. Landslides are of frequent occurrence and render the water turbid a long distance from shore. This may be seen on both sides of the lake. Hear Cleveland the reeeesion of the coast Hue has been particularly remarkable. From here the terrace oliffb (103 feet high at Cleveland) extend east to Fairport There is an immense commerce on the lake, the Welland caual being the outlet for it to lake Ontario. HABBOBS OF BSF17GB. Sandnsky, for vessels of 17 feet draft; ClOTeland, for vessels of 19 feet draft; Erie, for vessels of 17 feet draft; Bnffolo, for vessels of 23 feet draft; Fort Colbome, for small vessels; Dunkirk, for small vessels; Month of the Detroit river, and possibly Rondeau harbor. ANOHOBAaES. Good anchorage can be found under t9ie lee of pofnx 3 Pel^ also under Long point; between Middle and South Bass islands, as well as under the lee of other islands. VA-yiGtANOS. As a rule, navigatim depth, and this bight affords excellent anchor- age and protection from westerly and northerly winds. The island can generally be approached to J mile excepting off the points, which should be given a wider berth. The channel between Middle and South Bass islands runs east and west, and after passing the SE. point of Middle Bass bends to the NE. and around the north side of Ballast island. This channel carries 3^ to 6 feet water. There is no passage except for light-draft vessels between Ballast island and South Bass. Ballast island, a small circular island, steep-to on its northern face V t rocky, narrow a couical white ite light visible island by trees Ight, is a signal l east and west isels from West aoy and can be >n the NE. side ing islands and by 4^ (5) miles ands, although aany unmarked uth and nearly is 1^ (Ig) miles and SE. points 3stern side, and )S from 3^ to 6 lid-channel and 9 (the shores of land is lA iU). an North Bass, xrow peninsula > the west point id connected to is 2^ (2f ) miles the peninsula, e island can be :cellent anchor- The island can s, which should i runs east and inds to the NE. nnel carries 3^ it-draft vessels s northern face RATTLERNAKE ISLAND SCOTT POINT SHOAL. Ii9 is connected to South Bass isluiKi by Hhoals, through which, and nearer Bullast island, is a narrow channel with 14 feet water. Bnoys. — A black spar buoy is moored in 15 feet of water, rooky bot- tom, at the south side of the eastern entrance to this channel. The south side of the channel extends 650 yards WNW. from this buoy. A black spar buoy is moored in 10 feet of water at the inner end of the channel. Rattlesnake island lies u mile west of the western i>oint of Middle Bass. It is S mile long NW. and SE. Shoals extend J mile off its NW. point. A small detaclicd rock lies nearly at the end of the shoal water. The rest uf the island is steep-to. South Bass island, the largest of the groui*, i>^ south of Middle Bass. Its SE. shore is 3 (.'4) miles long, while the NW. coast is but 1 (IJ) mile. On the north coast is Put in Bay. Its 8W. face is steep-to and affords anchorage and protection from easterly and northeasterly winds. Shoals line the whole SE. coast and from the SE. i)oint extend over i mile to Starve island, and some distance beyond. Beyond this shoal is a small detached spot, with 11 feet over it. Put in Bay is f mile wide and g mile deep. Gibraltar island lies in the western part of the bay. The whole western part of the bay and the eastern side for some distance is shoal, but snug anchorage can be obtained in 3J to 5 fathoms, protected from all winds from the East, South, and SW. Port Orchard point is the west point of the bay. Port Orchard Point buoy, red spar, is moored in 12 feet of water and marks the elbow of a rocky shoal extending 375 yards NE. from the point, and thence 170 yards toward Gibraltar island. The western edge of the shoal lies 140 yards outside the point. Starve Island reef, 400 feet iu diameter, least water 11 feet, lies one mile ENE. of Mouse Island reef. The track of vessels lies between these two shoals. This shoal lies exactly on the range of Green Island light- house and the SW. point of South Bass island. When Green Island lighthouse can be seen open south of South Bass island vessels are clear of the shoal to the southward. Two-thirds of the way from this reef to Starve island is a rocky patch, with 11 feet of water over it. Buoy. — A red nun buoy is moored in 14 feet of water on the SW. end of Starve Island reef. Vessels must pass south of this buoy. Mouse Island reef, least water 12 feet, lies 1 (l^) mile north of Mouse island. Buoy.— A black can buoy is moored in 16 feet of water on the NW. end of this reef. The shoalest wat,er on the reef is 150 yards SW. by W. from the buoy. Vessels must pass north of this bnoy. Scott Point shoal, least water 12 feet, is a rocky shoal on the south of the channel. It is 400 yards wide and from its NW. end stretches toward and halfway to Mouse island, leaving a channel J mile wide . between the shoal and the island. SE. of this shoal is an IS-foot patch J mile long east and west. 160 LAKE BRIB. Buoy.— -A black can btioy is moored in 16 feet o* Tausr on the NH. end of the shoal and lies very close to the track of veswelH thr>ai;h the channel. This buoy should be left well to the southward in passing. Shoftl in South pawMg*. — In the (;hannel leading firom eastward to Green island, South piissage, is a sandy shoal. It extends 1,000 feet in an easterly and westerly direction and 700 feet north and sonth. Depth of water over this area is ftom 17 to 18 feet; it gradually deepens all around to 21 feet. The shoal is marked by a buoy, the bearings ftom which are as follows: Marblehead lighthouse SE. | S. (8. 41° E.); Middle Island lighthouse NE. f N. (N. 41° E.). The buoy is moored SE. | E. from the SW. point of Sonth Bass island and dis- tant therefirom 3^ (3^) miles. Thei« are four detached rocks and one shoal northeasterly of the above shoal within a distance of one mile. Qr«en island, i mile long east and west, is 1 (1^) mile west of the extreme west point of Sonth Bass island. laght.— On the west end of Oreen island, firom a square, gray tower, is shown, 60 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light varied by a red flash every minute, visible 134 i^H) miles. The light is obscured between the bearings SW. by W. (S. 66° W.) and ^(W. by W. (N. 66° W.) by the woods on the island. The range of this with West Sister light NW. by W. | W. (N. 63° W.) passes a mile to the northward of Niagara reef. The light just open of the SW. point of South Bass island passes sonth of Starve Island reef. Open westward of the west end of Battle- snake island, it immsbos west of the Chicken island and east of East Sister island. Kolley ialand, the largest of the United States islands, is 2^ (3^) miles north of Marblehead light. The island is IJ (If) miles north and south and 2§ (3) miles east and west. The NE. end of the island forms a narrow point a mile long. There are many small open bays on the North and SW. coasts of the island; the latter, in which is a wreck, affords anchorage in North and NE. winds. The north bay affords pro- tection from all southerly winds. The East and SB. shores should not be approached to § mile, as shoals extend off in places to nearly that distance. The other part of the island can be approached somewhat nearer. Kelley Island reef is 1,500 yards NE. from the NE. point of Kelley island, with a clear channel between. The I'eef extends ENB. and WSW. for 1 (li) mile and is 600 yards across its widest part, with least water 6 feet. Buoy. — A black nun buoy is moored in 16 feet of water on the east end of this reef. Chill Island shoal, north point, is 1 (1^) mile south of Middle Island lighthouse (Canadian), the international bonndary line passing between. The shoal from its north end extends over a mile SW., and 7aUir on the NH. iitelH t.br>agh the ird ill pasaing. i ttom eastward Ktends 1,(H)0 feet lorth and aoath. Bt; it gradnally I by a buoy, the ithouse SE. I S. 3E.). Tbebaoy B island and dis- bbeasterly of the mile weet of the nare, gray tower, light varied by a light is obeoared )yW.(K56oW.) ^W.(N.63oW.) MB island passes est end of Battle- ad east of East slands, is a£ (S^) ') miles north and r the island forms )pen bays on the rhich is a wreck, h bay affords pro- shores shonld not ses to nearly that )aohed somewhat B. point of Kelley ttends ENB. and ridest part, with water on the east south of Middle dary line passing V a mile SW., and CANADIAN ISLAND!^. 161 flrom its sonthern end a spit extends westward ^ mile. There are rocks above water on the south end of this shoul. Buoy. — A black can buoy is moored in 16 feet, rooky bottom, on the KE. end of the shoal. Tlie water shoals gradually for 1,500 yards &W. of the buoy, where the rocks show above water. CANADIAN ISLANDS. Middle Slater, the western of the Canadian islands, lies on the eighty-third meridian, and is 0^ (11) miles south of the Canadian shore of the lake. It is a small rocky island, | mile NE. and SW. The island oan be approached to ^ mile with safety. Grecian ahoal, with several small shoals, least water 12 feet, lies a mile south of the pier at Colchester on the north shore of the lake. There is deep water between the shoal and shore. CrOloheater reef, a small patch, least water 8 feet, lies 3^ (4) miles SW. by S. of the pier at Oolchenter and 3 (3^) miles offshore. It lies just south of the track of vessels to poiute Pel6e and is marked by a lighthouse. Ught. — Near the SE. end of the reef, from a red lantern on a white hexagonal building, standing on a circular stone pi«x, in shown, 72 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light visible 14 (16|) miles. Fog aignaL — A bell, rung by machinery, gives one stroke every fifteen seconds. Wreck. — ^Tbe wreck of the schooner Adama lies 4^ (5) miles NW. by W. (N. 56° W.) from Colchester Reef light. The wreck has but 2 feet of water over the bow and is marked by a float, with two white lights moored 200 feet due south of it. North Harbor laland lies % (7^) miles ESE. | E. of Middle Sister island. The island is a rock in the middle of a shoal h mile in diameter. ShoaL— At 1 (1^) mile north of North Harbor island is the SE. end of a shoal which extends | mile NE., and is 4 mile broad, with 2 feet least water. Beat Slater laland, | mile south of North Harbor island, is § mile east and west. It lies on a shoal ^ mile wide, which extends east and west for over a mile. Sheala.— Between ^ and | mile NE. of the east point of East Sister are detached shoals of 18 and 7 feet least water; the latter shoal is the farthest out and is ^ mile long ENE. and WSW. Hen laland is 2J (3^) miles SE. by E. of the east end of East Sister. It is a small circular island on a shoal extending i mile east and west, and 4 mile north and south. Big Chicken laland is 1^ (1^) miles SW. of Hen island. It lies on the SW. end of a rocky reef extending J mile NE. from the island. Its average breadth is also J mile. North of the center of this reef are dry rooks. Little Chicken laland is 1^ (1^) miles east of Big Chicken island. 152 LAKE ERIE. It lies toward the southern edge of a rocky reef, with least water 5 feet, near the northern point of the reef. The reef has a breadth of about J mile and extends J mile NW. and 4 mile east from the island. There are 3^ fathoms water between the Ohicken reefs, but the passage should never be attempted. Pointe Pel^e island, the largest of all the islands in lake Erie, is (north point) 6J (74) miles WSW. of PeWe Spit light (the Dummy). The island is rectangular in shape, with an average length of 4^ (5^) miles and a breadth of 3 (3 J) miles. Sheridan point is the NW. point of the island, and between this and Lighthouse point is a bay, which affords anchorage and shelter from southerly and easterly winds. Ves- sels should not shoal under 4 fathoms. Mosquito point, the SW. point of the island, extends to the southward 1 J (If ) miles as a narrow spit. Mill point is the SB. end of the island, and off this point is a detached shoal extending east and \, st IJ (If) miles, with a breadth of J mile. There is a least depth of 13 feet on this shoal. Middle point is between Mill an^ Lighthouse points. Shoals extend a mile northward from Lighthouse point and also line the whole east coast of the island. One mile SB. of Middle point is a 17-foot spot. The northern half of the west coast of the island is bold. Shoals extend off the southern half for about J mile, with two outlying ISfoot spots, the outer one | mile offshore. The southern point of the island has a shoal spit extending from it ^ mile south, and from the east side of this point shoals extend in places to the distance of a mile. Ghickeuolee reef, an extension of this shoal to the eastward for nearly 2 (2^) miles, has only 4 feet of water in the center. Between Ghickenolee reef and Mill Point reef and the shore of the island is a bay, which affords protection from westerly and northerly winds. There is, however, a 17-foot spot and an :'«-foot spot in the middle of the entrance to the bay. Between the south spit point and Middle island are several detached shoals, least water 10 feet, and no vessel should attempt this passage. liifewiaviiig station is at the SB. end of the island near Mill point. Idght — On Lighthouse point, from a white circular lighthouse, is shown, 45 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light, visible 9 (10^) miles. Middle island, 1| (2) miles south of the south point of Pointe Pel^e island, is | mile east and west and i mile broad. It lies north of Qnll Island shoal and the international boundary line is south of it. The island is steep-to. Xiight. — On the east point of Middle island, from a white square lighthouse, is shown, 70 feet above the lake level, a fixed red light, visible 12 (13$) miles. Fcg signal— A hand horn answers signals from vessels. Middle ground. — Lying almost midway between Pointe Pel6e island and Pel^e Spit lights is a most dangerous unmarked shoal. It is just off the track of vessels bound to pointe Pel^e from the West and SW. WEST COAST. 153 last water 5 feet, sadth of about ^ I island. There ) passage should in lake Erie, is t (the Dummy), ength of 4f (5^) 1 the NW. point is a bay, which rly winds. Ves- t, the 8W. point s a narrow spit nt is a detached eadth of J mile, point is between northward from the island. One [lern half of the 16 sonthern half outer one | mile 1 spit extending nt shoals extend an extension of bs only 4 feet of Mill Point reef protection from L7-foot spot and y. Between the led shoals, least ge. near Mill point. Etr lighthouse, is it, visible 9 (10^) point of Pointe It lies north of e is south of it. a white square fixed red light, isels. ante Pel6e island hoal. It is just e West and SW. It is a mile long north and south and ^ mile wide. Least water, 11 feet at lowest lake level. A WSW. and ENE. range of Pointe Pelee Island and Pel^e Spit' lighthouses passes over the center of the shoal. Mid- way between the Middle ground and Pointe Pel^e island is a 16-foot patch. Clearing marks. — By keeping Lighthouse Point light nothing west of SW. by W. (S. 56° W.) and Pel^e Spit light nothing north of E. by N. (N. 79° E.) a vessel will pass to the northward of the shoaL G-mbb reef consists of several 12 and 16 foot rocky patches, lying 2 and 3 miles WNW. of Pel^e Spit lighthouse. The reef has extended a mile to the eastward, with a least depth of 16 feet. This lighthouse bearing east leads clear to the southward of these shoals. Pointe Pel6e and shoals are described on pages 174 and 175. UNITED STATES COAST OF LAKE ERIE. HIOHIOAN. Coast. — ^The west coast of the lake from pointe Mouill^e, the west entrance point of the Detroit river, to Grassy jwint, the west entrance point of the Maumee bay, has a general SW. direction. All this por- tion of the coast has flats extending off it for some distance. Several rivers and creeks empty into the lake, and the shore is generally low and marshy. The 3-fathom line is If (2) miles SE. of pointe Mouill^e, but at Stony point it approaches the shore to 4 mile. To the west of Stony point is a bight filled with flats, in which is the village of Brest. At 3^ (4) miles SSW. of Brest is the Baisin river, at the mouth of which is Monroe harbor. Monroe harbor is a part of the Baisin river about 2^^ (2^) miles above the dredged channel which forms the outlet into the lake. The mouth is protected by two piers. The channel is 4,000 feet long and 100 feet wide. At present the depth of water over the bar and through- out the greater part of the channel to the wharves is about 8 feet. Reports state that it is impossible to charter a vessel drawing over 7 feet for Monroe. Monroe light — On a crib at the outer end of the north pier of the entrance to the channel leading into the Baisin river, from a square tower on a white dwelling, is shown a fixed red light, 46^ feet above the lake level, and visible 11^ (13) miles. Directions. — ^The best water is found by standing in, in line with the straight (inner) section of the north pier WJJW. J W. (N. 69° W.). Cantion. — Southwest gales lower the water at the west end of the lake from 2 to 3 feet, and KE. gales raise it the same amount. South of Monroe the flats extend farther from the shore, and almost fill thiftt i)ortion of the lake west of the meridian of Monroe light and Oedar point. Strangers should not enter this area except on the ranges and in the axis of the channels. The boundary line between Michigan j!rr?S5s^i^£ aas^i:i£'.^^^asaa&igai8S^-;*rr,iii^"^;ari^JiaLii^sa«-fc-i» 154 LAKE EBIK. and Ohio is at the month of Ottawa river, western portion of Mftamee bay. OHIO. Mawnee bay, between Grassy and Cedar points, is filled with flats. Maomee river empties into it, and a short distance within the mouth of the river is the city of Toledo. Depths in the channel— January, 1896 : Depth in the New Straight channel from the river to deep water of lake Brie, marked by buoys and range lights, 17 feet on axis and ranging from 16 to 20 feet on the sides of channel. Dry dock.— There is a dry dock at Toledo, 426 feet in length over aJ^ 60-foot gate, and with a depth on sill of 16 feet. Buoys.— A black gas buoy, showing a fixed white light, marks the 9B. side of the entranoe to Stort^ght channel, Maumee bay, and a red rmn buoy marks the NW. side of the entrance. The channel in is marked by black spar buoys to port, and red spar buoys to starboard in entering. A red spar buoy is moored in 16 feet of water on the 'SW. bank of the channel, opposite the middle of the pile work, to show the extreme width of the channel. LIGHTS. A fixed red light is shown from a lantern suspended from the red spar buoy No. 30, marking the extreme inner end of the straight channel. Turtle island. On Turtle island, at the entrance to the bay, from a square yellow tower, attached to a dwelling, a fixed white light, visible 12^ ^l^) miles, is exhibited 50 feet above the lake level. The light bearing S. by B. (S. 11° E.) is obscured by the chimney to the dwelling. HAinC&B BA.Y BANQBB. yur^in beacon.— On the south bank, from a white dwelling on a crib, at the elbow of South and Long reaches, a fixed white light is exhibited 274 fe®* above the lake level. East beacon.— At 1,000 feet northeastward of the Main beacon, from a brown shaft on a crib, is shown a fixed white Ught 42 feet above the lake level. This light shows up the dredged channel to the southwest- ward, and als>o in the direction of the outer end of the New Straight channel, over an arc of 60«> between the bearings 8SW. I W. (S. 32° W.) and W. | S. (S- 83° W.), the entrance to the channel lying about midway between, or on the bearing S. 58«> W. South beacon.— At 1,000 feet to the southward of the Main beacon, from a brown shaft on a crib, is shown a fixed white Ught 43 feet above the lake level. These lights form the following ranges : Main Beacon and South Beacon lights.— Bange for the Old chan- nel from Turtle island to the New Straight channel. ICain Beacon and Bast Beacon Ughts— Range (back) for inner part of the Straight channel. Ion of Mftninm Uled with flat& khin tbe mouth e New Straight urked hy buoys 9 20 feet on the length over all, [ght, marks the bay, and a red ) channel in is to starboard in ter on the NW. trk, to show the •om the red spar light channel, the bay, from a ite light, visible )yel. The light to the dwelling. elling on a crib, ght is exhibited ain beacon, from i feet above the the sonthwest- le New Straight W. i W. (S. 320 mel lying abont he Main beacon, ;ht 43 feet above br the Old ohan- (baok) for inner I HAU: jA.r — ^DmECTIONS. 166 Eaat Beacon ftnd Main Boaoon lig^ta.- of the New Straight channel from the lake. -Bange for the outer part IfANHATTAN BANGS LIGHTS. Front — The front beacon stands on a platform 8 feet above Ae water on a substructure of red iron piles in 3 feet of water mH) miles SW. by W. J W. (S. 58° W.) from the front light of Maumee Bay ranges. The light is fixed red and 28 feet above the lake level. Rear.— The rear beacon is a skeleton structure, except the section immediately below the lantern is inclosed, and is 3,470 feet SW. by W. | W. (S. 58° W.) from the front beacon. The light is flied red and 53 feet above the lake level. Each beacon is a square, white, pyramidal structure, with green win- dow shutters, and is surmounted by an octagonal lantern with red roof. Each light is visible from BSE. | E. (S. 77° B.), through south, west, and north to N. by E. J E. (N. 13° B.), or 135° to the northward and 136° to the southward of the range. Directions.— The entrance of the channel is 2^^ (2J) miles B. i N. (N. 87° E.) of Turtle Island light, and ia marked by a black can and a red nun buoy. Keep in over 3 fathoms of water until the buoys are picked up or the beacons ^East and Main) come in range S. 58° W. Stand in on the range until up to buoy No. 14, then haul a little to the westward to pass the cribs and pile work. When up to buoy No. 16 bring the Manhattan range on and steer between the buoys until past inner end of Channel Buoy TSo. 29. From this point steer for the draw of the Wheeling and Lake Erie Railroad bridge, and passing Middle Ground Buoy No. 34, steer for the draw of the Pennsylvania Railroad bridge and to the docks. Seventeen feet can be carried in on these directions. Coaat— Locust point is 12J (14) miles BE. by B. J B. of Cedar point, the shore between receding slightly from the line joining the points. AD this part of the coast is bordered by flats, extending off about If (2) miles. At Locust point the flats widen and err? id 5J (6) miles in the direction of Niagara reef, leaving a passage of on. Ale iv width between the shoals and reef, but as there are several ro ky, detached shoals to the westward of the reef, no vessel should attempt to pass inside of Niagara reef. iriagani reeC with least depth of 7 f(^" water, is J mile long east and west and i mile north and south. It lies near the track of vessels from West Sister island to Green island, but it is marked by a buoy and can be easily avoided. Buoy.— A black can buoy is moored in 14 feet of water on the NE. side of the reef. Coaat— Scott point is 12J (14) miles B. by 8. of Locust point, the shore between receding and forming a bight ^ (5) miles deep. The flat extends ^ (fl) miles to the eastward tcom Locust point, then turns sharply to the S8W. and approaches the shore to a mile, ther. extends to the eastward, filling the bight between Locust point and Moore point, Mi ■is9!i5S5*^.£X^K-i^j;ii.-"4i:iei^-:-i:-.'"^J^i-^A"Ai*iimJS&^ •'ds^^. 166 LAKE EBIE. the west point of Catawba island. Between Moore and Scott points, Catawba island is bluff and steep-to. Just north of Scott point is Mouse island, connected to the point by a flat. Port Clinton is at the head of the bight between Locust and Scott points. Depths.— The chanusl has been dredged to a depth of 10 feet for a width of 100 feet between the piers; the harbor in front of the wharves has been dredged for a width of 200 feet and to a depth of about 10 feet; the bar has been dredged outside to a depth of 10 feet. Light — On the west pier, 20 feet from the outer end, is shown a fixed red light, 25 I'eet above the lake level and visible 8 miles. The light is shown ftom an octagonal lantern surmounting a square pyramidal structure, with gallery at the top, on a platform of piles. The structure is yellow, with white trimmings and brown foundation. Mouse Island reef, least water 12 feet, lies one mile north of Mouse island. Buoy. — A black can buoy is moored in 16 feet of water on the NW. end of this reef. The shoalest water on the reef is 150 yards SW. by W from the buoy. Vessels must pass north of this buoy. Starve Zdland reef, 400 feet in diameter, least water 11 feet, lies one mile BNE. of Mouse Island reef. The track of vessels lies between these two shoals. This shoal lies exactly on the range of Green Island lighthouse and the SW. point of South Bass island. When Green Island lighthouse can be seen open south of South Baas island vessels are clear of the shoal to the southward. Two-thirds of the way from this reef to Starve island is a rocky patch, with 11 feet of water over it. Buoy. — A red nun buoy is moored in 14 feet of water on the SW. end of Starve Island reef. Vessels must pass south of this buoy. Scott Point shoal, least water 12 feet, is a rocky shoal on the south of the channel. It is 400 yards wide and from its NW . end stretches toward, and halfway to, Mouse island, leaving a channel ^ mile wide between the shoal and the island. Buoy. — A black can buoy is moored in 16 feet of water on the NE. end of thd shoal and lies very close to the track of vessels through the channel. This buoy should be left to the southward in passing. Shoal in South passage —Two shoal spots and four detached rocks lie easterly of Scott Point shoal. The most southerly one, a sandy shoal, lies W. f S. (S. 82° W.) from Carpenter point, Kelley island, dis- tant about 2tV (2t%) miles. It is marked by a buoy. Coast— Scott point (eastward) to Cedar point: This portion of the coast is much indented. Flats extend off the east side of Catawba i«land | mile. Off West harbor, which is tilled with shoals, flats and rocky shoals extend in a spit nearly l-^ (IJ) miles, with 4 feet near its end ; off East harbor, also filled with shop la, flats extend | mile. They then near the shore, and close to the United States life-saving station west of Marblehead lighthouse the shore is steep-to. Sand point is IJ (2) I Scott points, Scott point is »cust and Scott of 10 feet for a of the wharves )th of about 10 feet. 3 shown a fixed 8. xnting a square itform of piles. »wu foundation, north of Mouse ;er on the NW. ) yards SW. by oy. II feet, lies one Is lies between »f Green Island When Green 8 island vessels >f the way from jf water over it. on the SW. end buoy. )al on the south ' . end stretches Del i mile wide iter on the NE. iels through the passing. ' detached rocks [y one, a sandy jlley island, dis- 8 portion of the ide of Oatawba ihoals, flats and 'eet near its end; lile. They then ng station west d point is IJ (2) 8ANDU8KY BAT. 157 miles south of Marblehead lighthouse. Between these two points flats extend across to Cedar point, filling the entrance to Sandusky bay. North of this portion of the coast are numerous islands which reach almost to the north shore of lake Erie and among which are numer- ous ahoals. These islands and shoals are described on pages 147-153. Marblehead light. — On the northeastern end of the Marblehead peninsula is a fixed white light, shown 67^ feet above the lake level and visible 14 (16) miles. The lighthouse is a white conical tower; the dwelling, light buff, is westward of the tower. Sandusky bay forms a natural harbor, separated from lake Erie on the north and NW. by Marblehead peninsula, and on the east by Cedar point, which is also a peninsula. This bay, which is from 8 to 12 feet deep, is protected from the eSect of storms by a bar extending across the entrance, except for a short distance where the channel passes Cedar point. The depth on the bar is from 4 to 6 feet, excepting where dredged. Cnrrenite. — The currents from the eastward set toward Marblehead point, being deflected at times so that they enter Sandusky bay between Marblehead and Cedar points, in the channel and across the flats; then, flowing eastward in the bay, they follow the sast shore line and set southward until they reach the extreme south shore, when they are deflected to the westward. ^'ohnson island, a large island, lies just within Sand point in the northern part of the bay. Sandusky river empties into the WW. part of the bay, 12^ (14^) miles by channel from lake Erie. Fremont, at the head of navigation, is 16g (18) miles from the bay. Eight feet can be carried to Fremont. Sandusky, at the southeastern end of the bay, has numerous wharves and railroad docks. Channel — The channel consists of an outer channel across the bar at the entrance to the bay; depth varies from 15 to 18 feet; a natural channel between Sand Point and Cedar Point shoals, and an inner dredged channel in one straight reach leading up to the Baltimore and Ohio Eailroad docks in the city of Sandusky. The channel is 2^ (SJ) miles long, and the bottom and banks are sandy until halfway through the straight cut, where both ate soft. The dredged channel is 200 feet in width and dredged to 17 feet depth at mean lake level, but has shoaled some in places. The spar buoys on the banks of the dredged part of the channel stand within a few feet of the edge. There is a dred -yed channel 89 feet wide, with 17 feet depth at mean lake level, extending in front of the docks to the west end of the city. BUOYS. Outside buoy, No. 2, is a red can buoy in 13 feet of water. Outer Bar buoy, No. 4, is a red 8i)ar buoy in 13 feet of water. Icner Bar buoy, No. 6, is a red spar buoy in 13 feet of water. ^^tr-'-SiS,«j::i.St5^a7'i^-i..-:i^ .fMT:X'.-^U:^SSiXS^-i'''- 158 LAKE BBIX. C/': - North Shoal (onter) buoy, Ifo. 8, is a red spar buoy iu 14 feet of water. So«th Sho«l bnoy, No. 1, is a blaok spar buoy in 13^ feet of water. North Shoal (innor) bnoy, Na 10, is a red spar buoy in 14 feet of water. Sand Point bnoy, No. 12, is a red spar buoy in 13 feet of water. Cedar Point bnoy, Nol 3, is a black spar buoy in 12 feet of water. Turning bnoy, Na 14, is a red spar buoy iu 14 feet of water, and marks the turning point into the New Straight channel. Bntranoa to Straight Ohannal (outer) buoy, Na 5, is a black spar buoy in 14 feet of water on the east side of the entrance to the dredged ehannel. Bntranoe to Straight Channel (enter) bnoy, No. 16, is a red nun buoy in 15 feet of water on the west side of the entrance to the dredged ohannol and of the SJS. bank of the deep hole. Channel buoys. — The Straight channel is marked by tbur black apar aind three red spar buoys, and the -^ Ehid of Channel (inner) bnoy, No. 24, is a red spar buoy in 13 feet of water, marking the west side of the inner entrance to the Stittight ohanneL Dock Channel bnoya.'^iT buoys mark the channel extending along the city docks. UOHXS. Cedar Point range (front). — On the crib at the outer edge of Cedar point, 000 feet NE. of the main (rear) light, is a fixed red light 28^ feet above lake level, and visiUe 7^ (8^) miles. The light is shown ft-om a white building on a crib and is moved troax time to time eo oori«spond with the [Rifting of the Hue of best water at ihe ovter bar. This light shoald not be approached nearer than ^ mile on the nuige, nor passed, entering, nearer than 600 fieet. Sear (mate). — On Oedar pdnt is a fixed white light 48^ feet above the lake level and visible 12$ (14^) miles. The light is shown fbem a low white tower on a dwelling. Sireotione. — The Outside buoy. No. 3, may be approached firam the eiistward on any course between NW. ti.nd BE. by E. It is just to the northward of the Cedar Point range line. From it steer SW. | W (S. 48° W.), on the rani^ past North Shoal (outer) buoy^, No. 8, to South Shoal bu <- No < , tbMi haul to the westward and steer a course to carry between-. Cedar Point buu", No. 3, and Turning buoy, No. ?.4. When abreast t f No. 14 haul u. ^^rt for the entrance to the straight chaunel between J>uoy8 Nob. 5 and 16, and stew S. hy W. J W. (8. 17° W.) for the City Hall tower. There are buoys on each side of this channel. STBAIOHT CHANNEL BANO£. Front — A fixed white light, 33^ feet above the lake level, is shown from & square tower attached to dwelling, yellow, standing (m square T '^siJawSts-; ■.Mttifii^etiiit. I >y in 14 feet of feet of water. )y in 14 feet of et of water, feet of water, of water, and 5, is a black sntrance to the 6, is a red nun to tlie dredged four blaoli spar bttoy in 13 feet to iho StirtJght inel ar. Thi8 light ige, nor passed, i; 48| feet above 8 shown trwm a taohed from the It is just to the steer 8W. | W buoy> No. 8, to d steer a oonrae tg buoy, No. J4. to the straight W. i W. (8. 17® Mh side of this tevel, ia shown iding cm square T HUBON — ^VERMILLION. 159 red crib. The crib Is in 6J feet of water, about i mile NNW. ^ W. (N. 32° W.) from Oedar Point lighthouse on the northerly prolongation of the axis of the Straight channel. Rear.— A fixed white light, 50 feet above the lake level, is shown from a square pyramidal yellow tower on a square red crib. The light- house is 1,S00 feet N. by E. i E. (N. 17° B.) from the front light. The light is visible 12i^ (l4) miles. Each light illamnates an arc of 270° between S8E. J E. (S. 28° E.) and NE. by E. J B. (K 62° E.) through east and south, or 45° to the westward of the range, the remainder of the illuminated arc being to the eastward of the range and showing into the lake. Coast— From Oedar point to Huron lighthouse the coast trends SB. for 81 (9J) miles. SB. of Cedar point the shoal bank approaches the shore, and the S-fathom line is less than J mile off shore. ShoaL- A rocky shoal of 18 feet lies f mile off shore aiid 1§ (IJ) mile NW. of Huron lighthouse; it has 4 to 4^ fathoms around it Huron is at the mouth of the Huron river. Piers have been built and the bar dredged,; width between the piers, 125 feet The piers extend NE. ^ N. Depth.— Chaanel dredged through bar at entrance to depth of 18 feet in August, 1896. Between piers 17 feet depth is maintained over nearly ftiU widl^i. Shifting sands cause depths to vary from time to time. Light— Twenty feet tram the end of the west pier a fixed white light is shown from a brown skeleton tower 4^4 feet above the lake level. It is visible llf (13J) mUes. Direddons.- Keep in 5 fiAthoms until the light is made out, when bring it to bear ahead SW. J S. (S. 39© W.) and stand in between the piers. Ooaat— Yermiffion lighthouse is 8J (9^) miles E. by N. of Huron ttghthoase, the shore between receding to tiie southward and forming a BlMOIew bight A short distance to the eastward ot the head of the Wght the flat leaves the riwre again and oxtwids ia a spit for nearly a mile; it then follows the shore at the distance of nearly | mile. Venuillion is at the month of tJie Vermillioii river. The bar has been improv*^ from time to time by the building of piers and dredging. Width between the piers 130 feet Direction^f the piers, N. J W. (N.30W.). Bar.— .The depth between the piers at Vermillion varies less than at most other places on thr lake. The depth in the oUannel at mean- water level is from 12 to 14 feet. In l^ovember, 1896, 10| feet, mean k^e level, was found m the shore to I city of Lorain, ktoral condition th of the river, 8 and dredging. )ier8 NW. The )th of 18 feet at hess depths to d, 47 feet above ite light, shown B above. )t from the front vertically. The [e level, and are e foundation of 'ange comes on, ) the harbor. S. for 8 (9^) miles than ^ mile from als all around to. ds around to the iland Pier lights, lies in 6 fathoms end of the west eiiace to naviga- n) is irregularly which was orig' '^as croolted, and e river has been ter constructed, >f refuge. )er starts from • ar and 5,960 feet west of the west ]>ier of the present channel. Tliis arm rnuK iutu the lake nearly north a distance uf 3,130 feet, where it is Joined to the brealc- water proper. The west brealcwuter io nearly i)nrallel to the shore and is 4,030 feet long. At a point 200 feet from its eastern end a spur 100 feet long runs at right angles, breaking the force of the heavy seas and currents which run along the breakwater during northwesterly gales. These currents add greatly to the difficulty of taking vessels into the harbor. The east breakwater commences on the prolongation of the west arm, leaving an opening of 600 feet. It is intended to build 3,6 feet over next iu size, I; the third is de of the end sower, 35J feet lately red aud ds. The light , 10-inch steam t interval fifty- )he East break- ibove the lake he east break- :er end, from a the lake level, fid, from a simi- Ml light, visible east pier light Lgh the opening long the break- ice. B. for 2^ (284) of ^ mile, newhat farther )ach within one I river was orig- 'ed from time to B is now nsnally t. Direction of e piers fi*om the est pier; some- bar also forms. 1895, to 18 feet J. ;he inner end of Note. — The life-saving .station keeper reports as follows, November, 180"): The only dauyer to navigation at or near I'airport is the natural formation of sand bars whicli o«^curs each year, wliii;h, on aeeount of the ext i»!uiely low stage of the water, are dangerous in entering the harbor. The outside bar, l,li(M) feet from tlie end of piers, has only 12 feet over it in places, but by keei)ing well to the eastward in entering, masters will avoid slioal spots. The inside bar is nmch worse, there being only 8 or 10 feet of water. The bar is about 00 feet from tlie end of the piers. There is a dredge at work cutting a channel from iu range with the east pier, extending west about 75 feet, with a IT^-foot depth. In entering the harbor, unless pei tectiv ' iliar with the channel, it would be advisable to take a tug. LIGHTS Fairport — On the bluff on the east side ni the month of Grand river, from a conical gray tower, is shown, 10L\^ feet above the lake level, a fixed white light, visible 10 (18^) miles. Range (front). — Twenty-one feet from the outei- end of the east pier, from a square pyramidal tower, brown below and white above, is shown, 37 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light, visible llj (1.3) miles. Range (rear). — Near the shore end of the east pier, 1,120 feet in the rear of the front light, from a brown, triangular, pyramidal skeleton tower are shown three lights, 4 feet apart and placed vertically. The lights are red, white, red. The middle light (white) is 52 feet above the lake level. The lights form a range for entering the harbor. Directions. — Keep in over 5 fathoms until the range comes on, when stand iu on the range and between the piers into the harbor. Coast — Fairport to Ashtabula : The coast between these ports trends ENE. for 234 (203) miles. The 3-fathom line is less than .> mile ott" shore, excejit jnst west of Ashtabula, where there is 17 feet at this distance Ashtabula is at the mouth of the Ashtabula river. Originally the bar at the mouth of the river had but 2 feet of water over it, and the rock bottom was but 9 feet below the surface of the lake. The river has been improved from time to time by the building of piers and dredg- ing. Width between piers, 213 feet; direction of piers, N. ^ B. Depths. — The following depths of water have been reported over the bar at the entrance to Ashtabula, May 15, 1896 : On line of west pier, 15-Jj, to 17 j% feet. On line of center of channel, 16/o to 17-i^rt^ feet. On line of east pier, 15j% to 16,% feet. A channel 20 feet deep and 75 feet wide has been dredged along the west pier. Vessels will find the best water along the west pier. Shifting sands cause these depths to vary from time to time. Life-saving station is ou the beach, west side of the entrance to the river. ' -RB5;^SiW«6**»tt7i^*a*^i«^ 164 LAKE ERIK. KANOE LIGHTS. Ashtabula (front).— On the west pier, 27 J feet from tlie onter end, from a Hqimrepyramklul tower, brown below and white above, is shown a fixed white light, 35^ feet above the lake level and visible llj (13) miles. Pierhead (rear).— Near tlie shore end of the west pier, 1,500 feet in the rear of the front light, from a brown, triangular, pyramidal skeleton tower are shown three lights-red, white, red-placed vertically and 4 feet apart. The middle light (white) is 52 feet above the lake level. The lights form a range for entering the harbor. Pog signal— At Ashtabula light station the fog signal is a 6incli steam whistle, which sounds as follows: Blast three seconds, alternate silent intervals of twelve and forty-two seconds. Directions.— Keep in over 5 fathoms until the range comes on, when stand in on the range, between the piers into the harbor. Coast.— Ashtabula to Conneaut: Between these ports the course continues BNE. for 11^ (13^) mile.s, and the 3-fathom line is nowhere at a greater distance than i mile off shore. Conneaut, at the mouth of the Conneaut river, is very near the boundary line between Ohio and Pennsylvania. The river had an original depth of 2 feet over the bar. The bar is being improved and will have a width of 200 feet between the piers. Direction of the west pier is N. by W. 4 W. The railroad co .i' any h:\» repaired the old piers to some extent and dredged the entrar l j tc 1. feet. Shifting sands cause the depths to vary from time t*: time. LIGHTS. Conneaut.— On the bluff, just west of the harbor, from a square pyramidal tower, brown below and white above, is shown a fixed white light, 69 feet above the lake level and visible 114 (13) miles. Pierhead.— On the west pier, 25 feet from the outer end, from two white uprights, is shown, 20 feet above the lake level, a fixed white Directions.— When in 5 fathoms bring the Pierhead light to bear 8. byE. J E. (S. 14° E.) and stand in on this bearing and between the piers. PENNSYLVANIA. Coast.— Just eastward of Conneaut is the boundary line between Ohio and Pennsylvania. From Conneaut to Presque Isle peninsula the coast trends ENB. for 19^ (22^) miles. The shore can be approached anywhere in this stretch to i mile. The depth at this distance is gen- erally from 5 to 6 fathoms, except in the first 4^ (5) miles, where it is 4 fathoms. Nearly a mile NW. from the mouth of Crooked creek and f mile offshore is a 3^-fathom spot. Presque Isle peninsula trends NNE., gradnally bending to the eastward, and, widening, protects Erie harbor fifom the north and west. I ii "If I m tlie onter end, e above, is shown d visible llj (13) pier, 1,B00 feet in i^raniiilal skeleton i vertically and 4 the lake level. sifrnal is a 6-inch jccouds, alternate fe comes on, when bor. ports the course m line is nowhere is very near the Fhe river had an ing improved and ection of the west } some extent and use the depths to or, from a square lown a fixed white ;) miles. iter end, from two jvel, a fixed white lad light to bear S. ; and between the idary line between B Isle peninsula the Ban be approached tiis distance is gen- miles, where it is 4 rooked creek and | lly bending to the bhe north and west. i F IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 2.2 I.I 1^ 2.0 1.8 1.25 1.4 III 1.6 - ^ 6" ► Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 873-4503 A SLtf 15' 6^ CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. ERIE. 165 The peninsula is much indented on its south shore, and in it are sev- eral small lakes. Tlie west shore of the peninsula should not be approached within | mile. Misery bay, at its SE. end, is filled with flats. Presque Isle light.— On the northern shore of Presque Isle penin- sula, 400 feet from the lake, from a square, red tower, attached to a dwelling, is shown, 50 feet above the iake level, a light, flashing alter- nately red and white, the interval between the flashes being ten sec- onds. The light is visible 13 (15) miles. When the trees are in leaf this light is partially obscured in the bight at the entrance to Erie harbor. Brie harbor (Presque Isle bay), protected by Presque Isle penin- sula, has been artificially improved. Outside of the 3-fathom line it is over 15 (2) miles long by a mile broad, the width being somewhat contracted by a spit extending into the harbor from the middle of tlie south shore of Presque Isle peninsula. It is the finest natural harbor on the lake, and has accommodation for a large number of vessels. Erie, on the south shore of the lake, is en a bluff, and has a large number of docks and wharves. Improvements.— The present works consist of (1) the south break- water, extending northerly from the main shore; (2) a pier on the south side of the entrance channel, extending easterly from the breakwater; (3) a pier on the north side of the entrance channel, parallel to the south pier and 350 feet distant, and (4) a catch sand jetty, built about 3,000 feet north of the north pier. This jetty did not serve its purpose and has received no repairs since its construction. Depth in the channel— In January, 189G, the depth of water was not less than 18 feet at mean lake level, or not less than 16^ feet at low water for a channel width of not less than 250 feet. Currents. — Southwest gales cause a strong incurrent through the channel and NE. gales a strong outcurrent. Buoys. — A red can buoy is moored in 18^ feet of water on the pro- longation of the inner face of the north pier and marks the northern side of the entrance to the channel. A black spar buoy is moored in 16 feet of water on the prolongation of the south pier and 250 yards cut- aide of the end of the north pier. This buoy is 350 yards witMu the outer edge of the spit extending along tho south side of the entrance channel. The outer edge of this spit is south of the north outer buoy. There are six other buoys (red to starboard and black to port) marking the channel in entering. The inner buoy, on the north bank, is a gas buoy, red, showing a fixed white light. Life-saving station.— There is a life-saving station on the middle of tlie north pier, adjoining the light station. LIGHTS. Brie.— Eastward of Erie harbor, on a high bluff, from a conical tower, is shown, 128 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light, visible 17 J (20) miles. 166 LAKE EKIE. The light is obacnred by trees on Presque Isle peninsula through the greater part of the arc between the bearing SE. by E. ^ E. (S. 62° E.) and East. Presque Isle (north) pierhead.— On the north pier, 30 feet from the outer end, from a square, white, pyramidal tower with brown trimmings, is shown, 40 feet above the lake level, a fixed red light, visible Hi (13) miles. With Erie Range No. 1 in line bearing SW. by W. J W. (S. 62° W.) it forms a range for approaching the piers. Fog signal.— At this station a bell is struck by macliiuery every twenty seconds. ERIE UANGE. No. 1 (front). — On the north pier, 8 feet from the west end, from a white octagonal lantern on a square white tower, is shown, 21 lieet above the lake level, a fixed wliito light, visible 9^ (lOf ) miles. Note. — After passing tliis light bring it in range astern witli No. 2, rear, bearing NE. by E. (N. 56° E.). This range carries through the best water in the dredged channel into deep water of the harbor. No. 2 (rear).— NE. by E. (N. 56° E.), 908 feet from No. 1 light, is a fixed white light, 46 feet above the lake level. The light is suspended from a white mast with a round black disk, 5J feet in diameter, above the lantern. Erie harbor. — Shoal. — North of the elevator 300 feet there is a W- foot shoal. Directions. — Coming from the westward, Erie Main light (fixed white) will probably be made out first, and then Presque Isle light (flashing red and white). This latter light can be approached to one mile and Presque Isle peninsula rounded at that distance. When Erie Main light (fixed white) bears S. J E. (S. 6° E.), steer for it on this bear- ing until the range, Presque Isle pierhead (fixed red) and Erie range No. 1 (fixed white) come in line bearing SW. by W. ^ W. (S. 62° W.); run in on this range, passing south of the red can buoy on the end of the shoal extending from the north pier, and remembering that the outer black spar buoy No. 1 is not on the outer end of the spit ou the prolongation of the south pier, but halfway between tlie outer end of the spit and the outer end of the south pier. After })assing Erie Range light No. 1 , bring light and Erie Range No. 2 (fixed white) in range astern, bearing is jy E. (N. 56° E.) ; keep this range on astern and run in between the buoys in*^o deep water of the harbor. Approaching from the eastward, Erie Main light (axed white) will be made out first. It should be approached ou a SW. (nothing to the west- ward) bearing until the range SW. by W. J W. (S. 02° W.) comes on, when proceed in as directed above. Coast— From Erie to Dunkirk the coast trends NE. by E. for 38 (43|) miles. The shore can be approached anywhere to J mile, except one mile NE. of Van Buren point, where a spit extends from the shore l*<^^?)l^fci»t wide, and extends 700 yards SW. and NE. Least water, 13 feet, is 400 feot SW. of the buoy. There is a small 16-foot detached spot a little eastward of the north end of the shoal. Buoy.— A red and black horizontally striped can buoy is moored in 13 feet of water near the NE. end of the sho?!, Buffalo, on Buffalo creek, is at the NB. end of lake Erie, where it contracts to form the Niagara river. It extends along the river for some distance, and on the opposite shore is Fort Erie. Improvements.— The object of the improvements is to protect the entrance to Buffalo harbor, the south shore of Buffalo creek, ^nd to form an outer hnrbor of refuge. The improvements are; North and south piers at the entrance to the creek (completed); masonry sea wall (completed); sand-catch or pile pier, and breakwater and shore arm. The sand catch extends into the lake at a point 8,000 feet southward of the south pier. The breakwater, commencing about on a line of the south pier extended, lies parallel to and J mile from the shore. This breakwater has its full length of 7,600 feet. The shore arm of the break- water is intended to cover the opening between the south end of the main breakwater and the shore, leavi'igr a passageway for vessels. Some 1,150 feet at the outer end of this shore arm had been completed, but in October, 1893, it was so badly wrecked by a storm that no attempt has been made to repair it. Depths.— Twenty-three feet can be carried into the outer harbor. The Buffalo river and Blackwell canal are maintained by the city on the basis of an 18-foot depth at low water, as established by the city, which rNW. to Stur- f the coast is f a luile. Off iiul 1 (li) mile loal extends J oint the coast ,s for lOi (113) El little west of (f Buffalo Uar- .ccoinit of two burg, it should > coast changes mile north and 15 feet. ier on the NW. m the buoy. 2j\-) miles SW. akwater. The . Least water, 3-foot detached y is moored in Erie, where it g the river for to protect the sek, ^nd to form entrance to the d-catch or pile feet southward on a line of the iie shore. This rm of the break- outhendof the • vessels. Some completed, but }hat 710 attempt e outer harbor. y the city on the J the city, which NIAGARA RIVER. 169 Actual depth allows would give about 19 feet at mean lake level, about 10 feet draft. Dry docks. — There are four docks, with lengths over all of 390, 295, 348, and 349 feet; widths of gates, 4(5, 40, 58J, and 45 feet; depths (»f sills, 14, llA, 9, and 14 feet. The 340-foot dock is to be lengthened to 400 feet, and Avill have a depth over sill of 17 feet. BTJOYS AT THE KNTRANOE TO THE NIAGARA RIVER. Horseshoe reef. — A black spar buoy is moored in 17 feet of water and marks the south end of Horseshoe reef, lying between Middle reef and Buffalo. It also marks the east side of the entrance to the Emerald channel. Emerald channel. — A red can buoy is moored in 14 feet of water and marks the north end of the Middle reef and the south side of the northern entrance to Emerald channel. Middle reef. — A black spar buoy is moored in 13 feet of water and marks the west point of Middle reef. Shoal water makes out from the Canadian shore opposite for more than one-third the way across, leaving a channel about \ mile wide. Bird Island reef. — A black spar buoy is moored in 14 feet of water and njarks the western point of a reef making out from Black Rock Harbor piei, near its upper end. There is from 4 to 9 feet of water between the buoy and the pier; 17 feet in the (;hannel between this and the buoy opposite. Limekiln reef. — A red nun buoy is moored in 14 feet of water, 700 yards from the Canadian shore and nearly opposite Bird Island Reef buoy. It marks the eastern point of a reef with 8 to 10 feet of water on it. The range from this buoy to the west shore at the head of Narrows marks the west side of the channel. Southeast shoal. — A black spar buoy is mooi-ed in 13 feet of water, about 100 yards SE. of the line of the Niagara River range lights, and shows the limit of the channel above the line. Port Erie point. — A red nun buoy is moored in 10 feet of water on the Canadian side of the river, and shows the width of the navigable channel west of the Buffalo Waterworks crib. Buoy. — A red nun buoy (Fort Erie Point buoy) is moored in 19 feet of water, 1^ (If) miles N. by W. J W. of Buffalo Breakwater light. LIGHTS. Buffalo. — On the south pier, 342 feet from the outer end, from an c»ctagODal gray tower, is shown, 74 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light visible 14 J (10 J) miles. Buffalo breakwater. — On a crib behind the north end of the break- 170 LAKE ERIE. water, from a square white structure, is shown, 41^ feet above the lake level, a fixed red light visible llj (13) miles. Fog signal. — On the same crib is a brown fog-signal house alongside the lighthouse. The fog signal is a 10-inch steam whistle, which sounds as follows: Blast three seconds, silent interval fifty-seven sec- on£ tering. if Kingsville ifter leaving ivhite square light, visible ier in a shoal to the south- pointe Pel6e. ig the coast into the lake nd the point, eastern side shelter from lis side of the !^) miles. It L to the west- jpit is i mile it. Near the i. Eastward ), least water tioold not be (N. 56° W.), to feet water e Fel^e ll{,-ht. The wreck of the Walter l[, Oatlex lien in 17 feet water 1 (\\) mile ESE. (S. 08" U.) from the same ligiit. The wreck of the Darid Vance lies in 40 feet water l^\, (Ij) miles SW. by W. (8. 56^ W.) of the light. Soundings of 19 feet liave been obtained over this wreck and, as it lies almost in the track of paHsing vessels, great caution should be observed when in this locrality. The wreck of the Little Wifigdhiokon lies 25 (28^') miles S. \ W. (8. 3° W.) from Rondeau piers, and 30 (34^) miles E. g N. (N. 8(P K.) from Polnte Pel(''e light. The schooner's spars project about 10 feet above water. The wreck lies a little southward of the regular course between Buffalo and Pointe Pelce. Southeast shoaL— At 2^^ (3j^) miles 8K. 'i 8. (8. 41'^ E.) from the Dummy light is the center of a large shoal, with a least depth (.f 13 feet (at h)we8t lake level). From this spot, as a center, shoal water extends in all directions for nearly § mile. Between Southeast shoal and the Dummy are several 16 and 18 foot spots, and it is not safe for vessels to pass north of the shoal. Orubb reef consists of several 12 and 16 foot rocky patches, lyirig from 13 (2) to 2A (3) miles WNW. of Pelde Spit lighthouse, with deep water between. The reef has extended to the eastward for a mile, with a least depth of 16 feet. This lighthouse, bearing east, leads well clear of the shoals to the southward. Rocky shoaL— About midway between Grubb reef and the Middle ground is a rocky shoal i mile in diameter, within the 5-fathom line, with a least depth of 17 feet. Pel6e Spit (the Dnxniny) light— On a caisson, about If (2) miles south from the extreme end of pointe Pelee, from a white, octagonal lighthouse on a steel-faced pier, is shown, 76 feet above t!»e lake level, a white light, revolving every one and a half minutes, and visible 16 (174) miles. Pog signal. — A steam horn sounds blasts of seven seconds' duration, with silent intervals of forty-five seconds. Coast— The east coast of pointe Pel^e trends north 10 (llj) miles to Muddy creek and Two creeks. It then changes direction to the NB. by E. i E. for 26^ (30J) miles to Rondeau harbor. Rondeau harbor is a small natural harbor suitable for very light- draft vessels. The entrance is protected by breakwaters and piers, but inside the harbor is quite shallow. The eastern side of the harbor is protected by Pointe aux Pins. Current— SE. gales raise the water considerably in this harbor. With SW. gales the waters run out in a very strong current, and at such times it is dangerous for vessels to be in the harbor. BANGE LIGHTS. Pront— On a crib- work block on the outer end of the east pier, from a white, square, open framework, is shown, 34 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light, visible 11 (12g) miles. This light is visible only over a small arc on each side of the alignment. ;»»-^e?^«>. 176 LAKE £BIE. Rear.— At 780 yards N. by E. ^ B. (N. 15° E.) from the front light is shown, 70 feet above the lake level, a red and white light alternating every one and a half minutes. The light is visible 14 (10^) miles. The alignment of these lights leads to the entrance, and the lights must be left to starboard on entering. Coast— The west point of Long Point island is ENE. i E. 66 (76) miles from I'ointe aux Pins, the coast line between ttrs trending NE. to Port Stanley, and then E. by S. forms an open bight with Port Stanley at its head. Many rivers and creeks empty into the lake along this stretch of the coast. Port Stanley light. — On tLe west i)ierhead, from a white square lighthouse, 42 feet above the lake level, is shown a flxed white light, visible 11 (12§) miles. Life-saving station in the harbor at Port Stanley Port Burwell. — A bar has formed across the mouth of the harbor, which has shoaled the waLer to 8 feet. Port Bruce. — A fixed white light is shown on a pole at Port Bruce. This light is a private light, nud not under the control of the marine department of Canada. Port Burwell light. — Three hundred and thirty-three yards inshore, from an octagonal lighthouse, 96 feet above the lake level, is sliown a- fixed white light, visible 15 (17J) miles. Long Point island, formerly Long point, is a long narrow island projecting eastward nearly 17J (20) miles from the main shore. It is over 1| (2) miles wide at Bluff point, the northeastern point of the island, and from Bluff point tapers to its eastern sharp extremity. Long point. At Pottohawk point, the NW. point, it is 2^ (3) miles wide and then tapers to the west end of the island, leaving a small bight par- tially filled with shoals between the KW. and NE. points. All the southern shore can be approached to f mile, but from Long point west, on the north shore, the shoals gradually widen out until Bluff point is reached, where they extend northeasterly for 2-j% (3) miles, leaving a little clear water between the outer end of the spit and the shoals which border the island. At Pottohawk point the shoals again approach the shore, and between this point and the mainland to the north is the eastern entrance to Inner bay, protected on the NW. by the mainland and on the SE. by Long Point island. The southern entrance to Inner bay is betveen the island and the mainland, but it is narrow, and is reported as having silted up. The bay is fit only for very small craft. Port Bowan is on its western shore. The deepest water in lake Erie l|| found south and east of Long point. LifeiBaving station at Port Bowan in Inner bay. LIGHTS. TVest end of Long point. — On the east side of the new channel, from a square white tower, dwelling attached, is sliown, 52 feet above the lake level, a red light, revolving every minute. The light is visible from all points seaward a distawtie of 12 (13|) miles. LONG POINT — PORT MAITLAND. 177 the front light is light alternating : (14>^) miles. ice, and the lights ENE. i E. 60 (76) irs' trending NB. bight with Port nto the lake along tu a white square fixed white light, ath of the harbor, ole at Port Bruce, itrol of the marine iree yards inshore, :e level, is sliowu a • )ng tuirrow island main shore. It is stern poi'tt of the rp extremity, Long (3) miles wide and ; a small bight par- fj. points. All the ai Long point west, until Bluff point is (3) miles, leaving a id the slioals which again approach the X) the north is the N. by the mainland n entrance to Inner it is narrow, and is br very small craft, cater in lake Erie l| if the new channel, liown, 52 feet above The light is visible When a lifeboat is required at this station the liglit is obscured toward Port Kowau. Long point. — On the eastern extremity, from an octagonal light- house, Oo feet above the lake level, is shown a white light, revolving every minute, visible 13 (15) miles. Fog signal — The fog-signal building, white, is 200 yards soutli of the light. The signal, a steam horn, sounds blasts of seven seconds' duration, with silent intervals of thirty seconds. Outer bay of Long point — North of Long point, between the island and the main shore, Outer bay is 14f (17) miles wide and, from this line, 13 (15) miles deep to its western shore. The bay affords excellent anchor- age, and is protected from all winds from south to north by way of west. Fort Dover is on the NW. shore of Outer bay. The harbor is at the mouth of the Lynn river, having two parallel piers, each about 1,000 feet long. Depth of water at end of pier 12 feet ; inside the harbor 8 feet. There are no pilots. Reefs. — A reef If (2) miles long, with 3 feet of water over it, lies about one mile off shore. A reef lies one mile SE. of Port Dover lighthouse and is about | mile from shore. Between the reef and the shore there are, in places, from 12 to 14 feet, but there is no safe passage for vessels on account of bowlders. Outside of the reef, 100 yards, the water is from 15 to 25 feet deep. Port charges. — Vessels over 100 tons, 50 cents per day; under 100 tons, 25 cents per day. Light. — On the west pier, from a white hexagonal lighthouse, 20 feet above the lake level, is shown a iixed Avhito light, visible 8 (9:^) miles. Nanticoke shoal, with 7 feet water, lies 4J (5/o) miles S. 00° W. from Peacock point and 11^ (13) miles N. 3° W. from the east end of Long point. The spot is a small rocky ledge and under a depth of 18 feet is J mile long K"W. and SE. by J mile wide, the shoalest spot being in the middle. When in this vicinity, vessels should not shoal to less than 8 fathoms. Coast. — Port Dover to Port Maitland : The coast trends easterly for 27f (32) miles, with several small projecting points. Tecumseh shoal. — To the westward of Grand River bluff and (reported as lying) from 3 to 8 statute miles off" shore is? Tecumseh shoal, which extends westward and parallel with the shore for several miles. At low water rocks on the shoal uncover. This shoal is charted about 3 miles off shore and the same distance iu extent east and west; it is probable that it is of larger size and farther off" shore. When iu this locality Port Maitland light should be kept well open of Hydes point, the first point west of Port Maitland, to clear the east end of Tecumseh shoal. Port Maitland is on the Grand river, at the head of a small biglit, to the eastward of Grand Eiver bluff. 1944— No. 108 12 4^ 178 LAKE ERIE. Light— Oil the west pier at Grand River entrance, from a wliite open frame, 51 feet above the lake level, is shown a fixed white light, visible 10 (llA) miles. Mohawk bay, a small dip in the coast line, is just eastward of Port Maitland, and between Barbed and Selkirk points. Barbed point is surrounded by a rocky reef which extends to the southward nearly 4 mile. Mohawk island, about 400 yards in diameter, lies in the center of the bay and outside the line joining the points. It is surrounded by rocks, shoals extending nearly a mile southeasterly, on which are many rocks. This shoal has a breadth of over J mile. Anchorj^e.— There is deep water, clay bottom, midway between Mohawk island and Barbed point, which affords anchorage in winds from west to east by way of north. Mohawk Island light.— On the island, from a white circular light- house, is shown, G4 feet above the lake level, a white revolving light, showing three flasliea at intervals of thirty seconds, followed by an eclipse of seventy -five seconds. A complete revolution is made in two and one-fourth minutes. The light is visible 10 (11 J) miles. Coast— Between Selkirk point and Morgan point, 6 (7) miles to the eastward, is Moulton bay, open to the southward. At 11 (12§) miles E. by S. from Morgan point is Abino point. The coast between, project- ing in small points, has several bights open to the southward. From all these points shoals extend off some distance. Sugarloaf point, the west point of Gravel bay, on which is Port Colborue, is surrounded with shoals, and the east point of this bay has shoals extending off a mile, the bay being filled with shoals. Windmill point is 4J (5) miles NE. of Abino point, with two bights filled with shoals between. From Wind- mill point to the mouth of the Niagara river shoals line the coast, and Windmill point should be given a berth of l-ft- (IJ) miles. The coast may be approached somewhat nearer as the river entrance is neared. "Waverly shoal lies oft" this portion of the coast, the NE. end lying 2 {2-,\) miles SW. by W. | W. (S, 63° W.) from the light on the Buffalo breakwater. The shoal is 100 feet wide and extends 700 yards SW. and NE., least water 12 feet, 400 feet SW. of the buoy. There is a 16-foot spot a little eastward of the north end of the shoal, and an 18-foot spot in line with the buoy and breakwater light, and J mile from the latter. Buoy.— A red and black horizontally striped can buoy is moored in 13 feet of water near the NE. end of the shoal. Port Colborne is at the entrance of the Welland canal. The en- trance to the harbor has been improved by piers. Beacon.— A vertically striped red and white beacon, surmounted by a globe, stands on the outermost crib of the east pier. Main light— On the head of the west pier from a white octagonal tower, on a brown cylindrical base, surmounted by a -red lantern, is shown, 70 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light, visible 14 (16J) miles. from a wliite )d white light, stwanl of Port ;arbed point is tliward nearly ft the center of surrounded by on which are dway between srage in winds circular light- evolving light, followed by an is made in two iles. (7) miles to the 1 11 (12§) mUes Btween, project- thward. From rloaf point, the urrouuded with ding off a mile, (5) miles NE. of I. From Wind- B the coast, and les. The coast lice is neared. e NB. end lying t on the Buffalo } yards 8W. and lere is a 16-foot i an 18-foot spot from the latter, loy is moored in canal. The en- , surmounted by white octagonal ii.red lantern, is , visible U (IGJ) 1 I PORT COLBORNE. 179 Crib light. — On a cnb, • st side of the entr» feet may be carried to within 100 feet of the south end of the east unbroken pier, but inside scant 15 feet will be found. There is a sand spit making out southwesterly from the simth end of this pier (continuous part), and 100 feet distant there is but 13 feet at the edge of tlie track. The deepest water track is very narrow, and a vessel only her own width out of it will, in all probability, find one foot less water. In the above remarks it is assumed that there are 14 feet on the dock sill, with a liability of a change of one foot either way. Directions.— The alignment of the lights N. by E. J E. (N. 12'^ E.) gives the deepest water entering the canal, and clear of Sugarloaf reef. The main light must be left to port and the crib light to starboard in entering. The main light is visible from all points seaward ; the crib light is visible in the line of range and into the harbor. Welland canaL — The c&nal flanks the Niagara river, and is 26| statute miles in length from Port Colborne to Port Dalhousie. Its dimensions are as follows : Number of lift locks, 25 (270 by 45 feet) ; total rise of lockage, 326f feet ; depth of water on the sills, 14 feet. Thirteen feet can be carried through at present. There are two pairs of guard gates and one guard lock. CHAPTER X. liAKE ONTARIO. Lake Ontario is the eastern and smallest of the Great Lakes. The length of the lake between Sacketts Harbor and Burlington Bay lights is 105 (190) miles, and its greatest breadth 46ia,- (54) miles ; its maximum depth 738 feet, and its elevation above the sea 246.01 feet. Its basin drains 29,760 square nkiles, including the lake surface •, 1 7,240 square miles. By reason of its greater depth the surface of lake Ontario is less dis- turbed by storms than lake Erie. It is much less obstructed by ice, the lake never freezing except near the shore, and navigation is rarely interrupted. Th<5 chief tributaries are the Niagara, Genesee, and Oswego rivers on the south shore and the Trent on the north shore. The south shore of the lake from the Niagara river east to the St. Lawrence is in the State of New York. All of the north and west shores, and the south shore from the Niagara river west, is in the Province of Ontario, Canada. NAVIGATION. The two great evils to navigation are fog and snow. There are no tides and but light currents for the master to contend with on the lake, and as these are the most uncertain of all elements for the navigator to calculate and allow for, it reduces very much the percentage of danger in lake navigation; hence the safe navigation of the lake is confined to a correct compass, with a knowledge and frequent use on the part of the master of the azimuth tables, the precaution to take cross- bearings of prominent points, and from them plotting the position frequently on the chart; also the familiar use of the chart in laying courses and correcting the same for variation and deviation. DANOEBS. •. With the exception of the shoals among the islands at the NB. end, lake Ontario is remarkalily free from outlying dangers. Off the mouth of the Niagara river are several offlying shoals, known as the Niagara bar. They are not only in the course of vessels entering and leaving Niagara river, but also are a menace to all vessels bound to or from the Welland canal and the lower lake ports. On the west coast of the lake, south of Port Credit, is an offlying shoal, the position of which is not well determined. Off Shoal bay and Prince Edward island, on the 180 ROUTES. 181 it Lakes. The ^toD Bay lightH i'; its maximum jt. lake surface •, 1 }ario is less dis- cted by ice, tlie atiou is rarely swego rivers on east to the St. om the Niagara 3ter to contend of all elements very much the 'e navigation of ge and frequent le precaution to m plotting the of the chart in d deviation. it the NE. end, Off the mouth as the Niagara ng and leaving d to or from the oast of the lake, of which is not island, on the north coast, are several offlying shoals. There are several shoals SE, of False Duck lighthouse. From Calf island a spit extends SVV. for 1^ {1%) miles, with only 10 feet on it; Charity shoal, with 5 feet over it, lies ^^y (3) miles SE. of Pigeon island. Big Bar shoal, south of Amherst island, and an extensive shoal, with 4 feet over it, lying WSW. from Snake Island light, are the principal shoals in the NE.end of the lake. ROUTES. TVelland canal to Cape Vincent — From 3i (4) miles north of Port Dalhonsie outer light steer ENE. J E. (N. 7()oE) for 0^ (11) miles, when Fort Niagara light should bear South ; change course to ENE. I E. (N. 72° E.) i'or 118 (136) miles, when Galloup Island lighthouse should bear abeam, distant 2 (2^) miles; here change course to N. by B. i E. (N. 17° E.) for 11^ (ISJ) miles, which should take a vessel % mile west of Tibbets Point lighthouse; from here to the anchorage off Cape Vincent keep about ^ mile offshore, Welland canal to Kingston. — From 3J (4) miles north of Port Dalhonsie outer light ENE. i E. (N. 70° E.) for 112 (129) miles should take a vessel 3^ (4) miles south of False Duck light; continue this course for 5 (5f ) miles, when False Duck light should bear WNW. (N. 68° W.), and a vessel will clear to the eastward of Harris shoal ; at this point change course to N. by E. g E. (N. 18° E.) for 17^ (20^) miles, when Snake Island light should be abeam; this course passes within a mile of Nine-mile (Gage) Point lighthouse and between the two unmarked shoals north of it. Do not pass east of a line joining Nine-mile (Gage) Point and Pigeon Island lights until close up to Snake Island light. Continue N. by E. g E. (N. 18° E.) from abeam of Snake Island light for I mile, or until this light bears SSE. g E. (S. 30° E.) and Center Brother Island light bears W. J N. (N. 87° W.), when change course to ENE. \ E. (N. 70° E.) and run along the shore, keep- ing not more than \ mile off to avoid the two 12-foot patches oft' Kingston, which should be kept to starboard if unmarked. Vessels of 15 feet draft may pass between Sinicoe and Snake islands. The channel is buoyed on the east side of Snake island, and by keep- ing the Snake Island buoy close aboard, or leaving two-thirds of the passage to the eastward, you can, by steering to the northward slowly as you pass Snake island, keep good water; but you can not, with a vessel drawing over 11 feet, steer straight for Kingston when abreast of Snake islands Caution. — Unless a vessel is well satisfied of her po3ition, the above directions should be used with caution, as the two unmarked shoals SW. of Snake island lie close to the track. UNITED STATES COAST OF LAKE ONTARIO. The United States coast of lake Ontario comprises all the shore of the lake from the Niagara river eastward to the town of Cape Vincent. In the following description the Canadian shore, from the Welland 182 LAKE ONTARIO. canal to the Niagara river, will also bo considered ; as also the coast of Wolfe, or Long island, from opposite Cape Vincent to Browns {loint. Port Dalhousie, at the Ontario entrance to the Wellaiid canal, has two piers 200 feet apart and 2,000 feet in length, extending about north into the lake. Fourteen feet can be carried between the piers and into tlie canal, but 13 feet only are allowed at present. Front light — About 26 feet from the outer end of the east pier a fixed white light is show)', 42 feet above the lake level, from a white square tower. It is ArisiMe 11 (12|) mil-^s. Main light— On tho same pier, 298 feet S. J E. (S. 3° E.) from the outer light, is a white light, revolving every minute. It is shown from a white circular tower, 55 feet above the lake level, and is visible 12 {13|) miles. This light shows from the east to west througli south. Pog signal. — At the Front light station is a fog bell which is rung by hand in answer to signals from passing vessels. ShoaL— There is an 18-foot detached shoal J mile NNE. f E. of the outer pier light. Coast — Welland canal to the Niagara river : The coast trends 6| (7|) miles NB. by E. J E., then changes direction Co the eastward for 2,«o- (2J) miles to fort Massassauga, at the mouth of the Niagara river. Shoals border this coast and extend off shore in places f mile. Off the mouth of the Niagara river are several oiflying patches. Shoahs.— At 2-,% (3^) miles W. by N. of Fort Niagara light is tlio south end of a detached shoal | mile off shore, with 16 feet least water, and extending north and south f mile. At 2 /V (3) miles NNW. from the light is the center of a shoal, 13 feet least water, which entends east and west J mile. Between these two shoals are detached spots with IS, 11, 15 and 16 feet over them. These shoals are known as the Niagara bar, and are a menace to all vessels bound in or out tlie river, as well as to vessels bound to or from the Welland canal and lower lake ports. Not being properly located, they are the cause of many disasters. Bell buoy. — A bell buoy is moored at the opening of navigation on these shoals, on the Canadian side of the channel, by the Niagara Navigation Company. Its position is not to be entirely relied upon. Buoy. — On a rocky spit, extending a mile North and NW. from Fort Niagara, is a black spar buoy. It is moored in 14 feet, § mile from shore and J mile inside the 3-fathom curve. The water shoals gradually inside the buoy to a depth of 6 feet close to the shore. Abreast the outer face of Fort Niagara a spur of the reef projects a little beyond the range of tlie buoy and the outer comer of Fort Niagara wharf. Niagara river. — This river is navigable for 6 (7) miles to Lewiston on the United States shore, and Queenstown on the Canadian shore. Its width is about 500 yards; depth from 4 to 12 fathoms, with muddy or rocky bottom. The banks are bold and higli, and there are no dangers. lo the coast of owns {)oint. iiid canal, has g about north piers and into he east pier a from a wliite o E.) from the is sliown from i ia visible 12 agh sonth. ich is rung by m. S E. of the ; trends 6|(7|) tward for 2^g S'iagara river, mile. Off the a light is the et leaat water, fNW. from the entends east led 8i)ot8 with known as the out tlie river, rial and lower aase of many navigation on r the Niagara relied upon. ^W. from Fort nile from shore of 6 feet close pur of the reef J outer comer as to Lewiston madian shore, with muddy or ire no dangers. NIAGARA MVER — OLCOTT. 183 Youngstown and Niagara are just within the river mouth on the United States and Canadian shores, respectively. Current— At Lewiston the current is about 4 miles an hour, decreas- ing to 3 miles at the mouth of the river and to J mile about 2 miles from slKire The strength of the river current and the depth of water in the mouth of the river and at the west end of the lake are materially affe(!ted by winds blowing up or down the lake. The former wind decreases the current and raises the water, and the latter produces tlie opposite effect. The difference in level is sometimes as much as 3 feet. Fort Niagara light— On the high east bank of the river and J mile within its nu/uth, from a gray, octagonal tower, 79^ feet above the lake level, is shown a fixed white light, visible 14^ (16f ) miles. It is obscured when bearing about SE., through an arc of a few degrees, by tall trees near the shore. Life-saving station at Fort Niagara. Directions.— Approach the shore with Fort Niagara light bearing sonth. When 3J (4) miles north of the light bring Fort Massassauga ahead S. by W. (S. 11° W.) and stand in for it. When ^ mile from the fort keep off a little to the westward to clear the edge of the spit extending from Fort Niagara, and when Fort Niagara light bears SB. f E. (S. 53° E.) stand in for it, passing SW. of the black spar buoy, and shape a mid-channel course up the river. Coast— Niagara river to Wilson harbor : The coast trends ENB. J E. for IOt^ (12) miles. There is a detached 16-foot spot 1 (IJ) mile NE. by N. of Fort Niagara, and the water is shoal ^ mile f • om the shore between these places. Wilson is at the mouth of Twelve-mile creek. Wilson harbor entrance has been improved by two piers. There is only a depth of 9 feet in the channel at mean lake level. Coast— Wilson to Olcott: The coast continues in the same direction for 5J (6) miles and has the same characteristics. Rock.— A rock is reported as lying about 1£ (2) miles west of Olcott lightstation. It extends east and west J mile and is the same distance oft" shore. There is only 4 or 5 feet water on the rock (November, 1895). Olcott is on Eighteen-mile creek. Olcott harbor has been improved by the building of piers and dredging; width between the piers, 200 feet; direction of piers, N. | W. ChanneL— Between the piers the channel is 180 tfeet wide, the limiting lines being 10 feet from the piers, and from the shore end of the piers it decreases to 98 feet in width at the Main Street bridge. Depth in the channel, 13 feet, measured from mean lake level. A sand bar is reported as forming about 60 feet from the piers, with about 6 or 7 feet over it (November, 1895). Light— On the west pier, 30 feet from the outer end, is a square pyram- idal tower, brown below and white above, exhibiting a fixed white light 30j feet above the lake level, and visible 10§ (12^) miles. 184 LAKE ONTARIO. Coast— Oloott to Thirty-mile point: Tlift coast continnes nearly ENH. (or lOA (1-) miles, and tlie shoals are somewhat nearer the shore. Thirty-mile point, Just westward of (Jolden Hill creek, is rouudin^ and only a slij^ht projection from the coast line, and here the coast chanfjes direction to the east. Light. — On the point, from a square prray tower rising? from the north point of a dwelling, 71 ^ fi'ct above the lake level, is shown a white light, flashing every ninety seconds, visible 1-4^ (l<4) miles. Thirty-mile point to Oak Orchard harbor.— Oak Orchard light is 125 (143) miles east of Thirty-mile Point lightj the coast between cau be approached to a mile with safety. Oak Orchard harbor, on Oak Orchard creek, has been improved by the construction of two piers, 200 feet ai)art, extending to the 12-foot curve, and a shore protection to the east pier, 91 feet long. The channel has a depth of 1.'3 feet at mean lake level for its whole width between the i)iers, excei)tiug 10 feet along each pier. Direction of the piers, N. 'i K. Light. — On the west i>ier, 27 feet from the outer end, from a square, pyramidal tower, brown below and white above, 29iJ feet above the lake level, is shown a iixed white light, visible 10'^ (12^) miles. Caution. — The shore eastward of Oak Orchard harbor should not be followed on account of a reef extending IJ (2) miles ENE. from the lighthouse. Directions. — Approaching from the eastward, do not bring the light to bear scmth of SW. until a mile offshore, when stand in with the lighthouse bearing South. Coast — From Oak Orchard harbor the coast trends east 9^ (10$) miloa to the Devils Nose, a prominent bluff 77 feet high. A rocky spit extends 2 (2|) miles ENE. from Oak Orchard harbor, its outer edge being nowhere over $ mile from shore; shoals then follow the shore line, at an average distance of about ^ mile, until the Devils Nose is reached, where they extend out over J mile. At the Devils Nose the coast changes direction a little to the southward for 9^ (11) miles, when it bends again to the southward and trends 2J (2J) miles 8E. by S. to Braddock point. Shoals line all this portion of the coast and in places extend oft" | mile. At Braddock point the shore changes its character, becoming lower, and between this point and Charlotte harbor, 6 (7) miles SE., there are several bays and ponds, fronted by shoals, extending off shore over J mile. Braddock Point light station. — A fixed white light shown from a black lantern surmounting an octagonal, pyramidal, red-brick tower attached to the west side of a two-story redbrick dwelling with black slated roof. The parapet and gallery of the tower are brown. The tower and dwelling are on ground about 7 feet above mean lake level and stand about 100 feet back from the shore line. The focal plane of the light is 92^ feet above mean lake level and the light is visible 15f CHARLOTTE — PULTNEYVILLE. 185 innes nearly rer the shore. ;, is ruuuiliiiK ire the coast 'om the iioith a white light, thard light is between can improved by :o the 12-f(H)t The channel idth between of the piers, [■oni a square, hbove the lake should not be STE. from the ring the light I in with the east 9i (lOf) A rocky spit :s outer edge ;he shore line, )se is reached, ase the coast ailes, when it SE. by S. to and in places its character, harbor, 6 (7) als, extending shown from a i-brick tower II g with black brown. The ean lake level focal plane of is visible ISf (17^) miles. The light illuminatcH 180o of the horizon and h visible from all points of approach from the lake, excepting from tlic eastwani to the southward of the bearing W. by N. A small one story red building and a red-brick barn are located near the tower to the southward, and a red-brick oil house Htaiuls between the tower and lake. Charlotte is at the mouth of the G-eneseo river. Charlotte harbor is the i)ort of Rochester, which is IJ (2) miles above the head of tlio navi- gable part of the river. The entrantic to the harbor has been impiovd by the building of piers and dredging. ChanneL — Dredging in tlie fall of 1894 and spring of 1895 nmde a 16-foot depth in the channel at extreme low water for a width of about 112 feet at the inner end, narrowing to about 90 feet at the outer end, midway between the piers. The material is all sand and silt. LIOHTS. Genesee light — On the west pier, 30 feet from the outer end, a fixed rere bordering ^tween Sodus md by build- wid«, la deep Bneseo river, penally across he outer end the east pier, ) in the lake lel line, npon b depth l)elow i level). Tlic iepth is about in lake level), aes along the t, varied by a ) level, from a isible 13| (10) Br end of the jvel, is shown ) above. The W. (S. 4° W.) ) lake level, is d by a lantern 1 any bearing When about 2 W.) and stand Sand point, is these bays the I mile. These coast changes 1 creeks empty >sed by shoals, liles long north LITTLE SODUS BAY — OSWEGO. 187 and flonth and $ mile wide. It is deep and landlocked and midway between Oswego and Great Sodus. The entrance to the bay has been improved by dredging and by building piers, the object being to contract the entrance to tlie bay to a width of 250 feet, and to maintain a channel 2()0 feet wide and 10 feet deep at extreme low water. Channel — The channel lies about midway between the piers and parallel with them, 130 feet wide, 50 feet from the west pier and 05 f»et from the east one. During the fall of 1896 the entrance was greatly improved by dredging a channel 130 feet wide, 16 feet deep below extreme low water (17 feet 5 inches below mean lake level), through the 12-foot shoal of hardpan and bowlders which has hitherto obstnicted the entrance. This excavation was extended 380 feet outside the west pierhead, and vessels should keep on the prolongation of the channel Une until well out in the lake and in the bay to avoid shoals on the sides. The governing depth is now 12J feet below extreme low water - (or 15 feet at mean lake level), because of a deposit of silt between the piers where there has been no dredging for many years. This will be removed, giving a 15-foot entrance at extreme low water (or 17 feet 6 inches at mean lake level). Inside the bay there is good anchorage. LIGHTS. Pair Haven (outer). — Twenty-eight feet from the outer end of the west pier at the entrance to the bay, a fixed white light, 31^ feet above the lake level, is shown from a square pyramidal tower, brown below and white above. The light is visible lOJ (12^) miles. Fog BignaL — A bell struck by machinery, a double blow every twenty seconds. Fair Haven (inner). — Near the inner end of the west pier a fixed white light, 20^ feet above the lake level, is shown from a white mast' DirectionB. — Fair Haven outer light may be approached bearing between SSW. J W. (S. 28° W.) and E. by S. (S. 79° E.), but nothing inshore of these bearings. When about 2 (24) miles off the light, bring the range lights in line S. ^ E. (S. 7° E.) and stand in between the piers. The lights in line from within the bay serve also as a range for making the channel between the piers when leaving. Coast — Little Sodus bay to Oswego: From the bay the coa«t trends NE. by N. for 6 J (6) miles to Nine-mile point; here it changes its direction and trends NE. by E. the same distance to the breakwater at Oswego. ShoaL — At 3J (4) miles SW. of Oswego Breakwater light a rocky ghoal spit extends off shore f mile, and only feet near its outer end. Although not a serious menace to navigation, yet disabled cratt have been driven on the shoal. Currents in the vicinity of the shoal are generally very light and eastward toward the St. Lawrence. Oswego, at the mouth of Oswego river, is the principal United States port on lake Ontario. 188 LAKE ONTARIO. Improvemanta — An outer liarbor l« lorraed by the west break- water which, 0,o;« feet Ioiik, iiich)8eH 100 acres outside tlie 9-foot eurve of wliat was f(»riiierly the lalie front. It starts from the main sliore nearly a mile westwar*! of the mouth of the river and extends east- ward on a Hue Rencrally parallel to the lake front and 1,200 feet from it, to a point oi)iM)8ite the cntrancto to the inner harbor. The shore arm is 9104 feet long, extending from the shore into the lake to the 18-foot depth. There is a break 140 feet wide in the lake arm near the shore arm; this break will bo permanent. It has served as a convenient entrance for vessels, and it also improves the sanitary condition of the harbor. There are also two inner piers, with shore arms, which protect the immediate entrance to Oswego river, tlic west pier also partially pro- tecting the outer harbor. The entrance to the outer (west) basin is exposed to the force of NB. gales, and, in strong winds ftom this direction, it is almost imijossible for a sailing vessel t(» enter. Depths. — January, 1896: The outer harbor has an available depth of 18 feet at extreme low water, this depth, with sand bottom, being at the entrance. The inner harbor hjis a 15-foot depth at extreme low water up to the Northwestern Elevator and to the coal trestles slip. The deep water now extends for the fVill width of the river up to a line 316 feet south from the north side of the elevator. Lights.— Oswego. — Near the inner end of the west pier, 75 feet above the lake level, is a fixed white light, shown from an octagonal, pyramidal, gray tower, with an oil room attached. The light is visible l^ (16^) miles. Oswego breakwater. — On a crib inside the east angle of the break- water, and 1,250 feet NW. by N. (N. Mo W.) from Oswego light, is a fixed rod light, 39 feet above the lake level and visible llj (l^) miles. It is shown from a brown, octagonal, pyramidal tower. Fog signal — At this station the fog signal is a bell, struck by machinery every twelve seconds. Life-saving station at east side of entrance to harbor. Directions. — From the northeastward Oswego light should not be brought to bear inshore of the bearins SSW. (8. 23° W.). When a mile offshore bring the two lights in line SE. by S. (S. 34° E.) and stand in for the entrance to the river, leaving the lights to starboard. EAST SHOEE OF LAKE ONTABIO. Cantion. — Compass bearings can not bo closely relied npon at the eastern end of lake Ontario. In the neighborhood of the Main Duck islands it has been frequently observed that there is a great deviation of the compass, sometimes as great as a point at a time. This renders navigating very uncertain in thick or foggy weather. This deviation is due, most probably, to numerous superficial deposits of iron ore. An examination of the magnetic observations that have been made in the OSWEOO— -STONY POINT. 189 went break* I 0-fuot <;urve ) main shore )xteudH east- 00 feet from he Hhore arm to the 18- foot ear the shore i convenient idition of the 1 protect the partially pro- I force of NB. St imiiossible lable depth of , being at the De low water es slip. The I to a line 316 pier, 75 feet in octagonal, ight la visible of the break- go light, is a .^ (134) naWes. ill, struck by ihonld not be When a mile I and stand in brd. npon at the le Main Duck reat deviation This renders ^his deviation iron ore. An n made in the Province of Ontario, Canada, nhows that thore are numerous localities in the region iinmediatciy above laKi Ontario where there arc conMiilcr- ai»Ie l latter is Port Henderson. Shoals and islands lie across tbe month of the bay, leaving two narrow channels; the east- ern one is between Gull and Snake Island shoals on tbe one side and Horse island on the other. Sboals extend westward f mile from Horse island. This passage is deep and should be used in entering tbe bay. The shoal extending NE. from Six Town point is known as Lime Bar- rel sboal and has only 3^ feet on its shallowest part.. It is not safe to enter Henderson bay except by daylight, because of the shoals, low- land, and tha abs»>nce of lights and other marks. Note. — Tbe island designated on the chart &s Gull is Snake, and Snake is Gull. Black River bay is over a mile wide at its entrance and extends 4/ I- the end of Calf Stony island and e island is ^ mile lile NE. from the E., from the SW. v^erage breadth of E. end and g mile the island being lie island is Gills . end has a slight tart of the island 3. and SW. The B exception of the not be attempted, p island is a fixed )m a conical gray tie light is visible m the SW. end of s wide, with least • between Galloup las been the cause the west side, and Pass to the west- ds North and NE., I bay on the SW. point and Horse r and good bottom toals extending a re Whites bay and Shoals and islands hannels; the east- n the one side and f mile from Horse I entering the bay. lown as Lime Bar- ;.. It is not safe to of the shoals, low- Glull is Snake, and ranee and extends SACKETTS HARBOR — CHAUMONT BAY. 191 4f (5J) miles NB., the shores of the bay coutrjicting slightly as its head is approached. This bay has deep water and the shores are steep-to, except at its head (where the Black river empties), which is filled with flats; here the bay opens out to the SE., forming Mnskalonge bay, which is very shoal. The town of Dexter is a mile within the mouth of the Black river. SackettB harbor is on the southern shore of the bay, just Avithin Horse island. Tliis harbor is protected by a natural spur of loose rock and gravel, about 800 feet in length, extending easterly from the shore, forming a small sheltered bay. January 15, 1896 : The entrance (380 feet wide) is defined (on the west) by Shiphouse point and the mooring crib, and on the east by the railroad wharf. The mooring crib runs about south into the harbor 190 feet from the end of Shiphouse point. It stands upon a 2-foot shoal which extends 40 feet around it. Tliere is 10 feet depth at extreme low water (or 12 feet 5 inches at mean lake level) at 50 feet from mooring crib and elsewhere in the harbor except near the wharves. The best depth along wharf is ot the north, 200 feet of the railroad wharf on east of entrance, where there is 9 feet at extreme low water (or 11 feet 5 inches at mean lake level). Directions. — Entering the harbor, Shiphouse point may be rounded cU)seto, and the eastern wharves of the town steered for. A narrow sandbar extends two-thirds of the way from Shiphouse point to the southern wharves. SackettB Harbor light. — On Horse island a fixed white light, 47 feet above the lake level, is shown from a square red tower attached to a dwelling. The light is visible 12 J (14) miles. Coast — From Bull Rock point, the north entrance point to Black river, to Pillar i>oint, 1^ (IJ) miles NW., the shore recedes, forming a small bay, almost filled with shoals, extending out from both points for nearly ^ mile. From Pillar point the coast trends to the NE. and East to the head of Guifin bay. O-offin bay. — The shores of this bay are steep-to, except at its head, where GuflQn creek empties. One mile up this creek is the town of Dexter. Vesuvius point and Cherry island form the north shore of this bay and separate it from Chaumont bay. Chaninont bay to Cherry island has the same entrance as Gufiin bay, the SE. face of Point peninsula forming the northern entrance shore. The bay has from 3^ to 4 fathoms, mud bottom in the center and west- ern half, but the eastern half is filled with shoals, wiiich extend out as a spit almost to the center of the bay. Catfish river empties into this bight, and on it is the town of Chaumont. Three-mile bay, a small iudentation on the north shore, has 3} fathoms at its entrance, but its head is shoal. A town of the same name is on this bay. Coast. — Point peninsula is 5J (6) miles long NE. and SW. [^s SE, face is steep-to, except around the SW. point, which is shoal ^ mile of£, 192 LAKE ONTARIO. Several wrecks have occurred ou tbiH point, and it Hhonld be given a wide berth. Between the SW. point and Tibbetts point, 9^ (11) miles NNW., the coast ia very irregular and broken. About midway between the points are Fox and Grenadier islands, connected with each other and with the shore by shoals, which line all this part of the coast. A shoal spit extends one mile west from the west end of Grenadier island, and vessels rounding thi.s spit should not shoal to less than 10 fathoms. Baird point is the southern point of a small shoal inlet known as Mud bay, into which Mud creek empties. Stony point is the north point of Mud bay. Between Stony point and Grenadier island vessels with local knowledge will And good anchor- age and protection from all but Avesterly winds. A rocky spit extends a mile west from Stony point, and north of this point is Wilson bay. Wilson point, the north point of Wilson bay, has a shoal spit extend- ing i'l mile from it, and 4 iuil<) ^i^oiu the end of the si)it is a detached 14- foot shoal. Fuller bay lies between Wilson and Tibbetts points, the southeastern entrance point to the St. Lawrence river. Tibbetts Point light. — On the jmint a fixed white light, 68f feet above the lake level, is shown from a round, gray tower with oil room at the base, the keeper's dwelling being to the northward. The light is visible 13-j% (16) miles, and marks the turning point for the south and best channel into the St. Lawrence river. From Tibbetts point the coast trends 2fg (2^) miles NE., to the town of Gape Vincent, and is steep-to, except around and near the point. Cape Vincent is on the south sliore of the St. Lawrence river, near the entrance to the South channel, and is the first United States port after entering the river. CANADIAN SHOUB. Hinckley point, of Wolfe or Long island, is opposite Gape Vincent, and from here the coast of the island trends 4-,% (5J) miles S W. to Bear point, ^ mile off which is a detached 14-foot shoal. The shore between the points is straight, with one shallow indentation, and is steep-to. Bear point is a narrow peninsula ^ mile long, and is almost connected to the 11-foot detached shoal by a spit, leaving a very narrow channel between, but this channel should not be attempted or the point rounded inside of % mile. All the SW. end of Wolfe island should be given a wide berth as it is a dangerous shore. Shoal. — A small patch with less than 15 feet on it is reported as lying about li^'u (IJ) miles south of Bear point, locally known as " New Found shoal" (probably "Allen Otty shoal"). Long point is a similar but longer peninsula projecting from Wolfe island l-j^o (IJ) miles, and ia farther extended to the SW. for 1 (IJ) mile by a narrow spit with 10 feet at its SW. extremity and only 5 feet at ^ mile from the point. There have been many wrecks on this point. Sand bay, 1^ (2) miles wide between Bear and Long points, is open ilil be given a :, 9^ (11) miles idway between itli each utber ' tbe coast. A euadier island, lan 10 fathoms, i known as Mud en Stony point id good aucbor- d nortb of this oal spit extend- a detached 14- le southeastern Ugbt, 68$ feet .' with oil room I. Tbe light is the south and E., to tbe town ir the point, ince river, near «d States port I Cape Vincent, lesSW. toBear shore between I is steep-to. most connected narrow channel 3 point rounded aid be given a ^sported as lying 1,8 " New Found ing from Wolfe '. for 1 (IJ) mile only 5 feet at ^ this point, points, is open ALLEN OTTY SilOAL SLMCOE ISLAND. 193 to tbe SW., but att'orda shelter from northerly and easterly winds. A narrow spit, 17 feet at its outer end, projects nearly ^ mile from near the center of tbe bead of the bay, otherwise the shores of the bay may be approached to rj mile. Allen Otty or Keill shoal lies 1.^ (2) miles SSVV. from Itear point and 2iAj (2$) miles NE. i E. of Charity shoal. It is a narrow shofil, 700 yards long, with from 15 to 18 feet over it; is unmarked and lies 400 yards nortb of the range between Charity Shoal buoy and Tibbetts Point lighthouse. It should be avoided in rougii weather even by light-draft vessels. Charity shoal lies 3,^, (-1^) miles SW. by S. from Bear point and 4$ (5^) miles west from Grenadier island. This rocky shoal is J mile long NE. and SW. and 350 yards wide. It has a least depth of 5 I'eet. Buoy. — A red and black horizontally striped can buoy is moored in 18 feet, 300 yards from the southern end of Charity shoal. It is 0^ (7J) miles SW. by W. from Tibbetts Point ligiithouse. ShoaL — A dangerous shoal is reported as lying about l,^o (1*) miles SE. of Charity shoal, and is locally known as "East Charity shoal." Pigeon Island, 2,^, (3) miles NW. by W. from Charity shoal, is 3i (4) miles SW. by W. from the end of Long point. The island is very small and lies in the center of a shoal which extends from it ^ mile NE. and SW., the latter portion of the shoal being J mile wide. The lighthouse should be given a berth of at least one mile in rounding tbe island. Pigeon Island light — The lighthouse, painted white, is on the center of tbe island. From it is shown a white light, revolving every seventy seconds, 67 feet above the lake level. It is visible 12 (13j^) miles. Fog signal — A weak band horn answers signals from vessels. Reeds bay, between Long and Bells points, is 2 (2^) miles wide. Tbe head of the bay is filled with a roci^y flat, and, although it offers protection from NE. winds, would hardly serve as a good anchorage on account of its rocky bottom. Coast — Bells point, a very narrow peninsula, has a reef just outside it, and the whole point is surrounded by shoals which extend off shore f mile. Between Bells point and another narrow peninsula point 1^ (tj^) miles to the northward, tbe coast lino bends to the eastward, and forms a small bight filled with reefs and shoals. Horseshoe island, J mile long and \ mile broad, lies ^ mile off the northern peninsula point and is connected to it by shoals which sur- round the island and extend ^ mile SW. Bateau channel, between Horseshoe and the Wolf islands on tl e south and Simcoe island on the north, is narrow and useless for any but small craft. Simcoe island is 3^ (3$) miles long NE. and SW. and 1 (1|) mile wide at its widest part. Its SE. face is steep- to, but elsewhere shoals 1944— No. 108 13 194 LAKE ONTARIO. extend out for soino distance, and its NW. point ia almost connected to the shoals extending from Snake island, but the channel between the shoals is buoyed, barrel buoys on the Snake island side. Shoals extend from its NE. end to Garden island and Ferguson point of Wolf island and fill up all the intervening space between this line and Wolf island. Its SW. end has shoals extending from it J mile, and on this end is a lighthouse. Nine-mile (O-age) Point light.— The lighthouse is at the SW. extreme of the island and is a circular tower painted white. From it, 45 feet above the lake level, is shown a fixed white light, visible 12 (13|) miles. Fog signaL— A steam fog horn gives blasts of eight seconds, with silent intervals of twenty-two seconds. Clearing mark.— This light and Pigeon Island light in line, bearing S. J Fi. (S. 3° E.), passes close west of a small 15-foot shoal (unmarked) lying 1 (li) mile SW. of Snake Island light and well clear to the eastward of the large shoal, least water 4 feet (unmarked) lying in a parallel direction to Simcoe island and nearly 1^ (2) miles from it. Snake island is a small island lying near the NW. extreme of a circular shoal with 4 leet on its center. This shoal and the shoal extending from Simcoe island half close this entrance to the St. Law- rence river. Vessels drawing over 15 feet should not attempt to pass between Snake and Simcoe islands, but shouUl keep west and north of Snake island. Snake Island 'light— The lighthouse is square, with dwelling attached, and is built on a crib on Snake Island shoal. From it, 35 feet above the river level, is shown a fixed red light, visible (7) miles. Directions.— Vessels of 15 feet draft may pass between Simt^oe and Snake islands. The channel is buoyed ou the east side of Snake island, and by keeping the Snake Island buoy close aboard, or leaving two- thirds of the passage to the eastward, you can, by steering to the northward slowly as you pass Snake island, keep good water, but you can not, with a vessel drawing over 11 feet, steer straight for Kingston ■when abreast of Snake island. "Wolfe or Long island.— All the north shore of this island is bor- dered by shoals. Garden island lies on the outer edge of these sht)al8 just west of Ferguson point. Browns or Knapps point, a rocky penin- sula 2 ,% (2J) miles NE. of Ferguson point, has a small bay soutli of it, but it is shoal and only suitable for very small craft. Browns or Knapps Point light— The lighthouse on the north of this point is square and painted white. From it, 28 feet alwve the river level, is shown a fixed white light, visible 10 (llj) miles. Shoal— At i»ff (1) mile WSW. 3 W. from Browns Point lighthouse is anll-footdetached shoal spot lying almostiu mid-channel. It is usually marked by a beacon buoy, and vessels bound up or down the St. Law- rence river should keep the tnainland aboard, which is here steep-to. For Kingston, see page 20.5. most connected lanuel between il Hide. Shoals 1 point of Wolf I tbi» Hue and b ^ mile, and on is at the SW. rhite. From it, ight, visible 12 it seconds, with in line, bearing loal (numarked) i\\ clear to the :ked) lying in a les from it. V. extreme of a 1 and the shoal to the St. Law- attempt to ])a8s est and north of , with dwelling al. From it, 35 sible G (7) miles, 'een Simt^oe and of Snake island, or leaving two- steering to the [ water, but you rht for Kingston lis island is bor- e of these shoals t, a rocky penin- bay south of it, on the north of t alK)ve the river es. lint lighthouse is lel. It is usually »wn the St. Law- 1 here steep-to. TABLE OF DISTANCES. CANADIAN COAST OF LAKE ONTARIO. 195 Table of dinctioiit and ilittaiices hetweeu light statioim on Ihe north and south ahorea of the lake {the outer pier lights are taken). Statlona. Gibraltar (Lighthouse) point to — Port Dulhousie FortNiagara Olcott Oak Orchard Big SodiiB buy Fair Haven OBWego Whitby harbor to — Port DulhouHie Fort Niagara Olcott Oak Orcliard Big 8o<1ns bay Fair Haven Oswego Cobnrg to — Port Dalhniisie Fort Niagara Olcott Oak Orcliard Charlottu harbor Big Sodns bay Fair Plaven Oswego Presqu' lie to — Port Dalhousie Fort Niagara Olcott Oak Orchard Charlotte harbor Big Sodas bay Fair Haven Oswego Dlrectious. Nnutloal j Stntnto miles. I mileH. 8.13° E.. S. 34° E . S. 60}° E 8. 741'-' E . S.79°E.. 8. 82° E . . 8. 86° E . . 8.2HOW. 8.10°W.. 8. 16° E . . 8. 48}° E . 8. 67}° E . 8. 72}° E . S. 77i° E . S.47i°\V. 8.44°\V.. 8.34iOAV. 8.2i°W.. 8. 30i° E . 8. 52i° E . 8.60i°E. 8. 68J° E . 8.6C W,. S.54i°W. 8.50° W.. S.32°\V.. 8. 3J° E . . 8.35° E.. 8. 47i° E . 8.58i°E. 24} 25,1, 33 53} 106 lldi 124 40| 35 31 41} 90 100 105} 64i 56J 43A 33J 46i», 64A 71i 76 82i 73-:^; 59i 42i 43i 52 56i 58A 28} 29i 38 eii^b 122 134V„ 142} 46} 40A 35} 48,J„ 103} 115,15 121} 74i 64} 49} 38} 64 74} 82t 87i 95 85 68^ 49 50 59A 64} 67i Niagara river.— For a description of this river and the offlying shoals, see page 182. Niagara river to Welland canaL— The coast trends west for 2-^ (2J) miles, then changes its direction to SW. by W. J W. for 6f (7^) miles to the entrance of the Welland canal. Shoals line this coast and extend off shore in places f mile. Fort Dalhousie. — See page 182. ShoaL— There is an 18-foot detached shoal J mile NNE. 5 B. of the outer pier light. Coast. — Port Dalhousie to Burlington bay: The coast trends 21 196 LAKE ONTARIO. (24T*,r) miles W. by N. to the south end of the narrow sand spit separat- ing Burlington bay from lake Ontario. Except for about 5 (5i|) miles west of Port Dalhousie, it is everywhere steep-to and has no offlying dangers. There are several creeks in this stretch, which afford good shelter and boat landings. Burlington bay is a large sheet of deep water, free from danger, the entrance to which is by a canal cut through the sand spit which sepa. rates it from lake Ontario. There is a shoal approaching the docks, but it is well buoyed and the navigation is safe. Burlington canal is between two breakwater piers, built and main- tained by the public works department of Canada. The canal is 2,300 feet long, and varies in width from 170 feet at the outer end to 106 feet near the inner end, and carries 1 4 feet of water. The south pier extends 420 feet farther into the lake than the north pier. The canal is crossed near the middle by a swing bridge of the Grand Trunk Railway. Danger signal — At night this bridge is marked in the center by a red danger signal. RANGE LIGHTS. Front light. — The lightliouse is near the outer end of south pier; it is ;?0 feet high, circular and i)ainted white. From it, at 30 feet above the lake level, is shown a flxed white light, visible 4 (4^*^;) miles. Main (rear) light. — The lighthoiise is a gray, circular building, 79 feet high, built on the beach near the middle of the south pier, and I,r)70 feet SW. by W. ^ AV. (S. 58° W.) from the front light. From the lighthouse, at 75 feet above the lake level, is shown a fixed white light, visible 15 (17^) miles. Fog signaL — A hand horn answers signals from vessels. Storm signals. — There is a signal mast on Burlington beacii, in lati- tude 43° 16' N. and h)ngitude 79° 54' W., from which the Canadian storm signals are shown. Storms. — October and November are the months in which severe storms are most frequent. The wind, invariably commencing at SE., works around through South to West and NW., the time of the hardest blow being usually when the barometer begins to rise as the wind gets around to west. Hamilton is the manufacturing center of the Dominion of Canada. Its population is about 50,000, and it has direct railway communication with all parts of the Province and the United States. There are ample wharves. There are no port charges or dues, and no pilotage. The United States is represented by a consul. Directions. — Vessels making the canal from the lake shoul*; \n-lug the two lights in range SW. by W. J W. (S. 58° W.) and keep them in one until close to the front light, which should be left to port and passed at a distance of about 100 feet. In a heavy sea from the NE., vessels drawing 11 or 12 feet are liable to strike. Vessel men who know the harbor will not attempt to risk (;oiniiig in during a NE. storm, but OAKVILLE — TORONTO. 197 id spit separat- out 5 (5i|) miles has no offlying ich afford good •om danger, the pit whicli sepa. g the docks, but built and main- le canal is 2,300 end to 106 feet ith pier extends canal is crossed Railway, the center by a f south pier; it at 30 feet above ^u) miles, lar building, 79 south pier, and ght. From the xed white light, ■*els. >n beach, in lati- [i the Canadian n which severe aencing at SE., le of the hardest IS the wind gets niou of Canada. communication Ihere are ample > pilotage. The Ice shoul '• hriug id keep them in port and passed the NE., vessels who know the N£. storm, but anchor under Toronto point till the sea goes down. After having passed through the canal the course is SW. to the wharves of the city. Coast. — Hamilton to Toronto: From Burlington the coast trends ab(mt 2J {26i) miles N E. by N. to the Ilumber river, and has only a few slight indentations where creeks empty. It is steep-to, excepting off Clarkson, midway between Oakville and Port Credit. The chart shows a shoal, position doubtful, nearly a mile oft" shore. Oakville is at the mouth of Sixteen-mile creek. Oakville light — On a cribwork block, near inner end of main pier, is the lighthouse level, 31 feet high, white, Avith a red lantern. The light, fixed white, is 39 feet above the lake, and visible 11 (12§) miles. Port Credit is at the mouth of the Credit river. Port Credit light. — The lighthouse, square and painted white, is on the outer end of the north breakwater pier. The light, fixed white, is 37 feet above the lake level and visible 11 (12§) miles. Huxnber bay, into which the Ilumber river emj)tie8, is just west of Toronto harbor, the western part of the city being on the bay. Toronto, tbe capital of the Province of Ontario, is between the rivers Humber and Don, and has a well-sheltered barbor suitable for light- draft vessels. The city is the seat of the provincial Government, with the oHicial residence of the lieutenant-governor and the Government buildings. The United States is represented by a consul and a vice and deputy consul. Observatory. — The Magnetical and Meteorological Observatory, in the University grounds, stands 108 feet above the lake in latitude -^^ 39' 35.9" N. and longitude 79^ 23' 39.75" W. Toronto harbor is formed by an island inclosing a harbor of xiearly 3^ square miles. There are two entrances, both artificial, to the 'uarbor. The western entrance is directly in front of Queens wharf, and separates tbe island from the main ; the eastern entrance,,now being constructed, is at the SE. end of the barbor. At present these entrances will not admit of vessels of heavy draft. Qibraltar (Lighthouse) Point light— On the SVY. side of the point is a white hexagonal lighthouse with keeper's dwelling near. From this lighthouse, 66 feet above the lake level, is shown a white light, revolving every forty-five seconds. The light is visible 18 (20f ) miles. Fog signal — The fogsigual building of wood, white with brown roof, is 1,150 feet SSW. § W. from the lighthouse. The fog signal is a steam horn, which sounds blasts of seven seconds, with intervals of ninety seconds. Queens "Wharf light — On the west end of the wharf, from a white hexagonal building, at 23 feet above the lake level, is shown a fixed white light, visible 9 (10^) miles. Fog signal- -A fog bell, attached to tbe tower, is rung by hand. Queens Wharf rear light — On extension shoreward of wharf, 200 feet N. 23° E. from outer light, is a red octagonal lighthouse, from which 198 LAKE ONTARIO. t. \n shown, 37 feet abttve the lal^-. Bvel, a fixed red light visible 8 (9t^) miles. The two lights in line lead clear of the point of bar, running Hoiith of and parallel to the wliarf. Tiiese lights are maintained by the Toronto harbor commissioners. Life-saving station at inner side of Toronto island near the east end. East Pier light. — A. temporary light, established by the Government of ('anada on tlie East pier at the East gap or Eastern entrance to Toronto harbor, has been put in operation. Tiio light is fixed red and 10 feet above the lake level. It should be visible (I (6,i^,) miles from all points of approach. The light is shown fioni a column surmounting a hexagonal iron shed. Tlie building is U feet high and is gray in color. It stands on the pier 100 feet from its outer eiul, but will be moved nearer the end of the pier and raised as soon as the construction work is finished. Another light to range with it will also be established later. The light is intended to guide vessels approaching Toronto to the entrance through the East gap. Mariners will have to allow for the projection of the pier la?ieward beyond the light. Buoys. — A bell and five can buoys, all red, mark the bank to the South and SW. of Lighthouse point. The bell and can buoy to the east are in 5 fathoms. The can buoys to the west are in 8 fathoms, except No. 12, which is in 21 feet. It is not safe for vessels to go inside the buoys, as the bank rises very abruptly. An addition.al red spar buoy is placed on the NW. point of the island. Directions. — West cbianneL — The red spar buoy on the starboard side of the channel is in 14 feet of water, with the lighthouse bearing N. 7^ E., distant 020 feet. One black buoy is on the north side of the channel at the entrance, with the White lighthouse bearing N. 57° E., distant 7.50 feet. There are 11 feet of water in mid-channel. The best water is on the south side of the channel near the breakwater. Directions. — Bast channeL — The buoys in this channel are placed as follows: Three black spar buoys on the west or port side coming into the bay. There is 15 feet of water below zero in this channel. The channel is 400 feet between the buoys and cribs. Landmarks for entering are the cupola of St. Lawrence hall in line with a point midway between the tower of Metropolitan church and St. Michaels cathedral spire. A black spar buoy is placed on the boiler shoal to the south of the gap. Vessels should not go to the NW. of it. Harbor regulation. — The speed of any vessel entering, leaving, or within the harbor is limited to 4 knots per hour. Vessels offending are subject to a fine of *20. Coast. — From Toronto (Gibraltar light) the coast trends 15t^ (18) miles NB. by E. to Port Union on the Rouge river. Just north of Port Union is Frenchman bay or Pickering harbor. t visible 8 (9^) of bar, running rtnimissioners. ?ar tho east end. the Government em entrance to 1. It should bo hexagonal iron r. It stands on I nearer the end 'ork is finished, later. Toronto to the to allow for the :he bank to the buoy to the east fathoms, except to go inside the 1 red spar buoy >n the starboard [ithouse bearing at tho entrance, 50 feet. ; water is on the uinel are placed ing into the bay. je channel is 400 iutering are the vay between the ral spire, the south of the ring, leaving, or els offending are brends 15t^ (18) Just north of FRENCHMAN BAY PRE8QU* ILE HARBOR. 199 Frenchman Bay or Pickering light— On the East pierhead is sliown, 51 feet above lake level, a fixed green light, visible 10 (U.^) miles. At 7 (8) miles ENE. j} E. of this liglit is Whitby, and 5 {o'^) niiles beyond, Oshawa harbor. Whitby light— On the West pier, 12 feet above the lake level, is shown a fixed white liglit, visible 5 (5'i) miles. Oshawa light— A fixed white light is shown from the pierhoa,3(i() feet S. 07° W. from No. 3 light, and 1,440 feet from Brighton wharf, is a fixed white light 45 feet above the lake level and visible (7) miles. The lighthouse Is a white square building on a square pier. No. 1 light.— At 1,420 feet S. 65° E. from No. 2 lijbt, and 1,100 f» et from Brighton wharf, is a fixed white light 28 feet above the lake level and visible (> (7) miles. The lighthouse is a white square building «)U a square pier. Brighton. — Directions. — No. 3 light tower stands in 1;> feet of water in the axis of the Murray cauiil and on the north side of the channel, w!.ich bears SW. by W. ^ W. (S. r,So VV.); in one w;^h No. 2 light, it leads up from the canal through the center of thecbauiiel, and is to lie left 100 feet on the starboard hand in passing up. After having passed it, if brought directly ahead, it will guide through the remainder of the dredged channel. Prince Edward, a large island, is deeply indented on all sides by numerous bays. It is separated from the mainland by Quinte bay and the channels leading to it. Ofi" the south shore of the island are numer- ous outlying shoals, and the prominent points have reefs extending from them for some distance. Wellers bay is at the western end of Prince Edward island and directly opposite Presqu' He harbor. There are shoals in the approach to this bay. Wellers Bay lights.— At the SW. end of Quinte Carrying Plaort churgen end of canal luare building a Dxed white and 1,440 feet the lake level re building on and 1,100 et the lake level :'e building on i> feet of water f the channel, No. 2 light, it % and is to l)e having passed luainder of the •n all sides by luinte bay and nd are nuiner- efs extending rd island and the approach {ring Place is a .bove the lake feet N. 463 e. lake level and Iding. >f the extrem- ) over Wellers the alignment St. has Nicholson island lying oil' it. About a mile south of the west ])oint of Nicholson island is Scotch Bonnet or Kgg island. Light- >n this little island is a fixed white light, ftl feet above the lake level and visible 12 {l3^^^) miles. The white circular light tower has a dwelling attached. Reef. — South 1^ (1.^) miles from Egg Island light is the north end of a reef which extends 2 {2i\,) miles in a SSW. direction ; east of its south enwiff »■ • . ... j ihiia B iia Ms t..- 202 LAKE ONTARIO. Fog sigiuiL — A Iiniul horn answers Higiiiils from vonnelH. William shoal, I'J t'cct water, and Harris shoal, 22 fuet water, lie botw«'en Kala*) Duck antl Main Dnek isliinds, luavin^ a clear cbauuel of .'U (1) miles b(>tweon Harris alioal and the Main Duck. Main Duck island is a narrow island nearly 2 (2,'*j,) miles east and west. The whole sontherii shore is lined with shoals and reefs, and this shore, as well as the westeru point of the island, should not be approached nearer than a mile. Yorkshire island. — From the east point of Main Duck island a shoal extends over a mile in a northeasterly direction, and on this shoal is Yorkshire island. Between Yorkshire and (l^alloup islands is a wide and deep passage, with no danger excei»t Galloup shoal, lying a mile west of (lalloup Island light. This shoal is buoyed, but has been the cause of many wrecks. Prince Edward, or South, bay, a deep indentation in Prince Ed- ward island, lies between South Bay and IMoasant (Indian) iwints. Flats point is in the southwestern part of Prince Edward bay. There is a lifeboat station on the point next east of Flats. Waupoos island ami Green island lie in Prince Edward bay on , its northern shoii?. North of (ireen island is cape Vesey, and from this cape to Pleasant (Indian) point the shore of Prince Edward is steep- to and can be safely approached. Both the north and south shores of the bay are formed by long, narrow peninsulas extending NE. and easterly from Prince Edward island. Pleasant (Indian) Point light, at entrani^e to Adolphas reach, Bay of Quiute, is fixed \\ hite, 52 feet above the lake level, and visible 10 (11^) miles. The light is shown from a white octagonal building with red lantern. Big Bar shoal, detached and with 18 feet over it, lies 4i (5J) miles ESB. 3 E. from Pleasant Point light. Murray canal is a straight cut, -without locks, 5-^ (6J) miles long between extremities of piers, 80 feet wide on the bottom and 12 feet deep, below the ordinary low-water level of lake Ontario, joining Presqu' He harbor with the Bay of Quinte. Its axis is ENI-]. and WSW., and it is crossed by one railway and three highway bridges. At each end of the canal crib- work piers have been built on either side into the shallow M ater, and beyond them channels, dredged 200 feet wide, have been continued until water of the same depth as that in the canal was reached. The dredged cut at the east end extends 2,300 feet beyond the ends of the piers, and is for its whole length in the axis of the canal. By day the center of the swings of the bridges, and by night ^he lights on the same (white if swings are open, red if closed), in range, will indicate, with sufficient accuracy, the middle of the dredged chan- nel and of the canal. Each bridge is passed to the southward of the swing, which is somewhat to the northward of the axis of the canal. elH. i feet wator, He •laav chaiuiel of miles east and and rcufa, and , bIiouUI not be Diivk island a tid on this slioal 1 deep passage, rest of (lalloup cause of many 1 in Prince Ed- ian) iK)ints. Edward bay. lats. Waupoos )n , its nortlieru tin tbis cape to teepto and can 8 of the bay are d easterly from phas reacb, Bay rel, and visible igonal building ea 4i (5J) miles (6J) miles long lx)m and 12 feet ')utario, joining &fE.andW8\V., idges. At each jer side into the feet wide, have n the canal was ,300 feet beyond the axis of the d by night ^he osed), in range, e dredged chan- )Uthward of the 1 of the canal. BAY or QUINTB. MtrnUAY CANAL LIOHTS. 203 On the north pier, M t«et from tins outer end, west entrance to canal, is a iixod rt'dliglil, 1 I feet above the lake levehind visible 4 (I, "„) miles. Above, the ctMitcr it' the swing pier of Lovatfs bridge, (>,4'J0feet from west (Mitranceto ciiiial, is h llxed white mid red Ii«lit,;r» feet above lake level and visible i> (7) miles. Above the center jjier of Hmitiilield bridge, 7,700 feet east, from pre- ceding, is a tlxed white and red lig'ut, ii-i feet above lake level and visible (7) miles. Above the center of the swing pier of the (Jcntral Ontario Railway bridge, 0,(»00 feet from the preceding, is a flxeil white and red light, 20 feet above the lake li vel and visible 4 (4,'i,) miles. Above the center of the swing pier of the Carrying Place Highway bridge, l,r»()0 feet east of the preceding, is a tlxed white and red light, 35 feet above the lake level and visible G (7) miles. On the north j)ier, 30 feet from outer end, at east entrance to Murray canal, is a fixed red light, 19 feet above the lake level and visible 4 (4i\y) miles. Bay of Quinte. — Tlie name is applied to all the waters north of Prince Edward island which separate it from the mainland, although the bay proper, apparently, is the large indentation in the northern and central part of the island. The bay is connected with Presiin' lie harbor and lake Ontario by the Murray canal on the west, and with lake Ontario and the St. Lawrence river by Adolphus reach and North channel on the east. On the north shore of the bsiy the Trent, Moira, Salmon, taid Napaneo rivers empty. Bast of the Napanee river is Casey point, and between it and Barker point is a narrow buet known as ITay bay. The channel north of Pleasant point is Adolphus reach, which, with North channel, leads into the north branch of tlie St. Law- rence river. Adolphustown is at the west end of Adolphus reach, and Collins bay at the east end of the North channel. Trenton near the mouth of the Trent river, Belleville at the moutli of the Moira i iver, Shanuonville near the mouth of the Salmon river, and Doseronto at the mouth of the Napanee river £.\re the principal towns on the north sliore of Quinte bay. On the south shore of the bay, west of Green point, are Big and other islands. Trenton, at the mouth of the Trent river, has a good but not large harbor. The depth of water vstries, but it usually averages 11 feet. There is a bur along the west bank of the river, and vessels approaching keep to the east and approach in a line about the center of the river. There are buoys after turning to the east going down the bay of Quinte toward Belleville. Between Trenton and Belleville a bar stretches along the middle of the bay, and vessels usually keep along the south shore. There is a current of about 2 miles an hour in the bay except during 204 LAKE ONTARIO. heavy west winds. The prevailing winds in summer are SW. No port charges or pih.tage. Storm signals are shown at the outside lumber wharf on east side of river. Hallowell bay, at the head of which is Picton, is east of Green point and opposite Barker point, on the main shore. yUINTE BAY LIGHTS. Nigger Island Shoal light is fixed white, 27 feet above the bay level, and visible 10 (lU) miles. The lightliouse is a square tower, surmounted by a square lantern, the whole painted white. It is 27 feet in height from the deck of the pier to the top of the lantern. It stands on a crib work pier, sunk in 11 feet of water, on the north side of the steamboat channel and near the western extremity of the shoal running southwestwardly from Nigger island toward Potters island. Directions. — Vessels upon leaving the swing of the Belleville bridge, bound up, can steer directly for the light on a course WSW. (S. G8° W.), and should pass the light, leaving it about 300 feet on the north side or starboard hand. Vessels leaving the Murray canal, bound down, after passing the red buoy off Onderdonk shoal can also steer directly for the liglit on a course NE. (N. 45° E.). When within 4,000 feet of it they should open it half a point on the starboard bow, so as to clear the north extreme of the shoal extending from Potters island. At 2,000 feet distant they should change their course so as to pass it, leaving it 300 feet to the northward, or on the port hand, and, after passing the most easterly black buoy on Potters Island shoal, can shape their course directly for the swing of Belleville bridge. Bay of Quinte Bridge light, Immediately west of Belleville, is fixed white south of southern opening j fixed white north of northern opening; red light at each end of drawspan when bridge is closed; two green lights at each end of drawspan when bridge is open. The light is 18 feet above the bay level and is visible 3 (3J) miles. The center pier of swing span is 195 feet from the south, or Prince Edward County, shore. A channel 100 feet wide lies both north and south of the swing pier. When draw is open two green lights, flanked by two white lights, will be seen, and vessels must pass between a green and a white light. The light is maintained by the bridge company. Belleville light— On the SE. edge of shoal, at entrance to the Belle- ville harbor, is a fixed white light, 38 feet above the bay level and visible 11 (12§) miles. Telegraph Island light, between Trident point and Deseronto, is fixed white, 40 feet above the bay level and visible 12 (13-i%) miles. Deseronto light, fixed white, is shown from square tower on roof of freight shed oa the railway wharf. The light is 44 feet above the bay level, visible 11 (12§) miles, and serves as a guide to Deseronto from Belleville, Picton, and Napanee. Amherst island, a large island o:i the soutli side of North ;hannel, are SW. No port vharf oil east side is east of Green let above the bay 8 a square tower, liite. It is 27 feet [intern. It stands north side of the the shoal running island. s Belleville bridge, rse WSW. (S. 08° ) feet on the north anal, bound down, also steer directly lin 4,000 feet of it ', so as to clear the island. At 2,000 pass it, leaving it after passing the shape their course Belleville, is fixed northern opening ; slosed; two green 1. The light is 18 The center pier of ird County, shore, af the swing pier, white lights, will nd a white light. ranee to the Belle- y level and visible and Deseronto, is J (13^%) miles. e tower on roof of eet above the bay o Deseronto from i)f North ;hannel, AMHERST ISLAND — KINGSTON. 205 is 9 (10^) miles NE. and SW., and about 3 (3^) miles north and south through its center. Pig point is the west point of the island and is steepto, as is the whoie north shore to the shoal extending north over l-j% (1^) miles from the NE. end of the island. This shoal is a mile broad, and on it are several islets; the outer ones are Brother and Cen- ter Brother islands; the bar is 4 mile from the point. Amherst bay is an indentation on the south shore of Amherst island. The west point of this bay is surrounded by reefs, and a short distance off is Lagoon island. Emeric point, the east point of Amherst bay and the SE. point of the island, is also shoal, and off it is Nut island. The little bay inside of Nut island is shoal and rocky. The eastern shore of Amherst island is shoal, and in places there are outlying shoals about f mile offshore. Salmon island, 1^ (1^) miles ESE. ^ E. from Brother island, is on the northern part of a large shoal, which is almost connected with the shoiil from Amherst island. It extends South, SE., and SW. from Sal- mon island for about ^ mile. Vessels should not attempt to pass south or west of Salmon island. Center Brother Island light. — On the northernmost point of the island, from a white, square lighthouse with red lantern, is shown, 31 feet above the lake level, a fixed white light, visible 10 (Hi) miles. Outlying shoals. — Halfway between the NE. end of Amherst island and Siiucoe island is the center of an extensive shoal, least water 4 feet. From its c£"*;er the shoal extends § mile NE. and SW., and is the same distancu broad. East of this shoal % mile is a small shoal, least water 15 feet, which lies 1 (IJ) miles SW. of Snake Island light. By keeping Nine-mile (Gage) Point and Pigeon Island lights in line, a vessel will clear both shoals, but passes close to the SW. edge of the smaller. ShoaL — At 2 (2-i^) miles East from Center Brother Island light is a lofoot shoal (unmarked), which lies ^ mile off shore. Kingston, at the mouth of the St. Lawrence, is on the Great Cata- raqui river. It is of importance as a naval station, is fortified, and commands the entrance of the Rideau canal. The United States is represented by a consul. Dry dock. — There is a Government dock, 280 feet over all, width of gate 55 feet, and depth over sill IG feet. It can be lengthened 313 feet by moving caisson. Ekingston harbor has depths of from 12 to 15 feet. There is good anchorage off the shipyard. Directions. — The best approach from the west is west of Snake island and close .ilongshore inside of the two 12-foot shoals, marjced by beacon buoys, lying off the city about ^ mile. In approaching from the east- ward the main shore should be kept aboard to avoid the 11-foot shoal, marked by beacon buoy, a mile west of Browns Point light. Leading marks. — Barryfleld Range lights and targets in line carry clear of shoals to Kingston. t M 206 LAKE ONTARIO. Storm signals are shown from staff on Folgers wharf. Kingston light, a fixed white gas light, is shown from the City Hall clock. It is visible 9 (10^) miles. Buoys.— Penitentiary shoal, Myles shoal, and Bolivia shoal, in Kings- ton harbor, are marked by wooden spar buoys surmounted by slat- work globes or si)lieres. These buoys are painted in red and black bands and are moored as near the middle of the shoals ss possible, in 12 to 14 feet of water. Vessels should give the buoys a good berth, as the shoals extend some distance from them. RANGE LIGHTS. Front— At 370 feet East from the end of Kingston bridge is a fixed white light, 48 feet above the river level, and visible 12 {iZ,%) miles. It is shown from a red tripod, with white oval beacon at its top aud browu shed at its base. Roar.— Fifteen hundred feet NE. | N. (N. 35° E.) from the front light is shown from a similar lighthouse, 75 feet above the river level, a fixed white light, visible 12 (13j%) miles. The lights show over a small arc on each side of the alignment, which leads inside of Car- ruthers and Point Frederick shoals. Point Frederick, fortified, separates Kingston harbor from Navy bay, which is shoal ; and Point Henry, also fortified, separates Navy from Dead Man bay. Cedar island lies off Dead Man bay. For the south shore and Browns (Kuapps) Point light, see page 194 rf. m the City Hall shoal, in Kings- ed by slat-work i are moored as 5t of vrater. als extend some iridge is a fixed 12 (i3.%f) miles. X at its top and from the front the river level, ts show over a I inside of Oar- •bor from Navy jeparatcs Navy )ay. light, see page INDEX. Paga Abbaye point 24 sboal east of 8 buoys 24 Abiiio point 178 Adams point 118 shoal near 118 Adolpbus reach 202 Adolphiistown 203 Agate bay, Minnesota 30 fog signal 30 light 30 harbor, Michigan 22 directions 22 island 39 light 39 point 22 Agents, Hydrographic office 239 Abna])ee 76 harbor 76 directions 76 lights 7i> river 76 Alabaster 124 Albany island 50 Albertport 133 Alcona 122 Allen Otty shoal 193 Alpena 121 directions 122 display station 122 fog signal 122 improvements 121 light 121 signal station 122 Amherst bay 205 island 204 outlying shoals 205 Amherstburg 142 lights 143 Amygdaloid island 8 rooks oif 8 Anchor bay 140 Ausels point 106 Page. Apostles islands 37 anchorage 37 Arthur port 33 directions 32 Ashland 18 sunken cribs 18 Ashtabula 163 directions 164 fog signal 164 life-saving station 163 lights 164 river 103 bar 163 An Sable 122 light 28,122 point 28,53,123 river 122 spit 8 Austin port 125 Aux Barques point 70, 127 light 127 Cheues point 52 Frenes point 45 Gres point 124 river 124 Mines point 36 Avon point 160 B. Baby creek 137 Babya point 138 Bailey harbor 74 baoys 75 directions 75 lights 75 shoals , 75 Baird point 192 Bald Head 200 Tomhill 103 Ballards reef 143 buoy 143 fog signal 143 lightvessel 143 Ballast island 148 207 -..jjmmmi»m.y 208 INDEX. Vage. Ballast islaiul buoyH 14!) Bank point 100 sho:il 100 buoy 100 Bar i.oint 144, 173 fo;; signal 144 lii{litve»Hi.'l 144 Hhoal 144 Baraga 24 Barcelona 167 Barbed point 47,178 Bhoaloff 47 Bnrkbay 16 point 16 Barker point 203 Barnotvillo 128 Barryfield lightB 205 Bass islands 148 lake 98 BasButt cbunuel 139 Batchowana bay 36 Bateau channel 193 rock 38 patch near 9 Battle island 34 light 34 Bay City 125 directions 126 display station 126 dock 126 of Qiiinto 203 bridge light 204 lights 204 north channel 203 Bayfield 17,134 river 134 rock 44 Bayport 125 Bear creek 138 lake 95 point 192 shoaloff 192 Beaver bay 30 island 66,172 buoy 66 fog signal 67 harbor 66 directions 67 light 66 life-saving station- 66 light 67 shoals 66 Tail point 49 Belle Isle 142 buoys 142 PaKn. Belle isle light 142 river 138,140 station 140 Bellevil.fi 204 bridge 204 light 204 directions 204 harbor 204 light 204 Bellows island 94 Bells point 44,193 Benona 99 Benton harbor 103 canal 103 Bete Grise bay 23 Betsio lake 95 point 95 fog signal 95 light 95 life-saving station 95 Biddle point 57,69 Big Bar shoal 202 Big Bay de Noqnette 106 point 25 spit, north of 8 Chicken island 151 fork 32 island 43 point 43 Sable 97 lake 97 life-saving station 97 light 97 Rock point 93 Sister creek 168 Sodusbay 186 channel 186 directions 186 lights 186 Trout bay 31 Bird island 121 reef 169 buoy 169 Black bay 33 shoal in entrance 33 creek 172 bay 33 light 33 (Holland) lake 101 river 33, 102, 122, 136, 160 bar 160 bay 190 harbor 160 directions 160 lights 160 PaKO. 142 138,140 140 204 204 204 204 204 204 94 44,193 99 103 103 23 95 95 95 95 Ektion 95 57,69 202 106 25 thof 8 151 32 43 43 97 97 ig station 97 97 93 168 186 186 IS 186 186 31 121 169 169 33 ince 33 172 33 33 101 33, 102, 122, 136, 160 160 190 160 la 160 160 INDEX. 209 Page. Black river island 122 life-saving Htation 122 light 122 shoals 122 Rock harbor 171 Blackwell canal 168 Blake point 38 shoal, east of 9, 38 Blnff point 176 Bois Blauc island 56, 143 coast of 66 life-saving station 56 light 56,143 shoalofl' 56 lights 143 Bolivar shoal 206 buoy 206 Bond Head 199 light 199 Boot island 50 Bourassas point 70 Bowers Harbor 94 Bowlderreef 66 bnoy 66 Boyer bluff 72 Braddock point 184 light 184 Brest 153 Brighton 200 directions 200 harbor 200 lights 200 Britain port 199 Brother island 205 Browns point 194 light 194 shoal off 194 Bmceport 176 Bruise bay 35 river 35 rocks, west of 9 point 60 Bnckhom island 172 Buffalo 168 creek 168 harbor 168 breakwater 169 buoys 169 caution 170 currents 170, 171 depths 168 directions 171 docks 169 — fogsignal 170 improvements 168 1944— No. 108 14 I'agn. Buffalo harbor life-saving station . . . 170 lights 169,170 river 168 Hull Rock point 191 Bum iHland 109 Burlington bay 30, 196 canal 196 danger signal 196 directions 196 ^"fogsignal 196 lights 196 storms 196 storm signals 196 Burchville 129 Burnt Bluff 106 Cabin point 127 Burwellport 176 C. Calf island 189 spit 189 buoy 190 Calumet 91 buoys ■ ' 91 caution 91 currents 93 directions 92 dry dock 92 Illinois Steel Company's harbor. 92 life-saving station 91 light, fog signal 91 river 91 bar 91 buoys 91 caution ; 92 Cana island 74 light 74 Canoe rocks 38 shoal, ENE. of 9 Cape Gargantua 35 Hurd 131 channel 131 Ipperwash 134 Vincent 192. Caribou island '. 39 fog signal 39 ■ light 39 shoals off 10 Carlton bay 49 Carp lake 95 river 51,95 point 95 Carpenter point 156 Carruthcrs shoal 206 Carrying Place Highway Bridge light 202 210 INDEX. Pagn. Cnsevillo 125 CuMt-y point 203 (.'iiHtln j)oiut 27 Cut island 37 anclioragi! 37 Cntuwbft inland 156 Cutfish river 191 Cntlicad point 95 Catholic MiMsiou lijjbts 44 Cavo point .' 75 Cedar inland 206 point 154,158 ran^e 158 HlioalH 157 river 109 buoy 10{» caution 109 barbor 109 directions 109 lights 109 shoals 109 Center Brother inland 205 light 205 Centerville 78 shoal SE. of 78 Central Ontario Railroad Bridge light 203 Chanibtrs island 109, 115 light 109,115 shoals 115 Chantry island 132 fogsignal 132 light 132 Chappel rock 27 Charity island 125 buoy 125 light 125 Little 124 shoals off 124 shoal 193 buoy.. 193 Charles point 186 Charlevoix 93 harbor , . 93 directions 93 lights 93 Charlotte 185 harbor 185 channel 185 — directions 185 fogsignal 185 life-saving station 185 lights 185 Cbaumont 191 bay 191 Chautauqua creek 167 Page. Cheboygan 58 directions 53 fogsignal 53 improvenieutn 63 lights 53 range lights 53 river 53 buoy 53 Cheltenham shonl 91 Chenal Aboutroiid 140 Hearts 138 Cbnqtiauiogon bay 18 point 18 fog signal 18 light 18 wreck ig Cherry island 191 Chicago 85 Branch Ilydrograpbic olJice 88 breakwaters, lights 87 cribs 87 currents 89 directions 89 dry docks 88 fog signals 87 Four-mile crib light 88 harbor 85 fog signals, lights 87 of refuge 85 Hyde Park cribs, 1 ights 88 Lake View cribs, lights 87 landmark 87 life-saving station 88 onter breakwater lights 87 pilotage 89 river 85 signals 89 shoals near 90 time ball 88 tugs, wharfage 88 waterworks crib, fog signal, light 87 Chickens, the i5i . ieefs 162 Chickenolee reef 152 Chiefs point 132 Chippewa 171 channel 171 harbor 37 -point 107 Choyyecape 35 Church point 44 range lights 44 Clarke point 91,133 light 133 Pag*. B8 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 91 140 138 18 18 18 18 18 191 85 pliic ortice 88 its 87 87 89 89 88 87 ;ht 88 85 igbts 87 85 lights 88 lights 87 87 1 88 lights 87 89 85 89 90 88 88 , fog sigual, 87 151. 152 152 132 171 171 37 107 35 44 44 91,133 133 INDEX. 211 Page. Clarke point shoal 91 hiioy 91 caution 91 Clarkson 197 shoal off 197 Clny banks 98 Cleveland 160 approach, caution 160 Branch Hydrographio office 161 breakwater 160 caution 162 dopt'is in channel 161 directions 162 docks 162 fog signal 162 lifo-sav ing station 161 lights 162 time ball 161 Clinton point 18 port 156 light 156 river 140 Coburg 199 life-saving station 199 lights 199 Cockbnrn island 130 Col borne 199 harbor 199 port 178 Colchester 151,173' reef 151,173 fogsignal 151,173 light 151,173 wreck 151 Collier port 47 Collins bay 203 Conneaut 164 river 164 depths in 164 directions 164 lights 164 Connors island 172 harbor 172 point 12,14 ligbts 12 Copper harbor 22 directions 22 ligbts 22 Minepoint 36 , rocks near 10,36 Corboy point 36 light 36 Corona shoal 107 buoy 107 Corunna 137 Pagw. Corunna lights ] 37 Corsica shoal 129 Cove Island 131 fogsignal 131 light 131 Crab island 47 Cranes point 128 Credit port 197 ligbt 197 river 197 Crescent port 125 Crisps lifu-saving station . . . , 28 Crooked creek 164 island 120 Cross village 93 Crystal lake 95 Currents 1 Lake Erie 5 Huron 5 Michigan 4 Ontario 5 Superior 3 Niagara river 171, 183 Strait of Mackinac 58 Cnyabogariver I6O Dalhonsie port 182 Dangers, Lake Erie 146 Huron 117 Michigan 61 Ontario igQ Superior 7^9 Dark Hole passage 45 rangelights 45 Darlington harbor 199 light 199 Davignon point 41 Deadman bay 2O6 Deans 77 Death Door bluff 116 De P iiirhnven 110 FiiirHimn 186 directions 187 fog signal 187 lights 187 Fairport 102 bar 162 note 163 (Mreotions 103 life-saving station 162 lights...! 162 False Detour channel 130 Duck island 201 fogsignal 202 light 201 Presqne He harbor 119 dangers 119 directious 119 Farmers' Ridge passage 44 lights 44 Fawn island 137 Ferguson point 194 Fighting island 143 buoy 143 Fish creek 18 bay 114 Fishermans island 93 shoal near 93 Fitzwilliam channel 131 Five-foot shoal 46 buoy 46 Flat rock point 126 Flats point 202 Fluor island 34 Fond du Lac 16 Fools bay 129 Forest bay 127 Forester 129 Forestville 128 Fort Erie 168 point 169 buoys 169 Gratiot 129 fogsignal 130 lights 129,130,136 shoalSE.of 136 Mackinac 58 Maiden 141 Massassauga 182 Niagara 182 life-saving station 183 -light 183 214 INDEX. PiiBe. FortWillclnH 23 linhtH 23 William 32 i«,rty-inil<) jxHut 118 Iifo-8aviii({atatioii 118 Fonrt<(flii-iiiilo ]ioint 19 — lot; signal 19 litlit.. 19 Bpit oft" 7 Fox JHland 192 Fox inlaiile 42; WgUU 42 I Hen islnml 151 Hen aixl CliickxiiH lights 45 HendorHon Imy 10<) Imrbor VM port 190 Henry jioint 206 Heniiitu i Innd 14 HerHon iHlaud 13it lijrhtH ISO Hi'iTinglake 06 HcBBel village 50 HibbardB rock 36 Highisland 66 Hills point 113 shoal 113 — buoys 113 Hinckley point 192 Hog island 64,72,94 — reef 64 buoy 64 Holland 101 currents 102 directions 101 lake 101 life-savingstation 101 lights 101 Hope port 199 light 199 Horse island 1:«1 light 192 Horseshoe island 115, 193 reefs 116,16.? buoy , 116,169 light 170 Houghton 21 point 17 Hoyt shoal 46 buoy 46 Hughes point 69 Humber bay 197 river 197 Hungerford point 131 Hurdcape 131 Huron 159 bay 24 city 127 Pat*, 1 1 UTon (lepths i n channel 159 directions 169 islands 25 fog Hjgnal 26 light .^ lake. (.SVo Lake Huron. ) light 169 tnountains 25 point 140 port 13 dock 18 river 24,159 point 24 shoiil NFi. of 8 shonl near 169 Hyde Park cribs 90 lights 90 shoals 90 buoys 90 Hydcs point. 177 Hydrographio Oftico agents 239 publications 233 I. He aux Oalots 64 buoy 64 fogsignal 64 light 64 reef 64 La Salle 50 Marquette 60 St. Martin 51 Illinois Steel Company's harbor 91 Indian creek 128 point 44,106,202 lights 45,202 shoal IW town 108 Inner bay 176 Inverbnron 133 Ippcrvrash cape 134 Irondiquot bay 185 Iron Works shoal 172 Iroquois island 29 point 29 fogsignal 29 light 29 Isabelle point 23 shoal water 7 Pcches 142 buoy 142 Isle aux lioiihes 30 shoalsnear 9 Cbtpean 38 INDEX. 217 Pkg*. el 159 159 25 25 .•% Iiiroii.) 169 26 140 13 18 24,159 24 i'.,of 8 159 90 90 90 90 177 gents 239 233 64 64 al 64 64 64 50 50 51 ^'h harbor 91 128 44,106,202 45,202 IW 108 17« 133 134 185 172 29 29 29 29 23 7 142 142 30 lear 9 38 Fnge. lileKoyal* ^^ light 38 — BhoalH n«ar 8 Itle of Coven l-*! fog signal 131 light 131 Jack FiHh bay ** Jacks Uliiir 1»* liickBon harbor 72 JeiikiiiH rook •*■* buoy •** Johimoti island 187 Johnston channel 138 Jones creek 199 Kalamnxoo 102 river 102 directions 102 lights 102 KaniiniBtiquia river 32 lights 32 Keill shoal. 193 Kelley island 150 reef 150 buoy 150 Kemps 80 Kenosha 83 daymark 83 ^— directions 83 harbor 83 life-saving station 83 lights 83 pilots 84 tugs. 83 Kewaunee 76 directions 77 fog signal ■ 77 baruor 77 caution 77 llfe-sav ng station 77 lights river Keweenaw bay ——point point (small) sboalnear 7 Kincardine 133 lights 133 Kingston 205 directions 205 dock 205 harbor 205 l*ni[(<. K iugston harltor buoys 206 lights 206 storiu signals 206 KiuKHvillo 174 harbor '74 lights 174 Knapps point •'•'l lijjht 194 Knife island -9 river *-••• 29 Knob island 31 lijrht 31 rockHW.of 9 X.. L'Anse town 24 La Harbo point 51 Lac la Belle 23 Lac Tracy " Lagonu island 2(B liSke ( Jeorge 44 range 'II — F.rie U5 anchorages 146 Cana3 currents 1 > •"> dangers 116 harbors of refuge 146 islands in western part 147 navigation 6, 146 north shore 173 routes 147 table of directions and dis- tances 173 U.S. coast 153 U. S. islands 147 wrecks 174 Huron 117 Canadian shore 130 currents l- ■"* dangers 117 dimensions 117 east shore 131 harboref of refuge 117 lightvessel 129 fog signal 129 navigation 6, 117 northeast shore 130 west shore 118 Michigan -* - - 59 currents 1> * dangers 61 east shore 92 218 INDEX. I'BgC. Lakii Micliii,'an harbors of refuge 60 islanilH 62, 70 iiiivigatioii 6, fiO north shoro OH nmtes (Ji shore 62 west slioro 70 Nipissing 117 Ontario 180 ' Canadian roast 182, 192, 105 caution 181 cnrnints 1, 5 dangers 180 east shore 188 caution 188 navigation 180 routes 181 table of directions and dis- tances 195 -' U. 8. coast 181 St. Clair 140 directions l-il Flats Canal 138 lights 139 middle ground 137 buoys 137 Superior 6 anchorages 6 Canadian shore 31 current 1, 3 dangers, north shore 9 south shore 7 hai'iors of refuge 6 islands in 37 Canadian 38 United Stat«s 37 navigation 6 i • north shore 29 i ■ routes 13 ! south shore 16 ! View. 134 I crib lights 134 ' Lakeport 129 I Lamb island 34 | light 34 I Lansing shoal , 65, 69 ; buoy 65 : La Pate hill 32 i La Pointe 17 ' anchorage 3" < light 18 Laugljing Fisii point 26 spit oH' 8^ Leach island 36 ; rocks off 10, 36 I I'age. Leamington 174 light 174 Lewis point 44 lyowiston 182 Lexington 129 Lighthouse point 04, 152, 197 light 94,152,197 Lily pond 19 Lime Barrel shoal 190 Limekiln Crossing, lights 143 lightvessel 143 reef 169 huoy 169 Lincoln 97 Linden 21 List of Hydrographic Office agents.. 239 publications 233 l^ittle Bay do Nociiiette 108 buoys 108 shoals 108 Charity island 124 Chicken ishuid 151 Fork 32 Fort light 84 river 84 Galloup island 190 Gull island 71 Iron river 8 ■ spit. point. Sable - lake . light. 8 173 98 98 98 Sable lake . . . .' 97 Salmon river 189 life-saving station 189 Sandy bay 201 Sodns bay ]87 channel 188 directions 188 lights 188 Sturgeon bay 1 12 Summer island 70 Tail point m Traverse 93 bay 93 anchorage 93 directions 93 fog signal 93 light 93 Lizard islands 36 rocks near 10, 36 Lock point 38 Locust point 155 Lone rock 18 I'age. 174 174 4t 182 129 04, 152, li)7 94,152,197 19 190 g!it« 143 113 169 169 97 21 Office Mgeiits.. 239 ibliciitinns 233 te.... 108 loys 108 oak 108 124 151 32 84 84 190 71 8 8 173 98 98 98 97 189 ing station 189 201 187 188 113 188 188 112 70 - Ill 93 93 ye 93 ns 93 al 93 93 36 10,36 38 155 18 INDEX. 219 Pagn. Long island 17,176,194 point 176,192 • island 176 ■ fog signal 177 life-saving station 176 West point, light 176 light 177 . Outerbay 177 Tail point Ill fog signal Ill light Ill shoal Ill buoy Ill Lookout point 47 Lorain 160 bar 160 directions 160 lights 160 Lovatts Bridge light 203 Lower reach 139 lights 139 Lucas channel 1 31 Lucille island 31 Ludington 97 har1)or 97 directions 98 fog signiil 97 life-saving station 98 lights 97 Lyalisliurd 132. light 132 Lynn river 177 Lyons point ^ 185 M. Mac Oregor channel 131 Mackinac City 54 fog signal 54 light 54 fort 58 harbor 57 anchorage 58 buoy 57 current 58 directions. 57,58 island 57 light 58 point, old 54 fog signal 54 light 54 Strait 48 islands in 55 north short) 49 shoals in 55 South channel : 55 Pn^o. Mackinac Strait soutli shore 52 town 57 directions 57,58 pilots 58 tugs 58 wharfage 58 Madison Parle shoal 90 buoy 90 Magdalene island 17 anchorage 37 spit off 7 Magnetic reefs 130 Main channel, Georgian bay 131 Dnck island 202 Maitland port 177 river 133 Major shoal 57 buoy 57 Maiden fort 141 Mamainse point 36 Mamajnda lights 143 shoals 143 Manhattan lights 41, 155 Manistee 96 directions 97 fog signal 97 harbor 96 lake 96 life-saving station 97 lights 97 r i ver 96 Manistiquo 69 river 69 Manitoba shoal 35 Maniton island 23, 38 fog signal 23 light 23 rocky ilat 7 Paynicu shoal 62 buoy 02 Manitoulin island 130 Manitowoc 78 directions 78 dock 78 fog signal 78 harbor 78 lights 78 shoals off 78 river 78 Mnplo island 36 Marblehcud life-saving station 156 light 157 peninsula 157 point 157 Marine city 137 220 IKDEX. PRgO. Marinette 109 Marquette 26 I'ay 26,50 fogsignal 26 island 50 life-Having Htation 26 lights 26 1 ightbonse, rocks east of 8 Martin reef. 50 buoy 50 Mason creek 124 slioalsoff 124 Massassauga fort 182 Maunieebay 154 depths in channel 154 directions 155 lights 154,155 straight channel 154 buoys 154 river 154 McCargoe cove 37 McGnlpin point 54 light 54 McKay mount 32 McKellars harbor ^... 34 MoLeod bay 52 shoalsin 52 Menagerie island 38 light 38 shoals ENE. of 9 Mendota 23 light 23 Monekannee 29,109 Menominee 109 directions no harbor no light 110 river 109 shoals 110 Merida shoal 45 Miami and Erie canal 145 Mica bay 35 slioal 10,36 Michael bay 131 point 131 reef oflf 131 fog signal 131 light 131 Michi^'.'in city 104 directions, current 104 life-saving station 104 lights 104 island 33 light 18 Page. Michigan island, shoab near 7 lake. (See Lake Michigan). Michipicoteu harbor 35 island 33 fog signal 39 light 39 shoalsnear 10 — river 35 Middle Bass island 148 Middle bluff 106 ground 152 clearing marks 153 shoal 75,113 huoy 75,114 "land 25,119,152 anchorage 120 hnoy 120 directions 120 display station 119 fog signal 152 life-saving station II9 light 152 shoals 119 huoy 120 Xeebish 43 caution 43 cut 43 point 152 ™ef 169 hnoy leg shoal Y2 buoy 72 wrecks 72 Sister island 151 village 93 Mille Coqnins 69 point 69 shoal 69 Mill point 152 reef 152 Milk river 140 point 140 Milwaukee gi hay go shoals 81 buoy 81 cribs 80 currents gl directions gi docks 81 - — fogsignal gi harbor go life-saving station 81 lights 80,81 river 81 INDEX. 221 Vnge, near 7 ichigan). 35 38 39 89 10 35 148 106 152 153 75,113 75,114 25,119,152 120 120 120 119 152 ion 119 152 119 120 43 43 43 152 169 169 72 72 72 151 93 69 69 69 152 152 140 140 81 - 80 81 81 80 81 81 81 61 80 81 80.81 81 Page. Milwankee tngs, wharfage 81 South 81 Minnesota point 11 life-saving station 11 Misery hay 165 Mission point 57,94 light 94 Mississanga strait 130 fog signal 130 light 130 shoals in 130 Mitchelbay 140 point 140 Moffat harbor 34 Mohawk bay 178 anchorage 178 island 178 light 178 Moira river 203 Mondors 21 Monroe 153 harbor 153 caation 153 directions 153 light 153 Montague ... . 98 Montreal islac 36 reef « 10,36 river 18,36 shoal 10,36 Monument point Ill shoal 114 buoy 114 Moore point 155 Mooretown 137 Moranhay, East 51 West 51 Morgan point 178 Morgans reef 90 buoys 90 Mosquito point 152 Mouill^e point 153 Moultonbay 178 Mouse island 149,156 reef 149,156 buoy 149,156 Mndbay 74,192 creek 192 lake 46 buoy 45 Muddy creek 175 Murray canal 202 lights 203 Mnskallonge life-saving station 28 Moskalonge bay 191 Pago. Muskegon 99 directions 100 caution 100 fog signal 99 harbor 99 buoy 100 lake 99 shoals 100 life-saviug station 100 lights 99 river 99 Muskoka river 117 Myles shoal 206 buoy 206 N. Nauticoke shoal 177 Napunee 204 river 203 Navigation of the lakes 6 Navy bay 206 island 171 Ned point 44 Neebish, east, lights 44 middle 42 Nemadji river 11, 14 New Baltimore 140 Found shoal 192 Mission point 94 river 127 Newcastle 199 light 199 Newell's wood wharf 46 Niagara 183 fort 182 life-saving station 183 light 183 river (Lake Erie) 171 buoys at entrance 169 caution 170 current 171 lights 170 narrows, the 170 note 170 pilots 172 (Lake Ontario) 182,195 bar 182 current 183 directions 183 shoalsoff 182 buoys 182 reef 148,155 buoy 148,155 Nicholson island 201 point 200 222 INDEX. Page. Nigger islnnd 204 shoal 204 '■ ligl»t 204 Kiuo-fbot sboal 73 bnoy 73 Nine-niilo point 43, 52, 187, 189, 194 fogsignal 194 light 43,194 river 133 Nipigonbay 34 cantiou 34 region 31 river 34 strait 34 Nipissiiig lake 117 North liar lake 96 Bass island 148 bay 74 buoya 74 shoals 74 channel 12 lights 13 Fox island 67 Graham shoal 51 buoy 51 hai'bor 22 island 151 shoal 151 Mauitou island 68 life-saving station 68 wreck 68 point 120 Savage island 36 Twin island 37 spit oflf 37 Nortliport bay 94 shoals 94 harbor 94 point 94 North Unity. 95 Northwest shoal 129 Nottawasaga river 117 Nut island 205 O. Oat creek 81 island 17 point 126 Oaklandshoal 00 buoys 90 Oak Orchard creek 184 harbor 184 caution 184 directions 184 light 184 Page. Oakville iffj light 197 Oconto river no Ogden poiot 199 Ogontzbay 106 Ohio Central Coal Dock light 12 and Erie canal 145 Olcott ig3 channel 183 harbor 153 J'ght 183 ro('k west of I83 Old Mission point 94 light 94 Point Mackinac 54 fogsigual 54 light 54 Onderdouk 204 Ontario lake. (See Lake Ontario). port 189 Ontonagon jg lights 18 river jg Oqneoc river ng Orion rock 127 Oronto bay ig Orville town 69 Oscar 21 Oscoda 122 display station 123 Oshawa 199 harbor 199 light 199 Oswego 187 directions igg fog signal igs harl)or igg depths in igg improvements 188 life-saving station I88 lights 188 river 187 shoal weat of 137 currents , 187 Ottawa point ^ 123 Otter head 35 Outer bay 176 island 17 anchorage 37 fogsigual 17 light.... 17 shoals near 7 Pancake shoal 10,36 shoals 73 buoy 73 Owen channel 181 INDEX. 223 Page. ... 197 ... 197 ... 110 ... 199 ... 106 ... 12 . .. 145 ... 183 ... 183 ... 183 . .. 183 ... 183 ... 91 ... 94 .. 54 .. 54 .. 54 .. 204 .. 189 .. 18 .. 18 .. 18 .. 118 .. 127 .. 18 .. 69 .. 21 .. 122 .. 123 .. 199 .. 199 . . 199 .. 187 .. 188 .. 188 .. 188 .. 188 .. 188 . 188 . 188 .. 187 .. 187 .. 187 . 123 . 35 . 176 . 17 . 87 . 17 . 17 . 7 10,36 . 73 . 73 . 131 P. rage. Paliiimlos 30 Faliuers point 41 —— buoy 44 — range lights 44 Pancake point 36 —— shoal 36 buoy 36 — niiutinn 10, 36 Pajis, the 33 Patent bay 70 Hhoals 70 Parisian island 29,36 rocks off 10,29,36 Partridge point 44, 121 lights 44 river 126 Passage island 38 cantion 9 fogsignal 38 light .• 38 Patterson point 62, 69 Paw Paw river 103 Payment doeks 44 lights 44 Peach stone reef 199 Peacoek point 177 Peare river 33 Pel<^e Pointe 174 spit 174 light 174 Pelkieroef 62 Peninsula harbor 35 directions 35 light 35 point 107, 191 bnoy 107 cantion 107 light 107 Penitentiary shoal 206 bnoy 206 Pensankee point 110 shoal 110 Pentwater 98 directions 98 harbor 98 lake 98 life-saving station 98 lights 98 tugs 98 Pequaming point 24 » spit off 8 Pdre Marquette lake 97 Peshtigo point 110 river 110 '—shoals 110 Pngfl. Peshtigo shoals buoy 110 Peter point 201 fog signal 201 light 201 rock 199 light 199 Pic island 35,38 Pickards wharf 68 Pickering harbor 198 light 199 Picnic point 129 Pictou 204 Pictured rocks 28 Pie island 32 light 32 rocks SE. of 9 wharf 32 Pig point 205 Pigeon bay 31 island 193 fog signal 193 lights 193 point 31 caution 9 river 31,126 Pike creek 83 Pilgrim river , . . . 21 Pillar point 191 Pilot island 45,73 fogsignal 73 lights 45,73 shoal 73 Pinconning river 124 Pine lake 93 river 51,9.3,124,137 River bay 31 Pipe island 46 light 47 Platte river 95 point 95 Pleafiunt point 189,202 — light 202 Plum island 72 buoy 72 day mark 72 shoals 72 Poereef 55 buoy 56 fogsignal 56 light 56 Point. (See proper name.) ofWoods 46 bnoy 45 light« 45 peninsula 191 224 INDEX. Page. Pointe anx Barques 126 buoy 127 ■ display station 127 life-saving station 127 light 127 Pinj 43,175 Monill<;e 153 Pelde 153,174 island 152 life-saving station 152 light 152 spit 174 fog signal 174 light 174 wrecks near 174 Pnntiao shoal 143 buoy 143 Poplar point 106 Porcupine mountains 18 Porphyry point 33 light 33 rocks west of 9 Port Albert 133 Arthur 33 light 33 signals 33 Austin 125 fog signals 127 light 126 reef 126 Port bay 186 Britain 199 Bruce 176 light 176 Burwdl 176 light 176 Clark 133 light 133 Clinton 156 harbor 156 depthsin 156 Colborne 178 bar 179 beacon 178 directions 179 fogsignal 179 lights 178,179 skoal 179 Collier 47 Credit 197 light 197 Crescent 125 Dalhonsie 182,195 fogsignal 182 . lights 182 Port Dalhousie shoal off 182 Dover 177 light.. 177 port charges 177 reefs 177 Elgin 133 light 133 Granby 199 Hendorson 190 Hope 127,199 harbor 199 life-saving station 199 light 199 signals 199 Ilnron 136 dock 136 Maitland 177 light 178 Ontario 189 Orchard 149 point 149 buoy 149 Sowan 176 life-saving station 176 Sanilac 129 light 129 Samia 136 Stanley 176 life-saving station 176 light 176 Union 198 Washington 79 harbor 79 directions 80 lights 80 wharfage, tugs 80 Portage bay 31,70,131 entry 8 flatin 8 lake 19,96 canal 19 directions 20,96 fogsignal 20 life-saving station 20 lights „.. 20,96 river 19,24 improvements 19 lights 20 village 75 Porte des Morta 73 buoys 73 caution 73 current 73 directions 73 light 78 INDEX. 225 182 177 177 177 177 133 133 199 190 127,199 199 an 199 199 199 136 136 177 178 189 149 149 149 176 on 176 129 129 136 176 sn 176 176 198 79 79 80 80 80 31,70,131 8 8 19,96 19 20,96 20 itatioo 20 20,96 19,24 19 20 75 73 73 '73 73 73 73 Page. Porters island 22 Potter reef 62,69 Potters island 204 Pottohawk point 176 Poverty island 70 fogsignal 70 light 70 -■ passage 71 shoal 71 buoy 71 Powells point 27 Presquelle.... 25 harbor directions 119 False 119 fog signal 118 lights 119 shoal 118 peninsula 118 fogsignal..... 118 light 118 Isle bay 166 light 165 peninsula 164 Presqa' He harbor 199 light 200 Prinee Edwards bay 202 island 200 Providence bay 131 Pultneyville 185 harbor 185 Put In bay 149 Pyramid point 95 Q- Qaarry point 113 shoal 113 buoy 113 Quebec channel 14 light. 15 dock 15 harbor 39 fogsignal 39 light 39 shoals 39 '■ — buoys 39 Queenstown 182 Quintebay 203 carrying place 200 lights 204 Rabbits Back peak 51 Raby Head 199 Bacine 82 1944— No. 108 15 rage Kacine buoys 82 directJous 83 fog signal 82 harbor 82 life-saving station 82 lights 83 point 82 reef 82 buoys 82 signals 83 Rainbow cove 37 Hains island 42 -aisin river 153 jpberry island 17 light 17 Rattlesnake island 149 Raynolds reef 55 buoy 55 Rawley bay 74 shoals 74 buoy 74 Rawleys point 77 Red Bank 112 bluflf 112 Cliflf 17 RedRiver bluff 112 Red Sucker Cove 9i Reeds bay 193 Rice point 11 lights 12 Richards reef 67 Ricbmondville 129 Rideau canal 205 Rifle river 124 Rochester. (See Chai lotto) 185 Rock harbor 37 island 30,71 caution 9 light 71 passage 72 shoals 72 Rock of Ages 8 shoals near 8 Rocky island 37,70 anchorage 37 ahoals 7 shoals 71 Rogers city...: 118 directions 118 — display station 118 Rond island 120 Rondeau harbor 175 current 175 lights 175 Boot river 82 226 INDEX. Page, Koot river light 82 lioso shoal 65,63 buoy 65,63 caution 66 RosH port 34 directioDH 34 Kouge river igg Ronudisland 46,57,107 ligUts 45,57 shoal 57 buoy 57 lake 93 Rowan port 176 Rudder Head point 36 Rush lake 96 Russell island 139 buoy 139 lights 139 8. Sable point m buoy ;ili Sacketts harbor 191 directions ^... 191 light 191 Saddlebag island 50 Saginaw bay 124 buoys 125 dangers 124 directions 125 eastshore 124 light 126 shoal 123 west shore 124 City, east 125 west 125 river 125 buoys 126 directions 126 display station 126 improvements 125 lights...; 126 wreck 126 Saginin river 124 Saint Clair 137 riatsoanal 138 lights 139 — middle ground ... 137 —— buoys. . 137 lake. (See Lake St. Clair). river 135,138 caution 136 directions 186 northern approach 135 proposed channel 135 Saint Clair river shoal 136 buoy 136 South channel 138 Helena island 53 buoy 62 caution 53 ligbt 53 harbor 53 — ' sboal 62,62 buoy 62 Ignace channel 34 island 34 point 51 Joseph 103 directions 103 foggigual 103 harbor 103 island 40 life-saving station 103 light* 108 river 103 signal station lOS Lawrence river 193 Louis bay n ig river n current H caution 13 Martin bay 50 ilo 60 island 71 point 60 shoals 71 buoy 71 Marys Falls canal 40 lights 40 river 40 caution 43 dir'^ctions 42, 43 liKbts 41 Canadian canal 40 buoys, lights 41 Vital island 107 point 49,107 Salmon crook 185 island 205 point 201 light 201 river 189,203 Salt point 29 light 200 Salter island 34 Sand bay 36 Beach 127 harbor of refuge 127 anchorage 128 INDEX. 227 Vtgt. 136 136 Duel 138 52 62 52 52 52 62,62 62 34 34 51 103 103 103 103 40 ion 103 108 103 103 192 11,16 11 11 12 50 50 71 60 71 71 40 40 40 43 42,43 41 anal 40 , lights.... 41 107 49,107 185 205 201 201 189,203 29 200 34 36 127 127 128 Page. Sand Beach directioiM 128 display station 128 fog signal 128 in>provementH 127 life-saving station 128 lights 128 island 16,37 anchorage 37 light 16 slioalwater 7 point 24,27, 108, 124, 167 light 24,27 shoal 27 buoy 27,108 Sandusky 157 bay 157 currents 167 channel 167 buoys 167 directions 168 lights 163,159 river 157 Sandy bay 201 islands 36 caution 10,36 point 24 spit 8 Sanilac 129 light 129 Sarnia 136 Saogatuok 102 Saugeen light 132 peniusnla 181 river 132 Saukriver 79 Saukahead 25 SaultSte. Marie 40 canal 40 lights 11 Saunders point 108 buoy 108 shoals 108 Sawyers harbor 113 Scammon barber 60 Scare Crow island 121 Scotch Bonnet island 202 light 202 Scott middle ground 142 bmoys 142 point... 149,155 shoal 149,156 buoy 149,156 Scotts point 69 Search bay 60 Sebewaing 125 I'age. Sebewaing river 126 Seiches 2 Selkirk point 178 Seneca shoal 168 buoy 168 Seul Choix point 69 fog signal 69 light 69 Seven-mile point 93 Severn river in Shannonville 203 Sheboygan 79 directions 97 fog signal 79 life-saving station 79 lights .78,79 reef 78 buoys 79 river 79 signals 79 tugs 79 Shelter bay 26 Sheridan point 152 Sherwood point 112 fogsignal 113 light 113 shoals 113 Shiawassee river 125 Shiphouse point 191 Shoal bay 199 Shot point 26 spit 8 Silver creek 78,167 islet 33 Simcoe island 194 Sinunonsreef 62 fogsignal 63 light 63 Simpson island 84 Siskiwitbay 16,37 Sister bay ne bluff 116 islands 116 shoals 116 Six-mile point lights 42 Sixteen-mile creek 197 Six Town point 190 Skilligallee light 64 Slate islands 34,38 shoalsoff 10 Sleeping Bear hill 95 point 95 Smithfield Bridge light 203 Sm'-ky point 185 Snake island 112,194 S!l 228 INDEX. Snake iHland direotiona 194 light 194 Hhoal 194 Snow Shoe point 190 SodiiH point 186 Soiij. Iiarbor 201 Soiitli Unas i(*lunil 149 bay 27,202 point 189,201 light 201 SoHth channel IH, 138,192 directions 138 lights 138,139 Chicago 91 Fox island 68 * buoy 67,68 cantion 68 fogsignal 67 light 67 shoals 67 South Graham shoal 51 buoy 51 harbor 22 haven 102 directions 102 caution 102 harbor 102 life-saving station 102 light 102 signals 102 Mauitou island 68 fogsignal 68 harbor 68 light 68 Park shoal 90 bnoy 90 South Passage, Lake Erie 150, 156 shoals in 150,156 point 120 river 106 Sandy island 36 Twin island 37 anchorage 37 shoals 7 Southanipton 132 harbor 132 directions 133 improvements 132 lights 132 Southeast Bend 139 lights 139 shoal 147,169,175 buoy 169 South Park shoal 90 — — buoy 90 P«ge. Sonthport light 83 Spar island 31 Spectacle reef 55 buoy 55 fogsignal 56 light 66 Spider islands 74 flats 74 Spring mills 122 Square Island 171 Squaw island 66 buoy 66 fogsignal 65 light 65 shoals 66 point 108 Squirrel island 44,139 buoy 44,130 shoal 139 bnoy 138 Stagisland 137 buoys 137 caution 137 Stanley port 176 Stannard rock 25 beacon 26 fogsignal 26 light 26 Star Island 139 Starve island 149,166 reef 149,156 buoy 149,156 Stoamboat island 16 Stevens hill 112 Stockton island 17 anchorage 87 Stokes bay 131 light 132 Ctony creek 189 island 189 lake 98 point 106,153,189,192 light 189 Straiitof Mackinac 48 rcurrent 58 directions 67 islandsin 55 north shore 49 routes I 48 shonlsiu 55 South channel 56 shore 62 Mississanga ISO fogsignal 130 light. 130 INDEX. 229 Fig*. 83 31 B6 55 56 66 74 74 122 171 65 65 65 65 65 108 44,139 44,130 139 139 137 137 137 176 25 26 26 26 139 149,166 149,156 149,156 16 112 17 37 131 132 189 189 08 )6, 153, 189, 192 189 48 58 57 55 49 48 55 b1 55 , 52 130 130 130 Page. Btrait of MiuiBsaitga shoaU 130 Strawberry islands 116, 171 buoys 115 channel 115, 171 —— shoals 115 Strong iitlnnd 50 Sturgeon bay 112 buoys, caution 114 caution 112 directions 114 ioit, signal 113 lights 113 shoals 113 canal 75 directions 76 fog signal 75 note 76 life-saving station 76 lights.... 75,112 harbor of refuge 75 point 122,168 — life-saving station 122 light 122 Snckerrivor 28 Sugar inland 44,120,148 rapids 43 Sugarloaf point 178 — ^reef 179 Sulphur island 121 Summer island 70 Superior bay 10, 14 buoys 14 hghta 15 city 14 fog signal 15 light 14 pilots 16 routes 16 lake, (See Lake Superior.) West 16 dock 16 Surveyors reef 50 Suttons bay 94 point 94 Swan river 118 Swedeton creek 21 Sweets point 46 buoy 46 light 46 Table blnflf 116 Table : directions and distances, Lake Erie 173 I'njfe. Table : directions and distauces.L.tku Ontario 169 Talfords creek 137 Ta(|uanienon island 29 river 29 Tawas 123 East 123 bay 123 buoys 123 directions 123 display station 123 life-saving station 123 point 123 buoys 123 light 123 gpitoff 123 . wreck off 123 Tecuniseh shnal 177 Telegraph inland 204 light 204 Torracti bay 34 point 30 Texas - 189 life-saving station 189 Thames river 140 lights 140 The Bass Islands 148 Chickens 151 Dummy 175 light 175 Thirty-mile point 184 light 184 Thomas bay 131 Thompson island 31 Three-mile bay 191 town 191 Thunder bay 32,120 . anchorages 120 directions. 32, 122 island 120 .'lisplay station 120 fog signal 120 life-saving station 120 '■ light 120 river 120 ■ directions 122 — fog signal 122 ■ improvements 120 light 120 signals 122 cape 32 : fogsignal 32 light 32 rocks SE. of 9 Tibbetts point 191 230 iimEz. Page. Tibb«tta point ll^ht 191 Timber island 201 Tittabii wosMce river 126 Tobin liarl)or 37 reef 50 Todd harbor 37 Toledo 163 dock 163 Tooawitnda 172 channel 172 buoys 172 harbor 172 isldnd 172 Topsail inland 44 caution 44 lights 44 Torch bay 21 lake 21 Toronto 197 buoys 198 directions, East channel 198 West channel 198 fog signals 197 harbor 197 regulations 198 life-saving station 198 lights 197,198 observatory 197 Trail creek 104 Train bay 26 island 26 shoals 8 point 26 shoals 8 Traverse bay 59 city 94 island 24 shoal water 8 point 23,201 light 201 Trenton 203 signals 204 Trent river 203 Trident point 204 Trout bay 27 island 65 point 27 river 118 Tuckers point 94 Turtle island 154 ligbt 154 Twelve-mile creek 192 Twenty-mile creek 167 Twin island, shoals off 7 ^— river 77 Psge. Twin river fog signal 77 liKhts 77 point 77 Two creeks 77, 175 Harbors 39 fog signal 30 lights 80 ■ Heart river 28 life-saving station 28 Islands river 30 rocks off 9 Rivers 77 directions 78 life-saving station 78 light 77 tugs 78 Ulao 80 Union bay i8 port 198 V. Valley creek 24 Van Biiren point 166 Vermilion point 28 • life-saving station 28 shoal off ■ 28 Vermillion 159 river 159 bar 169 directions 160 light 159 Vesey cape 202 Vesuvius point 191 Victoria island 31 light 31 rooks SW. of 9 Vidal shoal 41 Vienna shoal 64 buoy 64 Vincent cape 192 Walkerpoint 131 Washburn 17 lights 17 Washington harbor 37, 72 island 72 Wangoshance island 54, 62 point 54,92 16-foot ahoal 55 buoy...- 55 shoal 64,62 caution 64 TNDEX. 281 vat* 77 77 77 77,176 30 30 80 28 ation 28 30 77 78 » 78 77 78 80 18 198 24 166 28 28 ; 28 169 159 169 160 159 202 191 31 31 9 41 64 64 192 131 17 17 37,72 72 54,62 54,92 , 65 55 64,62 54 I'ngo. WaiiifORhanro Rbonl foi; Klgnsl 56 liijlit 65,62 WaiikeKitn M (1iro<3tionf< M hnrhor S4 liRlltH H4 V/anpooB ixlanil 202 WunswiiiiKoiiing l>ay Ill WiuoIyBhonl 73, KiH, 178 1,i,„y 73,168,178 VVeh'onio jhIiiiiiIn 32 Welland cimnl 179 —— to Oapo'V'iiu'ent 181 Kingston 181 WellerH Iniy 200 bar 200 (liri'ctionH 200 lijrht 200 WcllinKton 201 West channel 17 Dnliith 16 harbor 150 lake 201 Moraii bay 51 point 201 Sister island 147 light 148 Superior 16 Twin river 77 Whaleback shoal 108 buoys 108 Whiskey island 65 shoah« 66 bnoy 65 Whitby 199 light 199 Whitofishbay 29,75,80 point 28,75 — fog signal 29 light 28 shoal 75 buoy 75 Whitehall 98 White lake 98 shoals 99 river 98 directions 99 harbor 99 life-saving station 99 lights 99 rook 128 PafA White rook point 128 town 128 shoal 63 bnoy KJ fog signal B3 light 03 W hi t«'H buy 190 Whitestono point 124 Wicked point 201 light 201 Wiggins point •. .. 70 slioal 70 WlUiniii shoal 202 WillianiH island 26 landing 27 shoals 8 bnoy 27 Willow rivor 127 wharf l*?? Wilson l,o bay 192 harbof ; 183 island 34 point _? Wind point 62 lights 82 Windmill point 141,178 lights 141 Winter point 43 lights 45 WisconHiu point 15 Wolfe island 194 Wood island , 26 shoal 8 Wood tick island 137 shoals 187 l>uoy8 138 Wright island 37 T Yeo channel 131 York island 17 spit 7 Yorkshire islr nd 202 Youngsiovn 183 Z. Zela point 56 shoal 56 buoy 56 LIST OF HYDROGRAPIIIC OFFICE PCBLICATIONS, ETC. vo. TITLE OF BOOK. PniCE. 22 45 99 100 104 64 73 78 23 25 102 105 16 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. General Examination of the Atlantic Ocean. By Capt. Charles Philippe De Kerhallet. Translated by Capt. R. ll. Wynian, U.S.N. 8vo. 1870. llydrographic Office Supplement No. 1. 1886. Hydrographic Office General Directions for the Atlantic Ocean. From the French of F. Labrosae. Second edition. Translated by Lieut. Commander J. B. Coghlan, U. 8. N. 8vo. 1873. Hydrographic Office Nova Scotia, Bay of Fundy, and South Shorn of (iulf of St. Law- rence to Miramithi Bay. Compiled by R. H. Orr. 8vo. 1891. Hydrographic Office Supplemen";. 1896. Hydrographic Office Gulf and River St. Lawrence and Cape Breton Island, including Cape Breton, Magdalen, and Anticosti Islands. Compiled by R.H. Orr. 8vo. 1891. Hydrographic Office Supplement.. 1894. Hydrographic Office The Depths that Can be Carried into the Harbors and Anchorages on the Atlantic and Gulf Coasts of the United States. Prepared by Gnstave Herrle. (Pamphlet.) 1893. Hydrographic Office... The Navigation of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea. Vol. I. The West India Islands, including the Bahama Banks and Islands, and the Bermuda Islands. Third edition. Com- piled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 189^ Hydrographic Office... Supplement. Third edition. 1896. Hydrographic Office The Navigation of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea. Vol. II. The Coast of the Mainland from Key West, Florida, U. S., to the Orinoco River. Venezuela, with the Adjacent Islands, Cays, and Banks. Third edition. Revised by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1896. Hydrographic Office Newfoundland and Labrador. Compiled by Lieut. W. W. Gil- patrick and Ensign John Gibson, U. S. N. 8vo. 1884. Hydro- graphic Office Newfoundland and Labrador. Supplement. 8vo. 1886. Com- piled by Licit. R. G. Davenport and Ensign John Gibson, U. 8. N. Hydrographic Office '• Supplement No. 2. 1891. Hydrographic Office Supplement No. 3. 1896. Hydrographic Office Winds, Currents, and Navigation of tho Gulf of Cadiz, the Western Coast of the Spanish Peninsula, aud the Strait of Gibraltar, by Capt. B. H. Wyman, U. 8. N. 8vo. 1870. Hydrographic Office... General Examination of the Mediterranean Sea. By Capt. A. Le Gra«, I. F. N. Translated by Capt. R. H. Wyman, U. S. N. 8vo. 1870. Hydrographic Office The Azores, Madeiras, Salvages, Canaries, and Cape Verde Islands. Second edition. Revised by R. C. Kay. 8vo. 1892. Hydro- graphic Office - Supplement. 1895. Hydrographic Office West Coast of Africa. From Cape Spartel to Cape Agulhas, in- cluding the Islands in Bight of Biafra, Ascension, St. Helena, Tristan da Cuuha, and Gongh lalr^nds. Second edition. Com- piled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1893. Hydrographic Office. . . . Supplement. 1896. Hydrographic Office Memoir of the Dangers rnd Ice in the North Atlantic. (Pam- phlet.) 1868. Bureau of Navigation 233 2.00 .10 2.00 1.50 .20 1.50 .10 .25 1.50 .20 L50 LOO .60 .20 .20 1.00 2.00 .80 .10 L50 .10 .20 234 LIST OF HYDROGBAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS. Lilt of Hydrographio Office publicationa, etc. — Contiuued. NO. 93 54 65 58 84 96 41 412* 41a 92 20 TITIJE OF BOOK. PRICE. 85 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN— Continued. Ire and Ice Movements in North Atlantic Ocean. By Ensign Hneli Kodiuau, U. S. N. (Pamphlet.) 1890. Hydrogiaphio Office. .... SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. East Coast of South America. From the Orinoco River to Ca,.e Vir- gins, including Falkland, South Georgia, Sandwich, and South Shetland Islands. Second edition. Compiled by R. C. Rav. U. S. N. 8vo. 1894. Hydrographic Office Supplement. 1895. Hydrographic Office Navigation of the Strait of Magellan. Translated from the French hy Commodore J. C. P. de Kraflit and Commander William Gib- son, U. S. N. (Pamphlet.) 188.3. Hydrographic Office Remarks by Capt. M. A. Lelf-vre, of the French Navv, on the voy- age of the Vaudreuil through Patagoniau Channels and Magellan Strait. Translated by Lieut. George M. Totten, U. S. N. (Pam- phlet.) 1874. Hydrographic Office PACIFIC OCEAN. General Examination of tlio Pacific Ocean. By Capt. Charles Phil- ippe De Kerhallet, French Imperial Navy, Translated under the direction of Commodore Charles Henry Uavis, U. S. N. 8vo. 1867 Supplement No. 1. 1886. Hydrographic Office The Navigation of the Pacific Ocean. Translated from the French of Mons. F. Labrosse, by Lieut. J. W. Miller, U. S. N. 8vo. 1874. Hydrographic Office. Republished 1893 The West Coast of Soutli America, including Magellan Strait, Tierra del Fuego, and the Outlying Islands. .Second edition. Compiled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1896. Hydrographic Office..:.... West Coast of Mexico and Central America, from the United States to Panama, including the Gulfs of California and Panama. Sec- ond edition. Compiled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1893. Hy- drographic Office Supplement. 1896. Hydrographic Office.. ......'.*."..',..",.'.". . The Coast of British Columbia. From Juan de FncaStrait to Port- land Canal, including Vancouver and Queen Charlotte Islands. Compiled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1891. Hydrographic Office Supplement. Third edition. 1895. Hydrographic Office.!!! List of Reported Dangers in the North Pacific Ocean. 8yo. 1871. Hydrographic Office Supplement No, 2. 1891. Hydrographic Office!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Supplement to Reported Dangers in the North Pacific Ocean. Com- piled and arranged by Commander William Gibson, U. 8. N. 8vo. 1880. Hydrographic Office List of Reported Dangers in the South Pacific Ocean. Compiled and arranged by Lieut. J. E. Pillsbury, U. S. N. 8vo. 1879. Hy- drographic) Office ____ Supplement. li~"i. Hydrographic Office !!.!!!!!!!!!!!! Ice and Ice MovementM in Bering Sea and tha Arctic Basin. By Ensign E. Simpson, U. S. N. (Pamphlet.) 1890. Hydrographic Office Supplement No. 2 to Directory for Boring Sea and Coast of Alaska! 1895. Hydrographic Office INDIAN OCEAN. Sailing Directions of the Indian Ocean, the Winds, Monsoons, Cur- rents, and Passages, including also the Java Sea, Suln Sea, Ara- fura Sea, and the Philippine Islands. Compiled by Lieut. F. E. Sawyer, U. 8. N. 8vo. 1887. Hydrographic Office Revised Supplement. 1894. Hydrographic Office $0.20 1.50 .10 ,20 ,20 L50 ,10 L50 1.50 .10 L60 .20 LOO .16 LOO LOO .15 .20 .20 LOO .20 LIST OP HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS. List of Bydrographio Office publications, e/o.— Contiuued. 235 PRICE. Kn Hugh fllce a,.e Vir- d South C. Ray, $0.20 1.50 .10 > French am Oib- .20 the voy- lagellan (Pam- .20 les Phil- nder tbo o. 1867. 1.50 10 French 9. 1874. 1.50 t, Tierra onipiled a d States a. Sec- ts. Hy- 1.50 toPort- lalands. graphic .10 1.60 )flace.... . 1871. .20 1 00 .15 Com- t. 8vo. 9mpiled 9. Hy. 1.00 1.00 in." By' fifraphio 18, Cur- sa, Ara- t. F. E. .15 .20 .20 1.00 .20 NO. 24 108 108 Part III Supp. 108 Part III Supp. 108 Part IV 30 31 32 72 9 13 17 71 106 66 57 90 91 TITLK OF BOOK. PRICK. INDIAN OCEAN— Continued. General Examination of Indian Ocean, with Directions for the Navi- gation of Torres Straits, ttc. By Capt. Charles Philippe De Ker- fiallet, I. F. N. Translated by Capt. R. H. Wyman, U. S. N. 8vo. 1870. Hydrographic Oflice LAKES. Sailing Directions for the Great Lakes and Connecting Waters. Second edition. Revised by R. C. Ray, U. 8. N. 8vo. 1896. Hydiographio Oflice Sailing Directions for Lake Huron, Straits of Mackinac, 3t. Clair and Detroit Rivers and l^ake St. Clair. Prepared by Lieut. D H. Mahan, U. S. N., assisted by R. C. Ray, U. 8. N. 8vo. 1895. Hydrographic Office Sailing Directions for North Channel of Lake Huron and Georgian Hay. Prepared by Lient. D. H. Mahan, U. £ N., assisted by R. (\ Ray, U.S. N. 8vo. 1895. Hydrographic Oflice Sailing Directions for Lake Erie ana Lake Ontario^ St. Clair and Detroit Rivers, and Lake St. Clair. Prepared by Lieut. D. H. Mahan, U. 8. N., assisted by R. C. Raj, U. 8. N. 8vo. 1896. Hydrographic Oflice LIGHT LISTS. List of Lights (No. 1) of N^rth and South America (excepting the United States), including the West Indies and Pacific Islands. Compiled by Boyntou Leach. 4to. 1896. Hydrographic Office.. List of Lights (No. 2) of South and East Coasts of Africa and the East Indies, including the East India Islands, China, Japan, Australia, Tasmania, and New Zealand. Compiled by Boynton Leach. 4to. 1896. Hydrographic Office List of Lights (No. 3) of the West Coasts of Africa, Europe, and the Mediterranean Sea, including the Adriatic, the Black Sea, and the Sea of Azof. Compiled by Boynton Leach. 4to. 1895. Hydro- graphic Office NAVIGATION BOOKS. List of (Geographical Positions. By Lient. Commander F. M. Green, U.8.N. 4to. 1883. Bureau of Navigation The New American Practical Navieator. liy Nathaniel Bowditch, LL. D. 8vo. Edition of 1896. Bureau of Navigation Bowditob's Ueeful Tables. 8vo. Edition of 1896. Bureau of Navi- gation , Projection Tables. 8vo. 1869. Bureau of Navigation Azimuth Tables for parallels of Latitude between 61^ N. 61° S. By Lients. Seaton Scbrocder and W. H. H. Southerland, U. 8. N. 4to. Edition of 1893. Hydrographic Office Azimuth Tables for parallels of latitude between 40° N. and 50° N. For the Great Lakes. 4to. 1894. Hydrographic Office Supplement to 106. Equation of Time for the vears 1894, 1895, 1896, and 1897 Arctic Azimuth Tables for parallels of latitude between 70° and 80°. Prepared by Lieuts. Seaton Schroeder and Richard Wain- wright, U. S. N. 12mo. 1881. Hydrographic Office Tables for Finding the Distance of an Object by two Bearings. (Pamphlet.) 1874. Hydrographic Office The Development of Great Circlo Sailing. By G. W. Littlehales. 8vo. 1889. Hydrographic Office Table of Meridianul Parts for the Terrestrial Spheroid, Compres- sion j^^ns. By G. W. Littlehales and J. S. Siobert. 3vo. 1839. Hydrographic Office $2.00 LOO LOO LOO .25 .25 .25 .75 2.25 L26 L50 4.25 .50 .10 .80 .20 LOO 1.20 236 LIST OP HYDROOBAPHIC OPPICB PUBLICATIONS. Lilt of HydrograpMo Office puhlinatioiu, «te.— Continued. NO. 109 109a 111 77 TITLK OF BOOK. 101 87 110 65 65a 656 76 97 94 NAVIGATION BOOKS— Continued. ContribntioHB to Terrestrial MaRnotism— The Variation of the Compass. Compiled by Lient. Channcey Thomas, U. 8. N. 8vo 1894. Hyrtrographic OfiSce Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism— The "Variation "of "the Compass. Compiled by G. W. Littlehales, C. E. 8vo. 1895. HTdrographio Office Tables showing the Local Mean Tinie"ortheSu"n'8*Vi8ible 'Rising and Setting for Each Degree of Latitude between 60° N. and 60* 8., and for Each Degree of the Sun's Declination. Prepared by Ensign George Wood Logan, U. S. N. 4to. 1896. Hydrographic METEOROLOGICAL. Practical Hints in regard to West India Hurricanes. Bv Lient. v^>Vl?'"''^-®-^V*^'- (Pan'PW**-) Hydrographic Office.... Nautical Monograph No, 5, The Great Storm off the Atlantic Coast ot the Unit«d States, March 11-14, 1888. By Everett Harden. U. 8. N. 1888. Hydrographic Offlci SURVEYS. The Methods and Results of the Survey of the West Const of Lower ^^VrS[°'* ^y *'**' Officers of the U. 8. S. nanger during the season of 18^ auft 1890. By Lieut. O. W. Lowry, U. 8. N.V and G. W Littlehales. 8vo, 1892. Hydrographic Office ....,, SIGNALS. International Signal Code. Revised and corrected to 1894, includ- ing the semaphore and storm signal service of the maritime coun- tries, the life-saving service and time ball system of the United States. 8vo. 1894. Bureau of Navigation.... PRICK. MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS. The Gulf Stream. By Lieut. Commander .John E.PillBbnrr.U. 8 N (Pamphlet.) 1894. Hydrographic Office Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Differences of "Lon"jt'i'- tude in the West Indies and Central America. By Lieut. Com- mander F.M.Green, U.S. N, 4to. 1877. Bureau o^ Navigation. Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Differences of I^niti- tude on the East Coast of South America. By Lieut. Commander F. M. Green, U. 8. N. 4to. 1880. Bureau of Navigation Keport on the Telegraphic Determination of Longitude in the East IndiM, China, and Japan. By Lient. Commander F. M. Green, y. S.N. 4to. 1881-&. Bureau of Navigation Kwort of Telejfraphic Determinations of Longitudes in Mexico. Central America, and West Coast of South America. By Lieut Commander C. H. Davis, Lieuts. J. A. Norris and Charles Laird, U. S. N. 4to. 1885. Bureau of Navigation Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Longiude's'in'MMi'c'o"' Central America, the West Indies, and on the North Coast of South America, with the Latitudes of the Several Stations. By Lieuts. .1. A. Norris and Charles Laird, U. 8. N. To which is appended a Report on Magnetic Observatione in Mexico and the West Indies, ^y Lieut. Charles Laird and Ensigns J. H. L. Holoombe and L. M. Garrett, U. S. N. 4to. 1891. Bureau of Navigation ^^^'ti"*^**^? I>»teniational Met^rolc"sio"c"oni^"arp"a"ri8,""l'm By Lieut. Aaron Wwd, U. 8. N. (Pamphlet.! 1890 (Pamphlet.) 18! ' Not for sale. $1.00 1.00 .30 .10 (*) 3.00 .10 (•) (*) (•) C) (•) .20 LIST OF HYDBOGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS. LUt of Eydrograskio Office pubHoationa, eto.— Coutinuod. 237 PRICK. NO. TITLK OF UOOK. $1.00 1.00 .30 .10 (*) MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS- Continued. 95 The Average Form of Isolated Submarine Peaks, and the interval which should obtain between deep-sen soimdings taken to dis close the character of the bottuin of the ocean. By G. W. Littlehales. 8vo. 1890. Hydrosniphic Office 98 Report on Uniform System for .Spelliug Foreign Geographic Names. By Lieut. C. M. McCarteney, U. 8. N., Boynton Leacli, and Gustavo Herrle. (Puuiphlct.) 1891. Hydrographic office lOS Submarine Cables ; Instruments and Implements Employed in Cable Surveys; Theory of Cable Laying; 3peciti cations and Costs; Babmarine Cable Systems of the World. Prepared by G. W. Littlehales. 8vo. 1892. Hydrographic Office 107 Wrooks and Derelicts in the North Atlantic Ocean. 1887 to 1893, inclusive. 4to. 1894. Hydrographic Office PRICE. $0.70 C) 1.00 C) * ITot for aale. (*) 3.00 .10 (•) (*) (•) C) C) .20 AGENTS FOR THE SALE OF HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE CHARTS, SAILING DIRECTIONS, ETC. AGENTS IN THE UNITED STATES. Geo. B. Carpenter & Co., Nos. 202-208 South Water street, Chicago, 111. Rand, McNally & Co., Nos. 166-168 Adams street, Chicago, 111. H. Channon & Co., Nos. 24 and 26 Market street, Chicago, 111. The Marine Kecovd Publishing Co., No. 308 Royal Insurance Building, Chicago, 111. The M. I. Wilcox Cordage Supply Co., Nos. 210-216 Water street, Toledo, Ohio. Burrows Brothers' Company, Nos. 23-27 Euclid avenue, Cleveland, Ohio. The Marine Rocord Publishing Co., Western Reserve Building, Cleveland, Ohio. The Marine Review, No. 516 Perry Paine Building, Cleveland, Ohio. Wm. J. Sell, No. 830 State street, Erie, Pa. H. D. Edwards & Co., Nos. 16-24 Woodward avenue, Detroit, Mich. J. W. Westcott, foot of Woodward avenue, Detroit, Mich. Howard C. Bristol, V. S. Signal Observer, East Tawas, Mich. Kendall Marine Reporting Company, Port Huron, Mich. Capt. A. O. Kruger, Marquette, Mich. P. M. Church, SauU Sainte Marie, Mich. A. Hirsch, Duluth, Minn. John 8. Parsons, comer West Cayuga and Water streets, Oswego, N. Y. Oeo. Hall Coal Comi>any, Ogdensbnrg, N. Y. Matthews, Northrup & Co., Nos. 179-183 Washington street, Buffalo, N. Y. Joys Bros. &, Co., No. 205 East Water street, Milwaukee, Wis. Charles S. Barker, West Superior, Wis. Frank Long, Publisher, Sturgeon Bay, Wis. C. H. Cuuimings, Eastport, Me. N. C. Wallace, Millbridge, Me. Albert W. Bee, Bar Harbor, Me. Spear, May & Stover, No. 408 Main street, Rockland, Me. George Bliss, Waldoboro, Me. William O.McCobb, Booth Bay Harbor, Me. Charles A. Harriinan, bath. Me. William Senter & Co., No. 61 Exchange street, Portland, Me. P. A. Chisolm, No. 161 Main street, Gloucester, Mass. Charles C. Hutchinson, No. 152 State street, Boston, Mass. Samuel Thaxter & Son, No. 125 State street, Boston, Mass. E. St. Croix Oliver, Vineyard Haven, Mass. C. R. Sherman & Son, New Bedford, Mass. George A. Stockwell, No. 12 Board of Trade Building, Providence, B. I. J. M. K. South wick. No. 185 Thames street, Newport, B. I. C. C. Ball, Block Island. James H. Stivers, No. 72 Water street, Stonington, Conn. A. H. Kellam, New Haven, Conn. t ) 240 LIST OP AGENTS. T, 8. & J. D. Negus, No. 140 Water street, New York City. R. Merrill's Sons, No. 110 Wall street, New York City. Michael Rupp & Co., No. 39 South street, New York City. D. Eggert's Sons, No. 3 Hanover street, New York City. John Bliss &, Co., No. 128 Front street. New York City. Thomas Manning, No. 45 Broadway, New York City. E. Stoiger & Co., No. 2.5 Park Place, New York City. Frank M. Porch, customhonso, Bridgeton, N. .J. Riggs & Bro., No. 221 Walnut street, Philadelphia, Pa. F. J. 81oane & Co., corner Pratt street and Speer's whtirf, Baltimore, Md. M. V. O'Neal, No. 502 East Pratt street, Baltimore, Md. J. .1. Chapman, No. 608 Thirteenth street, Washington, D. C. W. H. Lowdermilk & Co., No. 1424 F street NW., Washington, D. C. J. II. Iliikcox, No. 906 M street NW., Washington, D. C. Wm. BiiUentine &. Sons, No. 428 Seventh street NW., Washington, D. C. R. Bell's Sons, South Fairfax street, Alexandria, Ya. C. F. Greenwood & Bro., No. 158 Main street, Norfolk, Vo. Vickery & Co., No. 124 Main street, Norfolk, Va. Frank Stanton, No. 1301 Market street. Wheeling, W. Va. Godfrey Hart, No. 24 South Front street, Wilmington, N. C. W. N. Harris, with Geo. Harris & Co., North Water street, Wilmington, N. C. James Allen & Co., Charleston, S. C. J. P. Johnson, customhouse. Savannah, Ga. W. S. Cherry &, Co., No. 89 Bay street, Savannah, Ga. J. W. Howell, customhouse, Femandina, Fla. The H. and W. B. Drew Co., Jacksonville, Fla. Robert Ransom, Titusville, Fla. Brelsford Bros., Palm Beach, Fla. H. B. Boyer, Key West, Fla. Alfred Brest, office of lighthouse inspector, Key West, Fla. Babbitt & Co., Franklin street, Tampa, Fla. C. D. Webster, Nos. 83 and 85 Tarpon avenue, Tarpon Springs, Fla. Henry Horsier & Co., Nos. 706 and 708 South Palafox street, Peusacola, Fla. McKenzie, Oerting & Co., No. 599 South Palafox street, Pensaoola, Fla. K. B. Harvey, Funta Gorda, Fla. Costello & Bates Co., Nos. 24 and 26 Front street. Mobile, Ala. Jas. I. Friar, Pascagoula, Miss. L. Frigerio (widow). No. 1019 Canal street, New Orleans, La. Woodward, Wight & Co., Nos. 38, 40, 42 Canal street, New Orle&ns, La. Frigerio & SchuUy, No. 85 Royal street, New Orleans, La. Chas. F. Trube, Galveston, Tex. £. M. Burbeck, corner Fifth and D streets, San Diego, Cal. W. L. Banning, San Pedro, Cal. StoU & Thayer Co., No. 139 South Spring street, Los Angeles, Cal. H. A. C. McPhail, Santa Barbara, Cal. 8. S. Amheim, No. 8 Stuart street, San Franoisco, Cal. Dillon & Co., No. 310 California street, San Francisco, Cal. Louis Weule, No. 418 Battery street. Son Francisco, Cal. H. Luwrenson, No. 6 Market street, San Friuioisco, Cal. James £. Matthews, Eureka, Humboldt County, Cal. Griffon &, Reed, Astoria, Oreg. J. K. Gill & Co., Nos. 28 and 30 First street, Portland, Oreg. Waterman & Katz, Port Townsend, Wash. Yaughen &. Morrill, Tacoma, Wash. Boeringer & Co., Tacoma, Wash. Frank F. Dow, New Whatcom, Wash. moTe, Md. D. C. ;on, D. C. mington, X. G. Fla. usacola, Fla. >la, Fla. B&na, La. }al. LIST OF AUUiNlU 241 Lowman iV. Han ford, Snnttl«, Wash. W. 11. riiiiiphroy, Kc-iittlo, Wagh. Edward De Urofl, Sitka, Alaska. AGENTS IN KOREinN PORTS. '1. N. Hibhen & Co., No. fiO Oovernnitnt Htrct^t, Victoria, nritisli Pnlir ibi.-*. Albo t IKTord, No. 58 Cordova stroit, N'uiiconvor, liritiHli Columbia. (iiirrctt Hyrne, St. .IdIiik, Nowfoim.llMiid. Alex, llaiii. Port Ihiwkesbiiry, NovuSrofia. Robert U. Co^cHwell, Halifax, Nova Scotia. J. & A. McMillan. St. .John, Now ItniiiHwick. Heam & Harrison, No. ICIO Notro Danio street, Montroal, Canada. Hiintor &, Grant, Ilaiiiilton, Ontario. T. Darling & Co., NaHsaii, Ualiania. E. J.l). Astwood, TnrkH Inland. Edwin W. Wilson, Nos. 11 and 43 Obispo stroot, Havana, Cnba. Jnan B. Carbo, United States vice-consul, CienfuogoH, Cuba. •J. P. Thorson, St. Thomas, West Indies. JamoB Gall, Kingston, Jamaica. John A. Donnaticn, Port of Spain, Trinidad, West Indies. 0. Anncianx, United Status cousulat